SA21 9243 0_System_34_Functions_Reference_Dec77 0 System 34 Functions Reference Dec77
SA21-9243-0_System_34_Functions_Reference_Dec77 SA21-9243-0_System_34_Functions_Reference_Dec77
User Manual: SA21-9243-0_System_34_Functions_Reference_Dec77
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 282
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
.
--- - - ---- ------- - - ----...
5A21 -9243-0
File No. 534-01
IBM System/34
Functions Reference
I
---- - - ---------- - - -- - .,
5A21-9243-0
File No. 534-01
IBM System/34
Functions Reference
Preface
This reference manual is intended for persons interested
in the operation and characteristics of the System/34 at
the machine code level. Readers should be familiar with
data processing techniques and should understand
programming at the machine code level.
This manual describes the machine instructions, status
bytes, and other information needed to understand
system programs from the hardware viewpoint.
Related Publications
• IBM System/34 System Support Reference Manual,
SC21-5155
• IBM System/34 Operator's Guide, SC21-5158
• IBM System/34 System Data Areas and Diagnostic
Aids Handbook, LY21-0049
• IBM System/34 Displayed Messages Guide,
SC21-5159
First Edition (December 1977)
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; any such change will be
included in a revision or technical newsletter to this manual.
Requests for copies of IBM publications should be made to your IBM
representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality.
A Reader's Comment Form is at the back of this publication. If the form has
been removed, address your comments to I BM Corporation, Publications,
Department 245, Rochester, Minnesota 55901. Comments become the property
of IBM.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1977
(
Contents
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
Parts of the System
Main Storage and Processor.
Display Station .
Serial Printer.
Line Printer
Disk Storage .
Diskette Drive
Data Communications Feature
Data Formats .
Character Format .
Binary Format (Logical Data) .
Hexadecimal Notation .
Parity .
Addressing .
Direct Addressing
Base Displacement Addressing .
Instruction Formats
Command Instructions
One-Address Instructions
Two-Address Instructions
Modes of System Operation
Burst Mode
Cycle Steal Mode
Interrupt Mode .
Process Mode
Instruction Registers .
Instruction Address Register (lAR)
Address Recall Register (ARR)
Index Registers 1 and 2 (XR1 and XR2)
Op Register
Q Register.
Program Mode Register .
Address Translation Registers (ATRs)
Input/Output Blocks (lOBs)
General Input/Output Operations
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
CHAPTER 2. CONTROL PANELS
Operator Panel
Power Switch
Power Light
Load Switch/Light
System In Use Light
Power Check Light
Thermal Check Light
Processor Check Light
Console Check Light
Immediate Power Off Switch
CE Panel and Subpanel
Start Switch .
MSP Running Light.
Stop Switch
Stop Light.
Address/Data and Display/Data Switches.
Mode Selector Switch
Toggle Switches
Display Lights
Lamp Test Switch
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
0
0 .
\
/
1-1
2-1
3-1
CHAPTER 3. MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS
ARITHMETIC MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS
Zero and Add Zoned (ZAZ) .
Add Zoned Decimal (AZ) .
Subtract Zoned Decimal (SZ)
Add Logical Characters (ALC) .
Subtract Logical Characters (SLC)
Add To Register (A)
DATA HANDLING MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS
Move Hexadecimal Character (MVX) .
Move Characters (MVC)
Edit (ED) .
Insert and Test Characters (lTC)
Move Logical Immediate (MVI)
Set Bits On Masked (SBN)
Set Bits Off Masked (SBF)
Store Register (ST)
Load Register (L)
Load Index Register (LA)
Transfer (XFER) .
LOGICAL MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS
Compare Logical Characters (CLC) .
Compare Logical Immediate (eLI)
Test Bits On Masked (TBN)
Test Bits Off Masked (TBF)
Branch On Condition (BC)
Jump On Condition (JC)
Load Program Mode Register (LPMR)
Supervisor Call (SVC)
General Wait
General Post
Event Wait.
Event Post
Transfer Control/System Transient
Free Current Request Block .
Assign.
Free Assigned Areas
Sense Address/ Data Switches
Assign System Queue Space
Post Action Controller Status Word
Load Address Translation Registers
Set Program Mode Register
Queue/ Dequeue
System Control Block Access .
Main Storage Transient Scheduler.
Main Storage Transient Exit
Get Page.
Free Page
Asynchronous Task Wait.
Set Transient Area Not Busy
Post Action Control Element
Log Trace Information
Scan System Queue
Task Post
Task Wait
Resource Enqueue/ Dequeue
Dump Main Storage/Terminate Task
Test and Set
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-6
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-14
3-14
3-16
3-18
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-30
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-37
3-39
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-50
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-65
3-66
3-68
3-69
Contents
iii
Task Control Block Priority Queue
Asynchronous Task Ready Check
Prepare Print Buffer . . .
Sector Enqueue/ Dequeue
Fixed Disk lOS . . . . .
Diskette lOS . . . . . .
Work Station Printer lOCH
Work Station lOCH . . .
Data Communications lOCH
I/O Transient Request. . .
Action Control Element Build and Queue
Control Storage Transient Scheduler .
Task Work Area Accesses . . .
Main Storage Relocation Loader
CHAPTER 4. PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS.
Instruction Timings . . . . . . . . . .
Conditioning the Program Status Register
CHAPTER 5. PRINTER
Physical Characteristics
Printer Keys and Lights
5211 Printer Keys and Lights
Operator Panel Keys . . . .
Operator Panel Lights . . . .
5256 Printer Switches and Lights
Operator Panel Switches
Operator Panel Lights. . . . . .
Operational and Programming Characteristics
Terminal Unit Block
Printer Input/Output Block
Printer Output Data Stream
Printer Commands . . . .
Printer Status Bytes and Error Recovery Procedures
CHAPTER 6. DISK
Disk Surface . . .
Disk Operations. .
Starting a Disk Operation
Disk Addressing . . . .
Time Needed for a Disk Operation
Read Operations . . . .
Write Operations . . . .
Check Conditions and Status
Disk Operating Procedures .
Disk Program Load . . .
Alternative Sector Assignment
Alternative Sector Processing
Error Recovery . . . . . . .
Error Recovery by the IBM Input/Output
Supervisor Program . . . . .
CHAPTER 7. WORK STATIONS.
Physical Characteristics of the 5251 Display Station
Operational Characteristics of the 5251 Display Station
Operator Aids . . . . .
Keyboard Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Station Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Characteristics of the 5251 Display Station
Display Station Input/Output Block.
Read Commands and Control Commands
Display Station Output Data Stream
Format Table . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Station Status Bytes and Error Recovery
iv
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-73
3-75
3-75
3-76
3-76
3-77
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-81
4-1
4-1
4-2
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
.. 5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-9
5-13
5-13
5-18
6-1
6-1
6-3
6-3
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-11
6-11
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-18
7-1
7-1
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-12
7-14
7-15
7-19
7-21
7-27
7-32
7-33
CHAPTER 8. DISKETTE
Diskette Surface
Sector Format
Diskette Initialization
Diskette Operations .
Starting a Diskette Operation
Diskette Input/Output Block
Diskette Addressing
Diskette Seek Mechanism
Read Operations . . . .
Write Operations . . . .
Check Conditions and Status
Error Recovery . .
Initial Program Load . . . .
CHAPTER 9. DATA COMMUNICATIONS
Data Communication Networks
Point-to-Point Networks .
Multipoint Networks
Transmission Data Rates. . .
Special Communications Features
EIA/CCITT Interface . . . .
Internal Clock . . . . . . .
Data-Phone Digital Service Adapter.
Standard Communications Adapter Features
Rate Select . . . .
Automatic Answering . . . . . ..
Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem
IBM 2400 BPS Integrated Modem
Modem Features for the IBM 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem.
BSC Adapter . . . . . .
Transmission Codes
BSC Adapter Features
BSC Input/Output Block
Posting lOBs Complete .
BSC Adapter Controls
Framing the BSC Message
BSC Operations. . . . .
Enable/Disable BSC
Initialization Sequences . .
Transmit and Receive Operation
Transmit and Receive Initial Operation (Multipoint)
ITB Operation . . . .
Transparent Operation
Disconnect Operation
Receive Operation
2-Second Time-out . .
Data Checking and BSC Status Bytes
Suggested Error Recovery Procedures
BSC Error Recording
SDLC Adapter . . . . . . . . . .
SDLC Frame . . . . . . . . . .
SDLC Commands and Responses
SDLC Response Modes . .
SDLC Transmission States
SDLC Input/Output Block
Posting lOBs Complete .
Main Storage Data Areas
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-9
8-14
8-14
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-7
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-12
9-13
9-13
9-13
9-13
9-13
9-14
9-16
9-19
9-19
9-21
9-23
9-23
9-24
9-24
9-27
(
9-28
9-28
9-28
9-28
9-28
9-28
9-28
9-29
9-29
9-30
9-31
9-32
SDLC Operations . . . . .
Enable/Disable SDLC . .
Receive Initial Operation
Receive Operation . . .
Transmit Only Operation
Transmit Operation (Poll/Final Bit On)
Transmit Final Operation
Receive Delayed Operation
SDLC Status Bytes . . .
Zero Bit Insertion/Deletion
N RZI Transmission Coding
SDLC Error Recording . .
APPENDIX A. INSTRUCTION FORMATS
A-1
APPENDIX B. EBCDIC CODE MEANINGS.
B-1
APPENDIX C. POWERS OF TWO TABLE
C-1
•
APPENDIX D. BINARY AND HEXADECIMAL
NUMBER NOTATIONS
Binary Number Notation . . .
Hexadecimal Number System .
APPENDIX E. HEXADECIMAL-DECIMAL
CONVERSION TABLES . . . . . . . .
D-1
0-1
0-1
• • . .
E-1
APPENDIX F. POLLING AND ADDRESSING
CHARACTERS FOR TRIBUTARY
STATIONS
EBCDIC
ASCII . . .
F-1
F-1
F-1
GLOSSARY
G-1
INDEX . . .
X-1
INDEX' OF MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS BY
MACHINE CODE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . .
x-a
Contents
v
(
vi
Abbreviations and Acronyms
AQE
AZ
address field
alternating current
acknowledgment control character
advance
attention identification
add logical characters
arithmetic logical 1
arithmetic logical 2
address recall register
American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange
allocation queue element
add zoned decimal
BC
BCC
bps
BSC
branch on condition
block check character
bits per second
binary synchronous communications
C
CE
CHRNX
CLC
CLI
COD
CRC
CSIPL
control field
customer engineer
cylinder, head, record, record length,
number of records
compare logical characters
compare logical immediate
change-of-direction character
cyclic redundancy check
control storage initial program load
D
DISC
delete record
disconnect control character
A
ac
ACK
Adv
AID
ALC
AL1
AL2
ARR
ASCII
EBCDIC
ENQ
EOT
, ETB
ETX
F
FIFO
extended binary coded decimal
interchange code
enquiry control character
end of transmission control character
end of transmission block control
character
end of text control character
flag
first-in-first-out
H
head
I
I/O
lOB
lOCH
lOS
IPL
ITB
ITC
IUS
information field
input/ output
input/ output block
input/ output control handler
input/ output supervisor
initial program load
intermediate block control character
insert and test characters
intermediate block control character
JC
jump on condition
kbd
keyboard
L
LA
LIFO
LMPR
LRC
load
load address
last-in-first-out
load program mode register
longitudinal redundancy check
MIC
MSIPL
MVC
MVI
MVX
message identification code
main storage initial program load
move characters
move logical characters
move hexadecimal character
NAK
negative acknowledgment control
character
normal disconnect mode
number received
normal response mode
non-return to zero inverted
number sent
nonsequenced acknowledgment
NDM
Nr
NRM
NRZI
Ns
NSA
Abbreviations and Acronyms
vii
(
viii
Chapter 1. Introduction
System/34 is a small, work station oriented data
processing system. It works well in both batch and
multiple-station environments. The system has a system
console with a display screen and keyboard, and
optionally, up to seven attached work stations. Each of
these additional work stations may be either an
additional keyboard and display or a tabletop serial
printer. The display station is a 1920-character display
and an attached keyboard. The tabletop printer is a
serial matrix printer with printing speeds of 40, 80, or
120 characters per second.
The System/34 can also be configured with the
following units:
Display Station
The operator uses the display station to enter data to
the system and communicate with the system. Each
keyboard contains a set of alphameric keys (in the
standard typewriter format), a set of adding machine
keys in 10-key format, and a set of function keys the
operator uses to select system functions. The display
screen displays data and messages. Through
programming, characters can be displayed on the
display screen (and changed as needed) before they are
sent to main storage. Under program control, main
storage data and the contents of registers can be
displayed and, if desired, changed by use of the
keyboard.
• Line printer-160 or 300 lines per minute.
• Disk storage drive-one 8.6-megabyte drive, one
13.2-megabyte drive, or two drives totaling 27.1
megabytes.
• Diskette unit-diskette 1 drive or diskette 2D drive.
In addition, an optional feature permits attachment of a
data communications line, either sse or SDLe (SDLe
available at version 3).
The system overlaps operations of the input/ output
devices with each other and with processing unit
operations.
Serial Printer
The serial printer is a bidirectional printer that prints at
40, 80, or 120 characters per second. This printer prints
characters by a series of dots in a matrix; characters are
made by printing a pattern of dots that matches a
stored image in the printer adapter. The print line can
be up to 132 characters long, and the character set
contains 96 characters. In addition, the printer has a
switch controlled carriage that permits printing of either
" six or eight lines per inch.
Line Printer
The models of System/34 differ in main storage
capacity, diskette drive, and disk data storage capacities.
Figure 1-1 lists the available System/34 models.
PARTS OF THE SYSTEM
The line printer supplies fully buffered print rates of 160
lines per minute (Modell) or 300 lines per minute
(Model 2) with a 48-character set and 132 print
positions. A 64- or 96-character set is also available.
The printer has a switch controlled carriage that permits
printing of either six or eight lines per inch.
Main Storage and Processor
Disk Storage
Main storage minimum capacity is 32,768 (32K) 8-bit
data bytes with either 49,153 (48K) or 65,536 (64K)
bytes of main storage available.
The system unit, which has both a main storage
processor and an integrated control processor, supplies
all the arithmetic, logical, and input/output control
functions for the system.
Each System/34 model has a disk storage drive with a
disk that is not removable. Depending on the" model,
the disk storage is either 8,616,960, 13,271,040 bytes or
27,156,480 bytes.
Introduction
1-1
System
Model
Main Storage
Capacity
Diskette
Disk Data Storage
Capacity
A11
32,768 bytes
Diskette 1
8,616,960 bytes
A12
32,768 bytes
Diskette 1
13,271,040 bytes
A13
32,768 bytes
Diskette 1
27, 156,480 bytes
A21
32,768 bytes
Diskette 2D
8,616,960 bytes
A22
32,768 bytes
Diskette 2D
13,271,040 bytes
A23
32,768 bytes
Diskette 2D
27, 156,480 bytes
811
49,1 52 bytes
Diskette 1
8,616,960 bytes
812
49,152 bytes
Diskette 1
13,271,040 bytes
813
49, 152 bytes
Diskette 1
27,1 56,480 bytes
821
49,152 bytes
Diskette 2D
8,616,960 bytes
822
49,152 bytes
Diskette 2D
13,271,040 bytes
823
49,152 bytes
Diskette 2D
27,156,480 bytes
C11
65,536 bytes
Diskette 1
8,616,960 bytes
C12
65,536 bytes
Diskette 1
13,271,040 bytes
C13
65,536 bytes
Diskette 1
27,1 56,480 bytes
C21
65,536 bytes
Diskette 2D
8,616,960 bytes
C22
65,536 bytes
Diskette 2D
13,271,040 bytes
C23
65,536 bytes
Diskette 2D
27,156,480 bytes
Figure 1-1. System Models
(
1-2
Diskette Drive
Character Format
Each System/34 model has a diskette drive. The
system uses either the IBM Diskette 1 or IBM Diskette
20 (or equivalent). This permits the system to read
diskettes written by IBM 3741 Data Stations and similar
devices and to exchange data with other systems. Data
can also be written on diskettes and stored offline as
backup data and programs. Data on diskettes that will
not be used on other systems need not be in the basic
data exchange format.
In character format, each byte of data is divided into
two groups of 4 bits each. Bits 0-3 make up the zone
part, and bits 4-7 make up the digit part. The character
format represents a decimal digit, a special control
character, or one of the characters that can be printed
or displayed by the system (these characters are
graphics). The following shows the byte as interpreted
for character format.
o
Data Communications Feature
Each model of the system can have, as a special
feature, a communications adapter that supplies either
binary synchronous communications (BSC) or the
synchronous data link control (SDLC) (available at
version 3). The SSC permits communication between
System/34 and a remote system at data rates of from
600 to 9600 bits per second. SDLC permits
communications between System/34 and a System/370
operating with the virtual telecommunications access
method (VTAM). Data rates can be from 600 to 9600
bits per second.
2
3
4
5
6
7
p
Zone Bits
Digit Bits
For decimal arithmetic operations, the zone bits of the
rightmost byte in the field indicates the sign of the
numbers. (The system ignores the zone bits in all other
bytes during the operation.) Zones containing hex B or
o (binary 1011 or 1101) specify a negative number. Any
other hexadecimal digit in the zone specifies a positive
number.
DATA FORMATS
Binary Format (Logical Data)
Data in main storage is in 8-bit (plus parity) bytes. The
instruction the system is executing determines how the
data is used. A byte is used either as a character
(decimal, alphabetic, or special) or as binary numbers
(logical data).
The system uses EBCDIC (extended binary coded
decimal interchange code) for storing and processing
characters in main storage.
In binary format, bits in a byte define binary digits, and
the complete byte is an unsigned binary number (a
binary integer). Bits are said to be on if 1, off if O. The
following shows decimal 7 as a binary integer. Notice
that the parity bit is set to a (see Parity later in this
chapter).
p
o
o
o
o
2
3
4
o
o
o
5
6
7
Unsigned Binary Integer
Introduction
1-3
Hexadecimal Notation
Parity
Each byte can be divided into two groups of 4 bits, and
each of these groups can be represented as a single
hexadecimal digit:
Each byte contains a parity bit that is generated by the
system (and checked by the system during various
operations). This bit ensures that the number of bits set
to 1 in each byte is an odd number. (If the represented
data causes the byte to have an even number of bits
that are 1, the system sets the parity bit to 1 to make
the byte contain an odd number of 1-bits. If the
represented data has an odd number of bits, the system
sets the parity bit to 0 to maintain an odd number of
bits in the byte.)
.
L=
Ix,x,x,xlx,x,xlxl
'.~~/'~ ..
~/
Second (rightmost or low-order)
Hex Digit
First (leftmost or high-order) Hex
Digit
.
The hexadecimal value of each combination of binary
bits is:
Binary
Bits
Hex
Digit
Binary
Bits
Hex
Digit
0000
0
1000
8
1001
9
0001
0010
2
1010
A
0011
3
1011
B
0100
4
1100
C
0101
5
1101
D
0110
6
1110
E
0111
7
1111
F
ADDRESSING
Main storage is addressed in binary, using hexadecimal
notation. Its locations are consecutively numbered from
hex 0000 to the upper limit of storage. The location of
any field or group of bytes is specified by the address
of the rightmost (Jow-order or highest-numbered
address) byte in the field. The exception is the insert
and test character instruction, which specifies the
leftmost byte.
A main storage address can be specified by either of
two methods: direct addressing or base displacement
addressing. The type of addressing to be used is
specified by bits 0-3 of the first byte (the operation
code) of the instruction. These 4 bits are looked at as
pairs: bits 0-1 and bits 2-3. Bits 0 and 1 control
addressing for operand 1. Bits 2 and 3 control
addressing for operand 2. When bits 0-1 equal binary
11, operand 1 is not used; when bits 2-3 equal binary
11, operand 2 is not used. Figure 1-2 describes op
code functions in addressing main storage.
Throughout this manual, values stored in bytes are often
shown in hexadecimal.
(
1-4
Op Code
a 1 234 567
Ixlxlxlxlxlxlxlxl
'-'--'"
"'" -
~ Defines type of operation to be performed.
Bit
Specifies operand 2 main storage addressing activity for instruction:
Pair
2·3
Bit
00
Operand 2 of the instruction contains a 2-byte address (direct addressing).
01
Content of XR1 (index register 1) is added to the single byte in the operand
2 section of the instruction. The result specifies the storage location being
addressed (base displacement addressing).
10
Content of XR2 (index register 2) is added to the single byte in the operand
2 section of the instruction. The result specifies the storage location being
addressed (base displacement addressing).
11
Operand 2 portion of the instruction is not used to address main storage in
this instruction.
Pair
0·1
Specifies operand 1 main storage addressing activity for instruction:
00
Operand 1 of the instruction contains a 2-byte address (direct addressing).
01
Content of XR1 is added to the single byte in the operand 1 section of the
instruction. The result specifies the storage location being addressed (base
displacement addressing).
10
Content of XR2 is added to the single byte in the operand 1 section of the
instruction. The result specifies the storage location being addressed (base
displacement addressing).
11
Operand 1 portion of the instruction is not used to address ,main storage in
this instruction.
Note: When bits 0, 1, 2, and 3
storage.
= 1111
(hex F), the instruction is a command instruction and does not address main
Figure 1-2. Op Code Function in Addressing Main Storage
Direct Addressing
When either or both bit pairs in the code is 00, the
matching operand uses direct addressing.
When direct addressing is used, the storage address is
taken directly from the instruction. The address in the
instruction is 2 bytes long.
Introduction
1-5
Base Displacement Addressing
One-Address Instructions
When either or both bit pairs have one bit equal to 1
and the other bit equal to 0, the specified operand uses
base displacement addressing.
One-address instructions can be either 3 or 4 bytes
long. These instructions have either bit pair (bit 0-1 or
bits 2-3) of the op code being both 1's. The other bit
pair can be 01, 10, or 00. If these bits are 00,
addressing is direct and the instruction is 4 bytes long.
If the bits are 01 or 10, addressing is base-displacement;
the instruction is 3 bytes long; and index register 1 (01)
or index register 2 (10) is used. The a-byte of a oneaddress instruction can contain:
In base displacement addressing, the contents of the
1-byte address in the instruction are added to the
contents of a 2-byte address in an index register. The
index register to be used is determined by the bit that is
1 (Figure 1-2). Both bit pairs can use the same index
r~gister during the execution of an instruction.
• An immediate operand
Anyone value of an index register permits access to
255 storage positions.
• A mask
• A branch condition
INSTRUCTION FORMATS
• A data selection
Instruction formats are recognized by the way they
address storage. The length of each iristruction is
determined by the type of addressing being performed.
All instruction formats have two parts in common: the
op code and the a-byte. Each of these parts is one
byte long. The op code determines the type of
addressing (therefore format of the instruction) and the
operation to be performed. The function of the a-byte
is determined by the instruction and is described with
each instruction.
One-Address Instruction-Base-Displacement Addressing
Op Code
1110
1101
1011
0111
a-Byte
Operand
Displacement
0 3
Bits
One-Address I nstruction-Direct Addressing
Command Instructions
Command instructions are always 3 bytes long and all
bits of the op code are 1's. In a command instruction,
the Q-byte contains one of the following types of
information, depending on the instruction:
Op Code
0011
1100
o
Function specification
a-Byte
Operand
(highorder
byte of
address)
Operana
(Ioworder
byte of
address) .
3
Bits
Jump condition
Op Code
a-Byte
Command
1111
3
Bits
o
(
1-6
Two-Address Instructions
Two-address instructions can be 4, 5, or 6 bytes long.
This instruction type is distinct in that neither bits 0-1
nor bits 2-3 of the op code are a pair of 1's. If all 4 of
bits 0-3 are O's, addressing is direct, and the instruction
is 6 bytes long. If anyone of bits 0-3 is 1, one of the
addresses is direct; the other address is base
displacement, and the instruction is 5 bytes long. If 1
bit from each of the bit groups is 1, all addressing is
base qisplacement and the instruction is 4 bytes long.
The index register to be used in base displacement
addressing for either operand is determined by the bit in
the bit groups that is 1. If the bits equal 01, index
register 1 is used; if the bits equal 10, index' register 2
is used. Both addresses can use the same index register
during one instruction.
Two-Address I nstruction-Both Addresses Base Displacement
Op Code
0101
0110
1001
1010
o
a-Byte
Operand 1 Operand 2
Displace- Displacement
ment
3
Bits
Two-Address Instruction-Operand 1 Address Direct
Op Code
a-Byte
0001
0010
o
Operand 1 Operand 1 Operand 2
(high
(lowDisplacement
order
order
address
address
byte)
byte)
3
Bits
Two-Address Instruction-Operand 2 Address Direct
Op Code
a-Byte
0100
1000
o
Operand 2 Operand 2
(IowOperand 1 (highorder
Displace- order
address
address
ment
byte
byte)
3
Bits
Two-Address Instruction-Both Address Direct
Op Code
0000
)
o
a-Byte
Operand 1 Operand 1 Operand 2 Operand 2
(high(low(high(Ioworder
order
order
order
address
address
address
address
byte)
byte
byte)
byte)
3
Bits
Introduction
1-7
MODES OF SYSTEM OPERATION
Address Recall Register (ARR)
The system operates in four modes: burst, cycle steal,
interrupt, and process.
The system places the next sequential address (that is,
the address of the instruction that follows the branch on
condition instruction) in the address recall register when
the program branches. At the end of the branched to
routine, the program can load the contents of the
address recall register into the instruction address
register; this returns the program to the point at which
the branch occurred.
Burst Mode
The system operates in burst mode while it moves data
between main storage and the disk. In burst mode the
system has a dedicated data path and, once data
transfer starts, data moves quickly between the disk and
main storage until all the specified data has been
moved.
The address recall register is also affected by zero and
add zoned, load register, add to register, decimal add
and subtract, and insert and test characters instructions.
(All instructions are described in Chapter 3.)
Cycle Steal Mode
Index Registers 1 and 2 (XR1 and XR2)
Data may also be moved on a cycle steal basis. The
attachment starts a request; the control storage
processor addresses storage and controls the movement
of data to and from the attachment, and to and from
main and control storage.
Index registers hold base addresses for base
displacement addressing.
Op Register
Interrupt Mode
At the end of most input and output operations, the
control processor is signaled that the operation has
ended and that the program should branch to a special
interrupt handler routine. While the system is
processing data in the interrupt routine, it is said to be
operating in the interrupt mode.
Process Mode
The system is free to handle normal I/O control and
data processing operations when it is not operating in
either the burst mode, interrupt mode, or cycle steal
mode. At this time the system operates in process
mode.
The op register holds each control word as it is fetched
from main storage. Control words are used for
hardware functions and selections, setting of the
program status register, selection of the index registers,
and CPU clock controls.
Q Register
The Q register holds a byte that specifies the length of
the operands used in ALU operations. This length count
is decreased as the instruction is executed. It is also
used with the op register to control operations and to
select registers to be changed or stored.
INSTRUCTION REGISTERS
Instruction Address Register (lAR)
The instruction address register holds the address of the
first byte of the next sequential instruction in the stored
program.
(
1-8
Program Mode Register
The program mode register controls main storage
address translation and protection. Control storage
instructions are used to load or sense the program
mode register. The program mode register can also be
loaded from the main storage processor using the load
program mode register instruction. Bit assignments in
the 8-bit program mode register are as follows:
Translate mode is controlled through the program mode
register or control mode register contents. When in
translate mode, the program mode register or control
mode register direct main storage address register
(MSAR), bits 0 through 4, to select one of 64 address
translation registers. The contents of the address
translation register then perform the addressing function
of main storage address register bits 0 through 4. When
not in translate mode, main storage address register bits
o through 4 directly control main storage addressing.
Bit
Meaning When On
o
Dispatching disabled
INPUT/OUTPUT BLOCKS (lOBs)
Not used
Each input and output function has specific parameters
that the program must define before the operation is
performed. The parameters are moved into input/output
blocks, which are consecutive main storage positions
into which parameters are placed in defined fields.
2
Not used
3
Not used
4
Main storage processor instruction address
register is translated
5
Main storage processor operand 2 addresses
are translated
6
Main storage processor operand 2 addresses
are translated
7
Nonprivileged mode
Address Translation Registers (ATRs)
Address translation registers (ATRs) provide main
storage address translation capability by 2K address
blocks. Sixty-four local storage registers named address
translation registers (ATR) provide the address
translation function. Thirty-two of these are for
program level (task) address translation; the other 32 are
for input/ output uses.
When an input/output operation is started, the program
must present the address of the leftmost byte of the
input/ output block to the system (in index register 1).
When an input/output block is needed for a function, this
manual describes that input/output block in the chapter
that describes the function.
GENERAL INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATIONS
All input/output operations are done by the
input/ output task for that operation. At initialization
time, the control storage code for the I/O device is
loaded and the attachment is enabled.
Each ATR stores 1 byte of data. Address translation
register data contents of hex 00 through hex 1 F provide
address translation by addressing 32 pages (or 2K
bytes) in main storage. Storage protection for a 2K
address block is provided by loading its address
translation register with hex FF. The storage protection
mechanism is operable only when address translation is
in ·effect. Any attempt to access a protected storage
location causes a program check.
)
Introduction
1-9
(
1-10
Chapter 2. Control Panels
OPERATOR PANEL
Diskette Door
/
/
I
Power
Check
Thermal
Check
Processor
Check
Console
Check
e:
0
C
0
0
System
In Use
0
Load
0
Power
0
00
Figure 2·1. System/34 Operator Panel
Power Switch
0
Set the Power switch to I to power on the system. If
the keylock feature is installed, turn the key to the
horizontal (on) position. When you switch the power on,
a system reset occurs and the Power light comes on.
Set the Power switch to 0 to power off the system. If
the Keylock feature is installed, turn the key to the
vertical (off) position. When you switch the power off:
Load Switch/Light
Press the Load switch to start the control storage initial
program load and main storage initial program load
sequences.
When you press the Load switch, the Load light comes
on. The Load light remains on until the first part of the
control storage routine is loaded correctly.
• The Power light goes off.
System In Use Light
• The contents of registers and storage are lost.
The System In Use light comes on when one or more
programs or commands are active in main storage. The
System In Use light goes off when no programs or
commands are using main storage. When on, the
System In Use light indicates that programs have 'not
completed running, so the system should not be
powered off, and the Load switch should not be
pressed.
• Information stored in the power failure latches about
the most recent power failure is kept.
Power Light
0
The Power light is on when system power is on. The
Power light is off when system power is off.
)
Control Panels
2·1
Power Check Light
IMMEDIATE POWER OFF SWITCH
The Power Check light comes on if the voltage or
current in one of the power supplies does not meet
specifications. When the Power Check light comes on,
the system is powered off, but information stored in the
power failure latches is kept. If this. light is on, notify
the IBM customer engineer.
The Immediate Power Off switch, on the left side of the
system unit:
• Must remain set to I (on) during normal system
operation.
a
• When set to
(off), removes all system power
except AC to the 1/0 control supply.
Thermal Check Light
If one of the system thermal sensors detects an
overheated condition, system power automatically turns
off and the Thermal Check light comes on. The light
remains on until the overheated condition is corrected
and the Power switch is turned off. Power can then be
restored to the system by turning the Power switch on.
CAUTION
The Immediate Power Off switch is for emergency use
only. Do not use the Immediate Power Off switch to
power on and power off the system. When· powering
on, you must use the Power switch on the operator
panel to initialize the system correctly.
Processor Check Light
The Processor Check light comes on if the processing
unit senses an error for which there is no correction
procedure. If the Processor Check light comes on, press
the Load switch to start a new initial program load
sequence.
Console Check Light
The Console Check light comes on if the system console
or the work station controller fails. If the system
console fails, another work station can be assigned as
the system console before processing continues (if an
alternate is specified in the system configuration). If the
work station controller fails, the cause of the failure
must be found and corrected before processing
continues. The Console Check light goes off after the
cause of the failure is corrected.
(
2-2
CE PANEL AND SUBPANEL
Although this is called a CE panel, some of the switches
on the panel are used by the operator and the
programmer. When these switches are needed, the
specific application which needs them instructs you on
their correct use.
The Dply Pwr Chk switch, the Reset switch, and the CE
Start switch are for the use of the customer engineer.
The other switches are described in this section.
CE Panel
~
F 0
o
0
0
PROC RUNl
c:: ~:: (~ ::{ ~:: (~::4
L
9
8
7 1
9
R
7 2
9
8
7 3
9
8
7 4
I
I
L----DISPLAY/DATA
---------ADDRESS/DATA
DPLY PWR CHK
C~
f\
\
OFF
CLOCK
0
.
r-- PO
0
-
BYTE 0
MSP
RUNONG
DISK
OFF
0
DISK
MAIN
PROCINTERRUPT
r-Pl-
2
BYTE 1
04 0 01
o
00
0
RUN
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
842
1
8
4
2
1
1
LAMP TEST
0
0000 0000
0000
0000
8
4
2 1
842
1
o
IN~~L~T~~fS
DPLY PCR
FORCE
CLOCK MSIPL
CSIPL STaR SEL ADD CaMP
DISKETTE DISKETTE
ON
STOP
CTL
01234567
STOP
•
CE START
0 0 0 0 (1 f\
STOP
·L ·
SYS INSN STEP
MODE SELECTOR
0
PWR FAULT DPL Y CHECK
PREV
SEARCH RUN
[1
I
RESET
0
COMM
DPLY
ON
~~s)\~~~~:
STOP
START
/'
)
CE Subpanel
Control Panels
2-3
Start Switch
Address/Data and Display/Data Switches
The Start switch is on the CE subpanel, below the CE
panel. When the Stop light is on, the alter/display
routine is usually in control and the start switch has no
function, It only causes the Stop light to go off.
These four 16-position rotary switches are used in
conjunction with other switches on the CE panel to
enter, alter, or display data stored in main storage or
local storage registers. During normal operation, these
switches are se~ to the 0 position.
MSP Running Light
Mode Selector Switch
The MSP Running light is on the CE. subpanel, below
the CE panel. The MSP Running light comes on if the
Start switch is pressed and the system can execute
programs. The MSP Running light remains on as long
as the main storage processor clock is running. The
MSP Running light goes off when the main storage
processor clock is stopped.
During normal processing operations, the Mode Selector
switch must be set) to the Proc Run position. All other
positions are associated with diagnostic procedures used
by persons servicing your system.
Toggle Switches
Stop Switch
The Stop switch is on the CE subpanel, below the CE
panel. After each system instruction is executed, the
control storage routine tests to see if the Stop switch
was pressed. If the StoP. switch was pressed:
• The main storage processor stops.
• The control processor continues to run.
• The alter/display routine becomes active and the
option menu shows on the system console.
Except for the Comm Dply (communications display)
switch, the toggle switches on the CE panel are to be
set to the down position for normal operation. The
programmer or the operator may need to use these
switches for certain procedures. When this is
necessary, detailed instructions are given.
The Comm Dply switch is present on the CE panel only
if a communications adapter is installed on the system.
When set to the On position, the Comm Dply switch
activates the leftmost six lights at the bottom of the CE
panel. The lights indicate the status of the
communications interface lines as shown in the
following figure.
Stop Light
The Stop light is on the CE subpanel, below the CE
panel. The Stop light comes on:
• When you press the Stop switch.
• When the system has been powered on.
• If an address compare stop occurs for a main storage
address.
The Stop light goes off when you press the Load switch
or the Start switch.
(
2-4
PO
P1
0
0
Byte 0
0
1
2
3
4
Byte 1
5
6
7
0000
0000
-8 4
8 4
1
1
2
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0000
0000
8 4
1
1
8 4
2
2
'Receive data
Send data
Clear to send (transmit channel is available)
Request to send
Data set ready (local)
Data terminal read'y (local
Figure 2·2. Communication Display Indicators
Display Lights
The group of lights at the bottom of the CE panel
displays the contents of certain system registers and
presents system status information. The customer
engineer uses the Mode Selector switch to select the
type of information to be displayed.
Lamp Test Switch
When you press the Lamp Test switch:
• If system power is on, all system lights come on.
• If system power is off, but the circuit breaker (CB1)
is on:
- The Power Check and Thermal Check lights on the
operator panel come on.
The display byte 0 lights on the CE panel come
on.
)
Control Panels
2·5
(
2-6
Chapter 3. Machine Instructions
Each System/34 machine instruction is described here
in detail. The instructions are in three groups:
• Arithmetic
• Data handling
• Logical
)
Machine Instructions
3-1
Arithmetic Machine Instructions
ZERO AND ADD ZONED (ZAZ)
Operands
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
A 1(L 1),A2(L2)
04
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
A 1(L1 ),D2(L2,R1)
14
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR1
A 1(L 1),D2(L2,R2)
24
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1(L1 ,R1 },A2(L2)
44
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(L2,R1)
54
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(L2,R2)
64
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2},A2(L2)
84
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),D2(L2,R1)
94
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R2},D2(L2,R2)
A4
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
I
'The Q-byte designates the operand length:
U-L2 (4 bits) = the number of bytes in ?perand 1, minus the number of bytes in operand 2.
L2-1 (4 bits) = the number of bytes in operand 2, minus 1.
Maximum length of operand 1 is 31 bytes; maximum length of operand 2 is 16 bytes.
(
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
Program Notes
This machine instruction copies data from the second
operand, byte by byte starting with the rightmost byte,
into the first operand. If the first operand is longer than
the second operand, the main storage processor fills the
extra positions with high-order EBCDIC zeros (hex FO).
• The second operand is not changed unless the fields
overlap.
The main storage processor sets the zone bits of all
bytes except the rightmost byte in the first operand to
hex F (binary 1111). It sets the zone bits of the
rightmost byte in the first operand to (1) hex F if the
value moved is either zero or positive, or (2) hex D
(binary 1101) if the value moved is negative.
• The system stores the rightmost address of operand
1 in the address recall register (ARR) if not
recomplemented and the rightmost address minus 1
if recomplemented.
CAUTION
Overlapping the operands with the rightmost byte of the
first operand to the left of the rightmost byte of the
second operand destroys part of the second operand
before it is used in the operation.
(
3-2
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Zero result
6
Low
Negative result
5
High
Positive result
4
3
2
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
Test false
Bit not affected
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
Example
Instruction
I 04 I 22 I 00
10
00
I 20 I
Operand 1 before Operation
oooe 0000 OOOE OOOF
0010- Storage Positions
Operand 2 before and after Operation
001 E 001 F 0020_ Storage Positions
Operand 1 after Operation
DaDe 0000 OOOE OOOF 0010- Storage Positions
Program Status Register before Operation
00000001
o
7-Bits
Program Status Register after Operation
00000100
o
7-Bits
)
Machine Instructions
3-3
ADD ZONED DECIMAL (AZ)
Operands
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
A 1(L 1),A2(L2)
06
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
A 1(L 1),D2(L2,R1)
16
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR1
A 1(L 1),D2(L2,R2)
26
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1(L 1,R1 ),A2(L2)
46
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1(L1 ,R1 ),D2(L2,R1)
56
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(L2,R2)
66
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1, R2),A2(L2)
86
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),D2(L2,R1)
96
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1(L1,R2),D2(L2,R2)
A6
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
'The Q-byte designates the operand length:
Ll-L2 (4 bits) = the number of bytes in operand 1, minus the number of bytes in operand 2.
L2-1 (4 bits) = the number of bytes in operand 2, minus 1.
Maximum length of operand 1 is 31 bytes; maximum length of operand 2 is 16 bytes.
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
This machin'e instruction algebraically adds the second
operand to the first operand and stores the result in the
first operand.
The main storage processor sets the zone bits of all
bytes except the rightmost byte in the first operand to
hex F (binary 1111). It sets the zone bits of the
rightmost byte in the first operand to (1) hex F if the
result of the operation is either positive or zero, or (2)
hex D (binary 1101) if the result is negative.
• The second operand is not changed unless the fields
overlap.
• The system does not check for valid decimal digits in
either operand.
• The decimal overflow condition indicator (program
status bit 4), which may be set during this operation,
is reset by:
A system reset
- Testing decimal overflow with a branch on
condition or jump on condition instruction
- Loading a 0 in bit 4 of the program status register,
using the load register instruction
Program Notes
CAUTION
Overlapping the operands with the rightmost byte of the
first operand to the left of the rightmost byte of the
second operand destroys part of the second operand
before it is used in the operation.
3-4
• The system stores the rightmost address of operand
1 in the address recall register if not
recomplemented, or the rightmost address minus 1 if
recomplemented and the result is zero, or the
leftmost address minus 1 if recomplemented and the
result is not zero.
(
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Zero result
6
Low
Negative result
5
High
Positive result
4
Decimal overflow
Carry occurred from the
leftmost position of
operand 1
3
Test false
Bit not affected
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
Example
Instruction
I 06 I 22 I 00
10
00
I 20 I
Operand 1 Before Operation
I F7 I F6 I F3 I F6 I F9\
oooe 0000 OOOE OOOF
0010- Storage Positions
Operand 2 Before and After Operation
001 E 001 F 0020 -
Storage Positions
Operand 1 After Operation
I F7 I F6 I F7 I F9 I F41
OOOC 0000 OOOE OOOF 0010 -Storage Positions
Program Status Register Before Operation
00000001
o
7-Bits
Program Status Register After Operation
00000100
o
7-Bits
)
Machine Instructions
3-5
SUBTRACT ZONED DECIMAL (SZ)
Operands
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
A 1(L 1)'A2(L2)
07
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
A 1(L1 ),D2(L2,R1)
17
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR1
A 1(L 1),D2(L2,R2)
27
L1-L2
L2-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1 (L1 ,R1 ),A2(L2)
47
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1 (L1,R1 ),D2(L2,R1)
57
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(L2,R2)
67
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
01 (L 1,R2),A2(L2)
87
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
01 (L 1,R2),D2(L2,R1)
97
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R2),D2(L2,R2)
A7
L1-L2
L2-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
1The Q-byte designates the operand length:
U-L2 (4 bits) = the number of bytes in operand 1, minus the number of bytes in operand 2.
L2-1 (4 bits) = the number of bytes in operand 2, minus 1.
Maximum length of operand 1 is 31 bytes; maximum length of operand 2 is 16 bytes.
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
This machine instruction algebraically subtracts operand
2 from operand 1, byte by byte, and stores the result in
operand 1. The main storage processor sets the zone
bits of all operand 1 bytes except the rightmost byte to
hex F (binary 1111). It sets the zone bits of the
rightmost byte in operand 1 to (1) hex F if the result of
the operation is either positive or 0, or (2) hex D (binary
1101) if the result is negative.
Program Notes
CAUTION
Overlapping the operands with the rightmost byte of the
first operand to the left of the rightmost byte of the
second operand destroys part of the second operand
before it is used in the operation.
3-6
• The second operand is not changed unless the fields
overlap.
• The system does not check for valid decimal digits in
either operand.
• The decimal overflow condition indicator (program
status bit 4), which may be set during this operation,
can be reset by:
- A system reset
- Testing decimal overflow with a branch on
condition or jump on condition instruction
- Loading a 0 in bit 4 of the program status register
using the load register instruction
• The system stores the rightmost address of operand
1 in the address recall register if not
recomplemented, or the rightmost address minus 1 if
recomplemented and the result is zero, or the
leftmost address minus 1 if recomplemented and the
result is not zero.
(
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Zero result
6
Low
Negative result
5
High
Positive result
4
Decimal overflow
Carry occurred from the
leftmost position of
operand 1
3
Test false
Bit not affected
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
Example
Instruction
I I I I I I I
07
22
00
10
00
20
Operand 1 before Operation
oooe 0000 OOOE OOOF 0010
-
Storage Positions
Operand 2 before and after Operation
001 E 001 F 0020 -Storage Positions
Operand 1 after Operation
I I I I I I
F7
F5
F9
F4
F4
OOOC 0000 OOOE OOOF 0010 -Storage Positions
Program Status Register before Operation
00000001
o
7-Bits
Program Status Register after Operation
100000100
o
7-Bits
)
Machine Instructions
3-7
ADD LOGICAL CHARACTERS (ALC)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1(L1),A2
DE
L1-1
Operand 1 address
A 1(L1 ),D2(,R1)
1E
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp from
XR1
A 1(L 1),D2('R2)
2E
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp from
XR2
D1 (L 1,R1 ),A2
4E
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(,R1)
5E
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2('R2)
6E
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1(L 1,R2),A2
BE
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
D1(L1 ,R2),D2('R1)
9E
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R2),D2(,R2)
AE
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Operands
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
1The Q-byte designates the operand length:
Ll-1 = the number of bytes in either operand, minus 1.
Maximum length of each operand is 256 bytes; both operands must be the same length.
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction adds the binary number in
operand 2 to the binary number in operand 1 and stores
the result in operand 1.
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Zero result
6
Low
No carry occurred from the
high-order byte and result not
zero
5
High
Carry occurred from the
high-order byte and result not
zero
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
3
Test false
Bit not affected
2
Binary overflow
Carry occurred from the
high-order byte
Program Note
CAUTION
Overlapping the operands with the rightmost byte of the
first operand to the left of the rightmost byte of the
second operand destroys part of the second operand
before it is used in the operation.
• The system resets the binary overflow bit during this
operation if a carry does not occur from the
high-order byte.
(
3-8
Example
Instruction
I 5E 1 031 00 1 10 I
Note: Index register 1 = OCCO
Operand 1 before Operation
00110101
OCBO
11001011
OCBE
11101101
01100100
OCBF
OCCO
- - Storage Positions
Operand 2 before and a'fter Operation
01011011
OCCO
01010101
OCCE
01111000
11001101
OCOO
OCCF
-
Storage Positions
-
Storage Positions
Operand 1 after Operation
10010001
OCBO
00100001
OCBE
011 0011 0
OCBF
I
0011 0001
OCCO
Program Status Register before Operation
00000001
o
I
7-Bits
Program Status Register after Operation
00000010
o
I
7-Bits
Machine Instructions
3-9
SUBTRACT LOGICAL CHARACTERS (SLC)
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Al{L1},A2
OF
L1-1
Operand 1 address
A 1(L 1),D2(,R1)
1F
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp from
XR1
A 1(L 1),D2(,R2)
2F
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp from
XR2
D1(L1,R1),A2
4F
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(,R1)
5F
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2('R2)
6F
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),A2
8F
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
D1 (L1 ,R2),D2(,R1)
9F
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R2),D2(,R2)
AF
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 5
(
\
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
1The Q-byte designates the operand length:
Ll-l = the number of bytes in either operand, minus 1.
Maximum length of each operand is 256 bytes; both operands must be the same length.
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction subtracts the binary number in
operand 2 from the binary number in operand 1 and
stores the result in operand 1. If the second operand is
numerically larger than the number stored in the first
operand, the result occurs as if the first operand has an
additional high-order binary digit. The result can never
be negative. For example:
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Zero result
6
Low
Operand 1 was smaller than
operand 2 before execution
5
High
First operand greater than
second operand
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
3
Test false
Bit not affected
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
First operand
0110 1101
Second operand
0111 1110
Result
1110 1111
Program Note
CAUTION
Overlapping the operands with the rightmost byte of the
first operand to the left of the rightmost byte of the
second operand destroys part of the second operand
before it is used in the operation.
3-10
(
Example
Instruction
Note: Index register 2
= oeeo
Operand 1 before Operation
10010110
oeBD
01011010
oeBE
01110111
oeBF
10111111
oeeo
-
Storage Positions
-
Storage .Positions
_
Storage Positions
Operand 2 before and after Operation
01110100
oeeD
10000110
oeeE
01100010
oeeF
10100100
oeDo
Operand 1 after Operation
00100001
oeBD
11010100
aeBE
00010101
oeBF
00011011
oeeo
Program Status Register before Operation
00000001
a
7-Bits
Program Status Register after Operation
00000100
o
7-Bits
)
Machine Instructions
3-11
ADD TO REGISTER (A)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(binary)
·Byte 1
Byte 2
Al,RX
36
Rx
01(,R1),RX
76
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR1
pl(,R2),RX
86
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 4
Byte 3
Operand 1 address
, Rx specifies the register whose contents are modified by the machine
instruction.
20perand 1 is a 2-byte field addressed by its rightmost byte; operand
2 is not used.
Operation
Program Notes
This machine instruction adds the. binary number in
operand 1 to the contents of the 2-byte register
sEllected by the Q-byte and stores the result in the
register. The Q-byte coding is:
• This instruction changes. the contents of only one
register at a time.
Q-Byte
Binary
Hex
Register Specified
00000000
00
None. The system ignores
(no-ops) the instruction.
00000001
01
XR1.
0000 0010
02
XR2.
00000100
04
Program status register.
0000 1000
08
Address recall register.
0001 0000
10
Instruction address register.
00100000
20
Instruction address register.
01000000
40
Reserved; do not use.
10000000
80
Reserved; do not use.
• This machine instruction does not change the
operand.
• Subtract from the register by placing, in the operand,
the twos complement of the number to be
subtracted.
• Adding to the program status register causes
unpredictable results; a hex 04 is forced into the high
byte before the addition is done.
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Zero result
6
Low
Nocarry occurred from the
leftmost byte and result not
zero
5
High
Carry occurred from the
leftmost byte and result not
zero
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not used
3
Test false
Bit not used
2
Binary overflow
Carry occurred from the
leftmost byte
(
3-12
Example
Instruction
00000010
36
00
04
Operand 1
01001000
00100000
0003
0004
-
Storage Positions
Index Register 2 before Operation
00110101
01101010
Index Register 2 after Operation
01111101
10001010
Program Status Byte after Operation
00000010 )
o
7 " - - Bits
)
Machine Instructions
3-13
Data Handling Machine Instructions
MOVE HEXADECIMAL CHARACTER (MVX)
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1 (I),A2
08
I
Operand 1 address
A1(1),02(,R1)
18
I
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR1
A 1(1),02(, R2)
28
I
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR2
01 (I,R1 ),A2
48
I
Op 1 disp
from XR1
01 (I,R1 ),02(,R1)
58
I
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
01 (I,R1 ),02(,R2)
68
I
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
01 (I,R2),A2
88
I
Op 1 disp
from XR2
01 (I,R2),02(,R1)
98
I
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
01 (I,R2),P2(,R2)
A8
I
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
, I = one byte of immediate data that specifies which portion of each 1-byte operand is used in the operation.
280th operands are 1-byte fields.
Operation
Program Notes
This machine instruction moves the numeric part (bits
4- 7) or the zone part (bits 0-3) of the second operand
to the numeric or zone part of the first operand, as
specified by the a-byte. a-byte coding is:
• The six leftmost bits in the a-byte immediate data
should be O's.
Hex
Binary
Meaning
00
0000 0000
Move data from operand 2 zone
portion to operand 1 zone portion
01
0000 0001
Move data from operand 2 numeric
portion to operand 1 zone portion
02
0000 0010
Move data from operand 2 zone
portion to operand 1 numeric
portion
03
0000 0011
Move data from operand 2 numeric
portion to operand 1 numeric
portion
• The second operand is not changed unless both
operands specify the same byte.
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction does not affect the program
status register.
(
"
3-14
Example
Instruction
98
01
AO
65
Index register 1 = 2B 15
Index register 2 = 1 F2D
Operand 1 before Operation
2F
1 FCD -
Storage Position
Operand 2 before and after Operation
4C
2B7 A -Storage Position
Operand 1 after Operation
CF
1 FCO -Storage Position
)
Machine Instructions
3-15
MOVE CHARACTERS (MVC)
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1(L1)'A2
DC
L-1
Operand 1 address
A 1 (L 1 ),D2('R1)
1C
L-1
Operand 1 address
A 1 (L1 ),D2(,R2)
2C
L-1
Operand 1 address
D1(L 1,R1 ),A2
4C
L-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(,R2)
5C
L-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1(L 1,R1 ),D2(,R2)
6C
L-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),A2
8C
L-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),D2(,R1)
9C
L-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R2),D2('R2)
AC
L-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Op 2 disp from
XR1
Op 2 disp from
XR2
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
'The Q-byte designates the operand length:
L-1 = the number of bytes in either operand, minus 1.
Maximum length of each operand is 256 bytes; both operands must be the same length.
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction places the contents of operand
2, byte by byte, into operand 1. It is possible to
propagate one character through a complete field by
setting the operand 2 address one byte to the right of
the operand 1 address.
This machine instruction does not affect the program
status register.
Program Note
CAUTION
Overlapping the operands with the rightmost byte of the
first operand to the left of the rightmost byte of the
second operand destroys part of the second operand
before it is used in the operation. The second operand
is not changed unless the fields overlap.
(
3-16
Example
Instruction
Operand 1 before Operation·
1AOl 1A02 1A03 1A04 l.A,05 1A06 -
Storage Positions
Operand 2 before Operation
I 091
061
c21
c51
091
E31
285528562857 2858 2859 2B5A -Storage Positions
Operand 1 after Operation
I 091
o~
c21
C51
091
E3 1
lAOl lA02 lA03 lA04 lA05 1A06-Storage Positions
)
Machine Instructions
3-17
EDIT (ED)
Operand Addresses2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1(L1),A2
OA
L1-1
Operand 1 address
A 1(L1), D2(' R1)
1A
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp from
XR1
A 1(L 1),D2('R2)
2A
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op2 disp from
XR2
D1(L1,R1),A2
4A
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(,R1)
5A
L1-1
Op1disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R1 ),D2(,R2)
6A
L1-1
Op"1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),A2
SA
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),D2tR1)
9A
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R2),D2tR2)
AA
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 4
Byte 3
Byte 5
Byte 6
Operand 2 "address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
1The Q·byte designates the operand length:
ll-1 = the number of bytes in either operand, minus 1.
Operand 2 must contain as many bytes as there are hex 20s in operand 1.
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction replaces bytes containing hex
20 in operand 1 with characters from operand 2.
Starting at the rightmost position in both operands, the
processing unit inspects operand 1 for hex 20s. When
the system finds the first hex 20, it moves the first byte
from operand 2 into that hex 20 location, then inspects
the following bytes in operand 1 for the next sequential
hex 20. Locating the second hex 20, the system moves
the second byte from operand 2 into that operand 1
position. The operation continues until the last byte in
operand 1 "has been examined for hex 20. During the
operation, the system sets the zone bits of all replaced
operand 1 bytes to hex F (binary 1111).
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Operand 2 zero
6
Low
Operand 2 negative
5
High
Operand 2 positive
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
3
Test false
Bit not affected
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
Program Note
Operand 2 is not changed during this instruction.
(
\
3·18
Example
Instruct ion
Operand 1 before Operation
I $ 120 I ' I
ooB5
20
I 20 I 20 I
00B7
00B6
* I
I
t
00B9
00B8
I 20 1 20 I Li
OOBA
OOBB
OOBO
OOBF
OOBe
OOBE
,r-.Storage Positions
Operand 2 before and after Operation
Note: R represents hex 09 (-9)
0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 -
Storage Positions
Operand 1 after Operation
01 91 ~
00B5
00B7
00B6
00B8
I
*
t
00B9
OOBB
OOBO
OOBF
OOBA
DOBe
OOB E
\ - Storage Positions
Note: Storage position OOBO contains a 9 because the zone bits of all replaced characters in the edit pattern are set to
hex F (binary 1111).
Program Status Byte after Operation
00000010
o
7-Bits
)
Machine Instructions
3-19
INSERT AND TEST CHARACTERS UTC)
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1(L1),A2
08
L1-1
Operand 1 address
A 1(L1 ),D2(,R1)
18
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR1
A 1 (L 1),02(' R2)
28
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR2
01(L1,R1),A2
48
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
01 (L 1,R1 ),D2{,R1)
58
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR1
01 (L 1,R1 ),D2(,R2)
68
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1(L1,R2),A2
88
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
01 (L 1,R2),D2{,R1)
9B
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
01 (L 1,R2),D2(,R2)
A8
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
'The Q-byte designates the operand length:
LI-I == the number of bytes in either operand, minus 1.
Operand 2 is a I-byte field.
2Address operand I by its leftmost position.
Operation
Program Notes
The single character at the operand 2 address replaces
all the characters to the left of the first significant digit
in operand 1. Only the decimal digits 1 through 9 are
significant.
• Operand 2 is not changed.
If the leftmost byte of a field to be printed contains a
character that must not be' replaced (for example, a
dollar sign), the first operand should start with the byte
to the right of that character.
The operation occurs from left to right. Filling operand 1
with the character from operand 2 or finding a
significant digit in operand 1 ends the operation.
• At the end of this operation, the address recall
register contains the address of the first significant
digit; if no significant digit is found, it contains the
address of the byte to the right of the first operand.
This new information remains in the register until the
system executes the next decimal add, decimal
subtract, branch, zero and add zoned, or insert and
test characters instruction.
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction does not affect the program
status register.
(
3·20
Example
Instruction
I
09
OB
00
00
10
0
8
00B9
OOBA
B6
Operand 1 before Operation
I
$
I
00B5
0
00B6
00B7
00B8
0
OOBB
OOBe
9
OOBO
tJ
OOBE
*
OOB F -Storage Positions
Operand 2 before and after Operation
c:=J
001 O-Storage Position
Operand 1 after Operation
I
$
00B5
*
00B6
*
00B7
00B8
0
8
00B9
OOBA
OOBB
0
9
tJ
OOBe
0080
OOBE
*
OOBF -
Storage Positions
Note: The first operand does not include address 00B5.
Address Recall Register after Operation
00
88
).
Machine Instructions
3-21
MOVE LOGICAL IMMEDIATE (MVI)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,1
3C
I
D1(,R1),1
7C
I
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1('R2)'1
BC
I
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operand 1 address
'1 = 1 byte of immediate data (for example, 1 byte of actual data
on a 1-byte mask).
20perand 1 is a 1-byte field; operand 2 is not used.
Operation
This machine instruction moves the Q-byte into operand
1.
Example
Instruction
3C
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
AF
2F
CB
Operand 1 before Operation
This machine instruction does not affect the program
status register.
2FCB _
Storage Position
Operand 1 after Operation
2FCB -
Storage Position
(
3-22
SET BITS ON MASKED (SBN)
Operands
Al,1
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
3A
xxxx xxxx
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operand 1 address
01 (,Rl),1
7A
xxxx xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XRl
01 (,R2),1
SA
xxxx xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
1The Q-byte contains a l-byte binary mask specifying operand bits to
be turned on.
20perand 1 is a l-byte field; operand 2 is not used.
Operation
The system looks at the Q-byte, bit by bit. If it finds a
binary 1 in the Q-byte, it sets the corresponding bit in
the operand byte to 1; if the system finds a binary 0 in
the Q-byte, it does not change the corresponding bit in
the operand.
Example
Instruction
3A
I
01011010
20
00
Operand 1 before Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction does not affect the program
status register.
00001100
0020
-
Storage Position
Operand 1 after Operation
01011110
0020
-
Storage Position
)
Machine Instructions
3-23
SET BITS OFF MASKED (SBF)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Al,1
38
xxxx xxxx
Dl(,Rl),1
78
xxxx xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XRl
Dl (,R2),1
88
xxxx xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operand 1 address
1The Q-byte contains a l-byte binary mask specifying operand bits to
be turned on.
20perand 1 is a l-byte field; operand 2 is not used.
Operation
Example
The system looks at the a-byte, bit by bit. If it finds a
binary 1 in the a-byte, the system sets the
corresponding bit in the. operand byte to 0; if it finds a
binary 0 in the a-byte, i~, does not change the
corresponding bit in the operand.
Instruction
I'
38
10000001
30
Operand 1 before Operation
01111001
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
I
0030 This machine instruction does not affect the program
statu,s register.
00
Storage Position
Operand 1 after Operation
01111000
0030 -
I
Storage Position
(
3-24
STORE REGISTER (ST)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,RX
34
Rx
D1(,R1),RX
74
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR1
01 (,R2),RX
B4
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
1 Rx
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operand 1 address
specifies the register whose contents are to be stored.
20perand 1 is a 2-byte field addressed by its rightmost byte; operand
2 is not used.
Operation
Example
This machine instruction places the contents of the
register specified by the Q-byte into the 2-byte field
specified by the operand address. The Q-byte coding
is:
I nstruct ion
I 34 I
32
00001000
BB
Address Recall Register
Q-Byte
Binary
Hex
Register Specified
I OA
00000000
00
None. The system ignores
(no-ops) the instruction.
Operand before Operation
00000001
01
XR1.
00000010
02
XR2.
0000 0100
04
Program status register.
0000 1000
08
Address recall register.
0001 0000
10
Instruction address register.
00100000
20
Instruction address register.
01000000
40
Reserved; do not use.
10000000
80
Reserved; do not use.
I
CD
2F
C2
32BA
32BB
-
Storage Positions
Operand after Operation
I OA
32BA
CD
32BB
-
Storage Positions
Program Note
This machine instruction stores only one register at a
time.
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction does not affect the program
) status register.
Machine Instructions
3-25
LOAD REGISTER (L)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,RX
35
Rx
01 tR1),RX
75
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR1
01tR2),RX
85
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operand 1 address
, Rx specifies the register into which data is loaded.
20perand 1 is a 2-byte field addressed by its rightmost byte; operand
2 is not used.
Operation
Program Notes
This machine instruction moves data from the 2-byte
field specified by the operand address into the register
specified by the Q-byte. The Q-byte coding is:
• This machine instruction loads only one register at a
time.
Q-Byte
Binary
Hex
Register Specified
0000 0000
00
None. The system ignores
(no-ops) the instruction.
0000 0001
01
XR1.
0000 0010
02
XR2.
0000 0100
04
Program status register.
0000 1000
08
Address recall register.
0001 0000
10
Instruction address register.
0010 0000
20
Instruction address register.
01000000
40
Reserved; do not use.
1000 0000
80
Reserved; do not use.
• The six rightmost bits (bits 10-15) of the program
status register are condition indicators. These bits are
designated the program status byte throughout this
manual. The other program status register bits are
not used.
(
• You can use this machine instruction to perform an
unconditional branch without changing the address
recall register; load the branch to address into the
instruction address register. At the end of this
machine instruction, the program advances to the
machine instruction at that address.
• If this instruction is used to load the program status
register, the contents of the program status register
will be as follows:
Q-byte bits
Resultant PSR bits
567
X 0 0
X 0 1
X
0
X 1
567
100
001
010
o
0
X can be either 1 or O.
(
3-26
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction does not affect the program
status register unless that is the register specified by the
Q-byte.
Example
Instruction
35
00000100
00
11
Operand
100000000
00000010
0010
0011
I
-Storage Positions
Program Status Register before Operation
100000000
00110001
a
8
7
Byte
a
I
15-Bits
Byte 1
Program Status Register after Operation
(00000000
00000010
a
8
7
Byte
a
I
15-Bits
Byte 1
)
Machine Instructions
3-27
LOAD INDEX REGISTER (LA)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,RX
C2
Rx
01 (,R1 ),RX
02
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR1
01 (,R2),RX
E2
Rx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Direct address
, Rx specifies the index register to be loaded:
XR1 = hex 01 or 03
XR2 = hex 02 or 00
2A direct address is loaded when the machine instruction has a C2 op code.
When the op code is D2, the system adds the machine instruction byte 3
value to the contents of XR1 and stores the result in the index register
specified by the Q-byte. When the op code is E2, the system adds the
machine instruction byte 3 value to the contents of XR2 and stores
the result in the index register specified by the Q-byte.
Operation
This machine instruction loads the value specified by
machine instruction byte 3 or machine instruction bytes
3 and 4 into the index register specified by the O-byte.
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction does not affect the program
status register.
Example
Instruction
02
I 02
05
I ndex Register 1
2A
I
15
I ndex Register 2 after Operation
2A
1A
(
3-28
TRANSFER (XFER)
Operand
11,12
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
12
Byte 2
11
Byte 3
F5
xx
xx
Operation
If you use this instruction in your program, a program
check will occur.
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This instruction does not affect the program status
register.
)
Machine Instructions
3-29
Logical Machine Instructions
COMPARE LOGICAL CHARACTERS (CLC)
Operand Addresses 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1 (L 1),A2
00
L1-1
Operand 1 address
A1(L1),02('R1)
10
L1-1
Operand 1 address
Op 2 disp
from XR1
A 1(L 1),02('R2)
20
L1-1
Operand 1, address
Op 2 disp
from XR2
01(L 1,R1 ),A2
40
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
01(L1,R1),02(,R1)
50
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
'Op 2 disp
from XR1
01 (L 1,R1 ), 02(, R2)
60
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR1
Op 2 disp
from XR2
D1 (L 1,R2),A2
80
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
D1 (L1,R2),02(,R1)
9D
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR1
D1 (L 1,R2),02(,R2)
AD
L1-1
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Op 2 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
Operand 2 address
'The Q-byte designates the operand length:
U-l = the number of bytes in either operand, minus l.
, Maximum length of each operand is 256 bytes; both operands must be the same length.
2The operands may overlap. Address operands by their rightmost bytes.
Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction compares operand 1 with
operand 2, byte by byte, and sets the program status
register depending on the result of the compare. The
compare looks at each operand as a binary quantity;
that is, matching bytes from the two operands are
compared, bit for bit.
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Operand values are equal
6
Low
Operand 1 value smaller than
operand 2 value
5
High
Operand 1 value greater than
operand 2 value
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
3
Test false
Bit not affected
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
Program Note
Neither operand is changed by the machine instruction.
(
3-30
Example
Instruction
I OD I 02
12
00
00
02
Operand 1 before and after Operation
I
27
0010
I
FA
26
0011
0012
-
Storage Positions
Operand 2 before and after Operation
I 23
0000
FA
26
0001
0002
-
Storage Positions
Program Status Byte before Operation
00100001
o
I
7 -Bits
Program Status Byte after Operation
00100100
o
I
7 -Bits
)
Machine Instructions
3-31
COMPARE LOGICAL IMM'EDIATE (CLI)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,1
3D
I
01('R1),1
7D
I
Op 1 disp
from XR1
01(,R2),1
BO
I
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operand 1 address
'1 = 1 byte of immediate data (that is, 1 byte of actual data
that is to be used in binary form).
20perand 1 is a 1-byte field; operand 2 is not used.
Operation
Example
This machine instruction compares all the bits in the
a-byte with all the bits in operand 1 and stores the
result in the program status byte.
Instruction
I
3D
I
00
7F
21
Operand 1 before and after Operation
Program Note
Neither the a-byte nor operand 1 is changed by this
operation.
o
0021
-
Storage Position
Program Status Byte after Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Operand 1 value equal to
a-byte value
6
Low
Operand 1 value less than
a-byte value
5
High
Operand 1 value greater than
a-byte value
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
3
Test false
Bit not affected
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
3-32
00000010
o
7
I
~Bits
(
TEST BITS ON MASKED (TBN)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-~yte1
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,1
38
xxxx xxxx
D1(,R1),1
78
xxx x xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1 (, R2), I
B8
xxxx xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
(binary)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operand 1 address
1The Q-byte contains a 1-byte binary mask specifying operand bits
for testing.
20perand 1 is a 1-byte field; operand 2 is not used.
Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction tests specified bits in the
operand byte to see if they are on. For each mask bit
(Q-byte bit) on, the system tests the matching bit in the
operand. If any tested bit is off, the system turns the
test false indicator (in the program status register) on.
Bit
Name
'Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Bit not affected
6
Low
Bit not affected
5
High
Bit not affected
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
3
Test false
One of the tested bits not on
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
Program Notes
• The operand and Q-byte are not changed.
• The test false condition is turned off Py system reset,
by using test false as a condition in a branch on
condition or a jump on condition instruction, or by
loading a binary o into program status register bit 11
(bit 3 of the rightmost program status register byte).
Example
Instruction
I 38
00010110
00
21
Operand 1 before and after Operation
10010101
I
0021 -Storage Position
Program Status Byte after Operation
00010000
o
I
7 -Bits
'\
)
Machine Instructions
3-33
TEST BITS OFF MASKED (TBF)
Operand Address 2
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,1
39
xxxx xxxx
D1('R1)'1
79
xxxx xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XR1
D1('R2)'1
B9
xxxx xxxx
Op 1 disp
from XR2
Operands
Byte 4
Byte 3
Operand 1 address
'The Q-byte contains a 1-byte binary mask specifying operand bits
for testing.
20perand 1 is a 1-byte field; operand 2 is not used.
Operation
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
This machine instruction tests specified bits in the
operand byte to see if they are on. For each mask bit
(Q-byte bit) that is a 1, the system tests the matching
bit in the operand. If any tested bit is a 1, the system
turns the test false indicator (in the program status
register) on.
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Bit not affected
6
Low
Bit not affected
5
High
Bit not affected
4
Decimal overflow
Bit not affected
Program Notes
3
Test false
One of the tested bits on
• The operand and Q-byte are not cha~ged.
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
• The test false condition is turned off by system reset,
by using test false as a condition in a branch on
condition or jump on condition instruction, or by
loading a binary 0 into program status register bit 11
(bit 3 of the rightmost program status register byte).
Example
Instruction
I 39 I· 011 011 00
00
25
Operand 1 before and after Operation
I
10010100
0025
-
Storage Position
Program Status Byte after Operation
00010000
o
7
- - Bits
(
3-34
BRANCH ON CONDITION (BC)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte 1
(binary)
Byte 1
Byte 2
A1,1
CO
xxxx xxx x
D1(,R1),1
DO
xxxx xxxx
Disp from
XR1
D1(,R2),1
EO
xxxx xxxx
Disp from
XR2
Operands
Branch To Address
(hex)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Direct address
lThe Q-byte contains a binary mask specifying which program status
register positions are tested by the instruction.
Operation
This machine instruction tests the program status
register (rightmost byte) under control of the Q-byte. If
the register meets the condition set up by the Q-byte,
the system places the address of the next sequential
machine instruction in the address recall register, places
the branch to address in the instruction address register,
and branches to the branch to address. If the register
does not meet at least one condition set up by the
Q-byte, the system places the address of the next
sequential machine instruction in the instruction address
register, and the program advances to the next
sequential machine instruction.
The Q-byte determines what conditions are tested and
if the branch is to occur on condition true (when the
specified program status register bit is 1) or condition
false (when the specified progr~m status register bit is
0). When bit 0 of the Q-byte is 1, the branch occurs on
condition true; when bit 0 is 0, the branch occurs on
condition false.
Bits 2 through 7 of the Q-byte determine the bits to be
tested in the program status register. These bits, and
the conditions they represent, are:
Bit
Condition Tested
None (bit should be set to 0)
2
Binary overflow
3
Test false
4
Decimal overflow
5
High
6
Low
7
Equal
When bit 0 of the Q-byte is 1 (condition true), the
branch occurs if any of the indicators tested is 1
(associated bit is 1). When bit 0 of the Q-byte is 0
(condition false), the branch occurs if all of the
indicators tested are 0 (associated bits are all zero).
)
Machine Instructions
3-35
Program Notes
Example
• The address placed in the address recall register
remains there until a decimal add, decimal subtract,
insert and test characters, zero and add zoned, load
register, add to register, or another branch on
condition machine instruction is executed.
Instruction
• The program status byte is never equal to hex 00:
A Q-byte of hex 80, x7, or xF (where x is 0, 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) causes the system to ignore the
machine instruction (no operation occurs).
A Q-byte of hex 00, x7, or xF (where x is 8, 9, A,
B, C, D, E, or F) causes an unconditional branch.
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
I
CO
10001000
02
OBCD
OBCE
OBCC
BF
OBCF -Storage Pos
Program Status Byte before Operation
I
00011001
I
"Instruction Address Register after Operation
I 02
I
BF
Address Recall Register after Operation
I
OB
I
DO
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Bit not affected
6
Low
Bit not affected
00010001
5
High
Bit not affected
o
4
Decimal overflow
Turned off if tested;
otherwise not affected
3
Test false
Turned off if tested;
otherwise not affected
2
B'Inary overflow
I
Bit not affected
Program Status Byte after Operation
I
7 -Bits
(
3-36
JUMP ON CONDITION (JC)
Operand
A1,1
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte'
(hex)
R-Byte 2
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F2
xxxx xxxx
IAR disp
'The Q-byte contains a binary mask that indicates which
status register bits (the bits in the rightmost byte
of the program status register) are tested by the
machine instruction.
2The R-byte is a displacement which, when added to the
address in the machine instruction address
register, provides a jump to address.
Operation
This machine instruction tests the rightmost byte of the
program status register under control of the Q-byte. If
the register meets the conditions set up by the Q-byte,
the system adds the value stored in the instruction
R-byte (byte 3) to the contents of the instruction
address register and stores the result in the instruction
address register. The program jumps to the new
address stored in the instruction address register at the
end of the jump on condition operation. If the register
does not meet the condition(s) set up by the Q-byte,
the system advances to the next sequential machine
instruction in the program. The Q-byte determines
what conditions are tested and if the jump is to occur
on condition true (when the specified program status
register bit is 1) or condition false (when the specified
program status register bit is 0). When bit 0 of the
Q-byte is 1, the jump occurs on condition true; when bit
o of the Q-byte is 0, the jump occurs on condition
false.
Bits 2 through 7 of the Q-byte determine the bits to be
tested in program status register's rightmost byte.
These bits, and the conditions they represent, are:
Bit
Condition Tested
None (bit should be set to 0)
2
Binary overflow
3
Test false
4
Decimal overflow
5
High
6
Low
7
Equal
When bit 0 of the Q-byte is 1 (condition true), the jump
occurs if any of the indicators tested is on (associated
bit is 1). VV:hen bit 0 of the Q-byte is 0 (condition
false), the jump occurs if all of the indicators tested are
off (associated bits all are 0).
Program Notes
• The program status byte is never equal to hex 00:
A Q-byte of hex 80, x7, or xF (where x is 0, 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) causes the system to ignore the
machine instruction (no operation occurs).
A Q-byte of hex 00, x7, or xF (where x is 8, 9, A,
B, C, 0, E, or F) causes an unconditional jump.
)
Machine Instructions
3-37
Resulting Program Status Byte Settings
Bit
Name
Condition Indicated
7
Equal
Bit not affected
6
Low
Bit not affected
5
High
Bit not affected
4
Decimal overflow
Turned off if tested;
otherwise not affected
3
Test False
Turned off if tested;
otherwise not affected
2
Binary overflow
Bit not affected
Example
Instruction
I F2
00110000
OBBE
OF
I
OBBF -Storage Positions
Instruction Address Register after Operation
I OB I
CF
I
Program Status Byte before Operation
00001001
o
7
-Bits
Program Status Byte after Operation
00001001
o
7
-Bits
(
3-38
LOAD PROGRAM MODE REGISTER (LPMR)
Operand
11,12
SUPERVISOR CALL (SVC)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
12
Byte 2
Byte 3
,
I
F6
Operand
11
12,11
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
xx
xx
'The Q-byte is ignored but must contain valid parity.
Operation
This instruction loads the program mode register with
immediate d~ta from the R-byte if program mode
register bit 7 (non privileged mode bit) is not on. The
contents of the program mode register bits 0 and 4
through 7 are replaced by the corresponding values in
the R-byte. Bits 1 through 3 are ignored since these
bits are not used by the register.
The a-byte is ignored but must contain valid parity.
If this instruction is used when program mode register
bit 7 is on (program is not privileged), the instruction
execution is inhibited and a main storage processor
storage exception check occurs.
ReSUlting Program Status Byte Settings
This instruction does not affect the program status
register.
The supervisor call instruction stops the main storage
processor and generates an interrupt to the control
processor. The supervisor call processor saves the
current status of the main storage processor and uses
the R-byte to determine what type of supervisor call has
been requested. The individual supervisor call handlers
use the a-byte to further define the requested function.
The two primary types of supervisor calls are:
• Immediate supervisor call-The request is processed
immediately by the specified supervisor call handler.
Upon completion, control returns to the requesting
task and the main storage processor is restarted.
• Delayed supervisor call-Data related to this request is
saved in an action control element and chained to
one of the delayed supervisor call processor handier's
queues. Control is optionally returned to the
requesting task (see the a-bytes defined for each
delayed supervisor call) or to another task ready to
use the main storage processor.
The supervisor call instructions are 3 to 6 bytes long,
depending upon the number of inline parameters passed
with the request. The format and function of each
supervisor call is described on the following pages.
Control returns to the requesting task immediately
following the last byte of the requested supervisor call
instruction. A supervisor call op code cannot reside
within the last 5 bytes of the last 2K pages of a task.
Machine Instructions
3-39
GENERAL WAIT
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
xx
00
xx
xx
Op Code
The general wait supervisor call instruction allows
multiple tasks to wait on a specified condition. There
are 16 separate conditions which may be passed to the
general wait handler through the in line parameter list
(bytes 4 and 5). The. conditions passed are saved in the
caller's task control block in the field's TCBWMASK and
TCBWMSK2. The task will not receive control of the
main storage processor until one of the conditions being
waited on is posted using supervisor call 01 (general
post).
The first 8 bits of the inline parameter list (byte 4) are
reserved for use by the control storage supervisor:
Inline Parameter 1: General wait mask (byte 4).
Inline Parameter 2: General wait mask (byte 5).
Example
Program A wants to be placed into a wait state on the
printer. Another program (program B) currently owns
the printer resource. When program B is done with the
printer, the program always issues a general post
(supervisor call 01). Program A issues the following
supervisor call:
Bit
Meaning If On
Assembler
Object Code
o
System queue space (SOS) failure
(supervisor call 06 or OA)
Task work area allocate failure
Test and set failure (supervisor call 23)
Work station queue space (WSOS) failure
(supervisor call 06 or OA)
Resource enqueue failure (supervisor call 21)
Reserved
Sector enqueue failure (supervisor call 29)
Reserved
SVC 0,0
DC XL2'0080'
F400000080
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Program A will wait until the general post before
continuing.
In this example, program A and program B have
adopted the convention of using 0080 for the printer.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameter
Q-Byte: Bit
0-5
6
7
Meaning If On
Not used; must
be zero.
Main storage processor transient area
is not refreshable. The current transient
is locked into the transient .area for the
duration of the wait. This bit is
effective only when specified in
instructions executed in the main
storage transient area.
Not used; must be zero.
(
"
3-40
GENERAL POST
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
00
01
xx
xx
The general post supervisor call instruction allows a task
to post all tasks waiting on a specified condition. These
tasks are made ready and will receive control based on
their current priorities. The conditions specified on the
general post supervisor call must match the conditions
specified on the general wait (supervisor call 00). The
first inline parameter list byte (byte 4) is reserved for use
by the control storage supervisor.
A general post affects only those tasks in a general wait
at the time the general post is issued. A general wait
issued any time after the general post will not be
satisfied by that general post. The general wait task will
remain waiting.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameter 1: General wait mask post code (byte
4)
Inline Parameter 2: General wait mask post code (byte
5)
Example
A program owns the printer resource and now wants to
free it. A general post is issued for any program
currently in a wait state on the printer resource.
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 1,0
DC XLC'0080'
F400010080
In this example, the use of 0080 is by convention of the
main storage program issuing SVC 00 and SVC 01.
)
Note: If no tasks are currently waiting for the printer
resource, this supervisor call will not post any tasks.
Mach i ne Instructions
3-41
EVENT WAIT
Example
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
xx
02
The event wait supervisor call instruction allows the user
to wait for completion of a specified event (specific
wait) or anyone of a group of events (multiple wait).
For specific waits, the address of the event control
mask being waited on must be in index register 1 (XR1).
The event is defined as complete if the second byte of
the event control mask has bit 1 = 1. For multiple waits,
index register 1 must be set to 0000 before the event
wait supervisor call is issued. In this case, the wait is
satisfied if any event is complete for this task and bit 0
= 1 in the first byte of the event control mask. When a
multiple wait is satisfied, control returns with index
register 1 containing the address of the completed event
control mask.
A user issues a request for disk I/O. Index register 1
contains the address of the disk input/output block (hex
3000). The user issues an event wait supervisor call to
wait for completion of the disk operation.
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 2,0
F40002
with index register 1 containing address 3000;
locations 3000 and 3001 contain 0000.
When the disk operation is completed without error,
control returns with locations 3000 and 3001 (the event
control mask) containing hex 0040.
Note: Address 3000 is a translated address.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-4, 7
5
6
Meaning If On
Not used; must be
zero.
The address of the event to be waited
on is a real address.
The transient area is not refreshable.
The current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effec~ only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Index Register 1: Contains the address of the event to
be tested for completion. If index register 1 = 0000, this
is a multiple wait.
Output Values
Index Register 1: Contains the address of the event that
has satisfied this wait.
(
3-42
EVENT POST
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
xx
03
xx
xx
This event post supervisor call instruction indicates that
a specified event is complete. The event post instruction
uses the 2-byte event control mask whose address is
given by the requesting task in index register 1 (XR1).
The second byte of the event control mask is altered to
hex 4n where n is the completion code given by the
user in the second inline parameter byte (byte 5).
The first inline parameter byte (byte 4) specifies the
device type associated with the event. An action control
element, related to the event, must have previously been
queued to the system queue associated with the
specified device type. If the action control element is
not found, the event post request is ignored.
If the task associated with the event being posted is
waiting for the event to complete, the task will be made
ready and will be given control of the main storage
processor based on its current priority. The caller of
event post may set on the do not preempt bit in the
second in line parameter byte (byte 5) to prevent the
posted task from gaining immediate control.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Inline Parameter 2:
Bit
Meaning If On
o
Do not preempt task issuing event post
supervisor call.
Last-in-first-out (UFO) queue action control
element to complete queue of task being
posted.
Not used; must be zero.
Completion code (0- F).
2-3
4-7
Output Parameters
The TCB field TCB@INL4 contains the type byte
(ACETYPE) of the action control element that was
posted.
Example
Program A issues supervisor call 02 (SVC 02,00) with
index register 1 equal to 1000. Program B then issues:
Note: The event address must be in real storage.
Assembler
Object Code·
SVC 03,00
DC XL1'48'
DC XL1'84'
F400034884
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-5, 7
6
Meaning If On
Not used; must be
zero.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Inline Parameter 1: Offset into system queues of action
control element chain for this event.
Index register 1 points to location 1000 and locations
1000 and 1001 contain 0000.
After event post, locations 1000 and 1001 contain 0044
and program A will be made ready to run in the main
storage processor. Program A will not gain control until
program B issues a wait since the do not preempt
indicator is on.
Note: An action control element must be queued to the
header at location 0148 when the event post supervisor
call is issued.
)
Machine Instructions
3-43
TRANSFER CONTROL/SYSTEM TRANSIENT
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
xx
04
xx
The transfer control/system transient supervisor call
allows programs to pass control to specified, privileged
SSP routines.
The passed inline parameter is an offset into the
resident transient/transfer control table. This table
contains the address of the transient/transfer control
routine to be called.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-5
6
Transient Table Entry
Bytes 0, 1, 2
Byte 3
Disk sequential sector address of
transient.
Length of transient (0-8 = actual length
in sectors).
7
Meaning If On
Not used; must
be zero.
The transient area is not refreshable.
The current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Return control to caller if caller is a
transient or transfer control routine.
Inline Parameter 1: Offset in table of transfer /transient
table entry.
Transfer Control Table Entry
Bytes 0, 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Main storage address of routine.
The program mode register setting to
be used for this routine.
Bit 2 = 1 indicates that this routine is
privileged.
Bit 3 = 1 indicates that this is a
transfer control table entry.
For transient requests, the caller's task control block is
placed on the system queue for transients. The transient
is given control when the transient area becomes
available. Transfer routines are given control
immediately.
This supervisor call is privileged for certain routines.
Example
Program A issues a transfer control with inline
parameter 1 equal to hex 13.
'
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 4,0
DC XL 1'13'
F4000413
The value in the table related to hex 13 is 10808010.
After this supervisor call, program A is given control
with the instruction address register equal to 1080 and
dispatching disabled.
Note: Instruction address register translate and
nonprivileged mode are always set off with a transfer
control instruction.
(
3-44
FREE CURRENT REQUEST BLOCK
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
05
The current request block is dequeued from the task
control block request block chain and freed.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Output Values
The task control block field TCBCRB now contains the
address of the second request block on the chain (or all
zeros if only one request block was on the chain).
Example
Program A issues a free current request block supervisor
call with TCBCRB = 0600 and locations 0600 and 0601
contain 0630.
After the user issues:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 05,00
F40005
the TCBCRB
= 0630.
)
Machine Instructions
3-45
ASSIGN
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
F4
xx
06
xx
xx
xx
Op Code
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
The assign supervisor call instruction allocates storage
out of one of the system free space areas. Storage is
assigned in multiples of 8 bytes on 8- byte boundaries.
A set of eight system queue headers are reserved for
various types of assigns. The area to use is indicated
by the third inline parameter (byte 6).
Inline Parameter 3: Type of request.
Bit
Meaning
o
(If = 1) Oueue area to task control block and
save length.
(If = 0000000) Use work station queue
space.
(If = 0000001) Use system queue space.
1-7
An option to queue assigned areas to the requester's
task control block is available using the third inline
parameter (bit 0 = 1). The requester must add 4 bytes
to the length of the area needed. The last 4 bytes of
the area assigned are used by the control storage
supervisor to maintain the queue. The requester must
not alter this area.
If sufficient space is not available, the user may either
wait for free space to become available or have control
returned immediately with index register 1 set to all
zeros (0000). Requests for large amounts of free space
are more likely to fail since the area assigned is always
contiguous space.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte Bit
Meaning If On
1-7
Output Values
Index Register 1: Address of the area assigned (zero if
no space is assigned and the no wait option of the
O-byte is specified).
Example
Program A issues the assign supervisor call to allocate
256 bytes of storage from system queue space (SOS).
Program A is willing to wait for the storage if space is
not immediately available.
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 06,01
DC XL2'0104'
DC XL 1'81'
F40106010481
0-5
Not used; must be zero.
6
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
After this supervisor call has executed, an area of hex
0108 is assigned to program A. The last 4 bytes are
used to queue this area to program A's task control
block. The address of the hex 0100 bytes allocated to
the program is returned in index register 1 (that is, for
example, index register 1 contains 4858).
7
Wait for assign area to become
available.
Note: This is always an 8-byte boundary.
Inline Parameters 1 and 2: Length of area to assign.
(
3-46
FREE ASSIGNED AREAS
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
F4
xx
07
xx
xx
xx
Op Code
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
The free instruction returns previously assigned storage
to the system free space areas. This area freed is either
merged to one of the current free areas (if adjacent) or
queued to the free chain. The free area to use as well
as the type of assign used when getting storage
(queued or not queued) must be indicated. This
supervisor call also permits a partial free of the originally
assigned area (nonqueued only) as long as the area
freed is a multiple of 8 bytes on an 8-byte boundary.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Example
Program A wants to free 256 bytes of storage
previously assigned from system queue space. The
address of the area assigned is hex 4858. The original
request was a queued request. Program A loads index
register 1 with hex 4858 and issues:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 07,00
DC XL2'0104'
DC XL1'81'
F40007010481
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameters 1 and 2: Length of area to free. (A
value equal to the value assigned should be specified.
The area freed will be a multiple of 8 bytes.)
The area is first dequeued from program A's task
control block. Then the total area of hex 0108 bytes is
freed and made available for other users of system
queue space.
Inline Parameter 3: Type of request.
Bit
Meaning
o
(If = 1) The area has been queued by assign.
(If = 0000000) Use work station queue
space.
(If = 0000001) Use system queue space.
1-7
1-7
Index Register 1: Address of area to free.
')
/
Machine Instructions
3-47
SENSE ADDRESS/DATA SWITCHES
Op Code
Q-Byte
(hex) .
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
xx
09
This function allows a main storage program to sense
the Address/Data switches. The value ih these
switches is returned in index register 1.
This supervisor call is nonprivileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Example
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 09,00
F40009
Control returns with index register 1 sat to the current
value of the Address/Data switches. (If the
Address/Data switches are set to FF001 index register 1
will contain FFOO.)
(
\..
3-48
ASSIGN SYSTEM QUEUE SPACE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
xx
OA
xx
The assign system queue space supervisor call
instruction allocates storage out of one of the system
free space areas. Storage is assigned in multiples of 8
bytes on 8-byte boundaries. A set of eight system
queue headers are reserved for various types of assigns.
The area to use is indicated by inline parameter 1 (byte
4).
An option to queue assigned areas to the requester's
task control block is available using inline parameter 1
(byte 4-bit 0 = 1). The requester must add 4 bytes to
the length of the area needed. The last 4 bytes of the
area assigned are used by the control storage supervisor
to maintain the queue. The requester must not alter this
area.
Inline Parameter 1: Type of request.
Bit
Meaning
o
Queue area to task control block and save
length.
(Equal to 0000000) Use work station queue
space.
(Equal to 0000001) Use system queue
space.
1-7
1-7
Index Register 1: Length of area to assign.
Output Values
If sufficient space is not available, the user may either
wait for free space to become available or have control
returned immediately with index register 1 set to all
zeros (0000). Requests for large amounts of free space
are more likely to fail since the area assigned is always
contiguous space.
Index Register 1: Address of the area assigned (zero if
no space is assigned and the no wait option of the
Q-byte is specified.)
This supervisor call is privilegea.
Program A wants to assign N bytes of storage from
work station queue space (WSQS). The length of this
area is passed to program A. Program A will not wait
for the storage if it is not available.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-5
6
7
Example
Meaning If On
Assembler
Object Code
Not used; must be zero.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait for assign area to become
available.
L LENGTH (,XR2),XR1
SVC 10,00
DC XL1'00'
F4000AOO
After the execution of this supervisor call, program A's
index register 1 contains the address of the area
. assigned (3290) or all zeros (0000) if the length
requested was not available.
)
Machine Instructions
3-49
POST ACTION CONTROLLER STATUS WORD
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
00
OB
xx
This· routine posts the appropriate control storage
routine to be executed. The control storage routine will
receive control based on its priority after the supervisor
call has executed.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameter 1: The mask value associated with the
action controller routine to be posted.
Example
Program A issues the following instruction:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,11
DC XL1'1T
F4000B17
The action controller routine associated with the value
hex 17 will be given control after this routine is
executed. The exact time control is passed to the
routine is dependent upon other work being done by the
control storage processor.
(
3-50
LOAD ADDRESS TRANSLATION REGISTERS
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
OC
This instruction loads the task address translation
registers. The values loaded into the address translation
registers are the values found in the caller's task control
block (TCB) field TCBATRS.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Example
Program A issues the following instruction:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,12
F4000C
with the TCBATR field set to:
OCODOEOF101112FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
After executing the load address translation registers
instruction, the values above are loaded into the task
address translation registers. These values will be used
for all translated requests.
)
Machine Instructions
3-51
SET PROGRAM MODE REGISTER
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
00
OD
xx
xx
This instruction alters the main storage caller's program
mode register according to the inline parameter list.
Example
Program A issues the following instruction:
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,13
DC XL2'S400'
F4000DS400
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
with the program mode register set to hex OA.
Inline Parameter 1:
Byte 1 (hex)
SO
70
OS
04
02
01
After the instruction is executed, the program mode
register contains hex SE.
Disable task dispatching
Reserved
Turn on instruction address register translation 1
Turn on operand 2 address translation
Turn on operand 1 address translation
Change from privileged to nonprivileged mode
Byte 2 (hex)
SO
70
OS
04
02
Enable task dispatching
Reserved
Turn off instruction address register translation 1
Turn off operand 2 address translation
Turn off operand 1 address translation
1Altering
the instruction address register translation results in
branching from the current value in the instruction
address register, under current translation, to the same
address in the opposite translation.
3-52
(
QUEUE/DEQUEUE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
F4
00
OE
xx
xx
xx
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
This instruction provides the functions to maintain the
system queues. The functions provided are:
Bit
Meaning If On
o
Priority request
System request (system queue header
passed)
Dequeue request
LI FO request
Priority field displacement (O- F)
• Queue FIFO (first-in-first-out): Place block at end of
queue.
2
• Queue LIFO (\ast-in-first-out): Place block first on
queue.
• Queue FIFO by priority: Place block at end of blocks
of equal priority.
• Queue LI FO by priority: Place block at front of blocks
of equal priority.
3
4-7
Index Register 1: Address of control block.
Index Register 2: Address of queue header for
nonsystem requests.
• Dequeue.
Example
These functions are provided for any of the system
queues or for a queue header passed by the caller. The
chaining field may be located anywhere within the first
256 bytes of the block to be manipulated. The priority
field, if given, must be located within the first 16 bytes
of the block to be queued.
Program A wants to FIFO queue control block X to the
system queue located at offset hex 4E into the system
queues. The offset into the control block of the chaining
field is hex 06.
No check is made for an invalid queue (that is, never
ending or recursive queue). All blocks mu~t be located
in real storage.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,14
DC XL3' 4E0640'
F4000E4E0640
with index register 1 containing 34A8, location 34A8
and the following locations containing
000044008700329000.
Currently the given system queue has the following
values:
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
In line Parameter 1: Displacement of queue header from
start of system queue headers (for system requests)-Ieft
byte.
014E = 42FO
42FO = 000000000000338000
3380 = 000000000000000000
After the queue request:
Inline Parameter 2: Displacement into control block of
chaining field (range 0 to 255)-left byte.
Inline Parameter 3: Queuing indicators and priority field
displacement.
014E = 42FO
42FO = 000000000000338000
3380 = 00000000000034A800
34A8 = 000044008700000000
)
Machine Instructions
3-53
SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK ACCESS
Op Code
(h.ex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
00
OF
xx
xx
This instruction allows a main storage user to access 2
bytes from a control storage direct area. This routine
also allows a main storage user to pick up 2 bytes from
a queue header in main storage.
Example
Program A wants to get 2 bytes from control storage
location 2047.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,15
DC XL2'2047'
F4000F2047
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used, must be zero.
with location 2047 containing OA42.
Inline Parameter 1: Area and function.
Bit
Meaning
0-3
Identifies direct area to be used:
If = 0000, direct area 0
If = 0001, direct area 1
If = 0010, direct area 2
If = 0011, direct area 3
Not used; must be zero.
(If = 1) Queue header request.
(If = 1) Put request.
4-5
6
7
After executing the instruction, index register 2 contains
OA42.
Inline Parameter 2: Displacement.
Index Register 2: Two-byte data area (if put request).
Output Parameters
Index Register· 2: Data area retrieved (if get request).
(
3-54
MAIN STORAGE TRANSIENT SCHEDULER
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
xx
10
xx
xx
This instruction provides the same function as the
transfer control/system transient instruction (R byte of
04). The address of the table entry is passed directly by
the caller in inline parameters 1 and 2 (bytes 4 and 5).
As a result of this supervisor call, the transient at the
disk sequential sector address of OF92 for a length of 6
sectors is loaded into the main storage transient area at
location 0800. Control is given to the transient after it is
loaded.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
Meaning If On
0-5
Not used; must be zero.
6
The transient area is not refreshable.
The current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
7
Return control to the caller if caller is a
transient or transfer control routine.
Inline Parameters 1 and 2: Address in main storage of a
transient/transfer control table entry (may be in either
real or translated storage; however, it must be the same
translation as the caller's instruction address register).
Example
Program A wants to load a transient from disk with the
disk sequential sector address of the transient specified
within the task storage.
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,16
F400100842
DC AL2(TRAN@)
where TRAN@ is at location 0842 and location 0842
contains 000F9206.
)
Machine Instructions
3-55
MAIN STORAGE TRANSIENT EXIT
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
11
This instruction returns control to the caller of a
transient/transfer routine. Control is returned at the
next sequential instruction following the supervisor call
(either 04 or 10). If the caller is not a transient, the
transient area is set not busy. This allows other tasks to
obtain the transient area. If the caller is a transient, the
main storage transient exit instruction causes that
transient to be reloaded into the transient area before
passing control to the next sequential instruction.
Note: The nonrefresh capability described under
supervisor call 04 may cause control to be returned to a
module other than the immediate caller. If the
nonrefresh indicator is used on supervisor call 04 or 10,
control is returned to the most recent routine that did
not specify nonrefresh.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Example
Transient X has completed execution and wants to
return control to its caller. The main storage transient
exit instruction is issued:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,17
F40011
Control is returned to the next sequential instruction of
the caller of transient X.
(
3-56
GET PAGE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
F4
xx
12
xx
xx
xx
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
This instruction expands the user's main storage size up
to the region size. If enough main storage is not
available to satisfy the request, the task is swapped out
and in to acquire the storage. If the region requested
cannot be obtained using all of main storage, the size
available is given to the requester.
Example
Program A is currently executing in 14K of main storage.
When program A was requested, the user specified a
region size of 24K. To acquire the additional storage,
program A issues:
This supervisor call is nonprivileged.
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 18,0
DC XL2'2200'
DC XL1'0'
F40012220000
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-5,7
6
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
After this supervisor call executes, location hex 2200
contains the address plus 1 of the last byte in program
A's region. If program A originates at location 0000,
and the full 24K was allocated, locations 2200 and 2201
will contain the value hex 6000.
Note: If only 20K was allocated to program A, then
locations 2200 and 2201 will contain hex 5000.
Inline Parameters 1 and 2: Address of where to store
last logical address plus 1.
Inline Parameter 3: Zero.
Output Parameters
The last logical address plus 1 is returned in the address
passed by the caller in inline parameters 1 and 2.
,
)
Machine Instructions
3-57
FREE PAGE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
13
This instruction frees all the main storage pages owned
by the requesting task.
This supervisor ca'il is privileged.
Note: This instruction must be issued from real storage.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Example
Program A wants to free all main storage currently
allocated:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 0,19
F40013
Control is returned with all storage freed and the
TCBATR field set to all hex FFs from (TCBBEGL) to
(TCBMSSIZ).
If the TCBATR field contained:
000102030405060708090AOBOCODOEOF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOBOCODOEOF090A
TCBBEGL contained hex 19
TCBMSSIZ contained hex 07
then after the free page supervisor call, the TCBATR will
contain:
000102030405060708090AOBOCODOEOF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
3-58
ASYNCHRONOUS TASK WAIT
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
00
17
xx
This instruction places the task control block (TCB)
specified in index register 1 into a wait state. The type
of wait (defined under supervisor call 1 E, task wait) is
specified using inline parameter 1.
This supervispr call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameter 1: Wait type.
Index Register 1: Address of task control block to be
placed in a wait state.
Example
Program A and program B are executing under two
different TCBs. Program A wants to suspend the
execution of program B.
Assembler
Object Code
L @BTCB,XR1
SVC 23,0
DC XL1'02'
F4001702
Program B's TCB will be placed in a suspend wait until
it is posted by program A using supervisor call 1 D.
)
Machine Instructions
3-59
SET TRANSIENT AREA NOT BUSY
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
18
The main storage transient area is set not busy if the
caller is the transient area owner. The main storage
transient scheduler will now schedule the next task
waiting for the transient area.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used, must be zero.
Example
Program A issued a fetch request from the transient
area (supervisor call 52). The· module loaded receives
control outside the transient area. This module needs to
release the transient area for other programs:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 24,0
F40018
(
3·60
POST ACTION CONTROL ELEMENT
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
00
19
xx
xx
This instruction posts an event complete using the
action control element as input. The event address is
retrieved from the action control element (in the index
register 1 save area field) and the event is posted as in
event post (supervisor call 03).
Example
Program A wants to post an event complete. The event
was created using supervisor call 4C. The address of
the action control element created by supervisor call 4C
is hex 3478. Program A issues:
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameter 1: The queue header displacement
where the action control element can be found.
Inline Parameter 2: Completion code.
Bit
Meaning
o
(If = 1) Do not preempt.
(If = 1) Queue last-in-first-out to task
control block complete queue.
Not used.
Completion code (0- F).
2-3
4-7
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 25,0
DC XL1'48'
DC XL1'OO'
F400194800
After completion of this supervisor call, the action
control element at location hex 3478 will be dequeued
from the system header at locations 0148 and 0149 and
queued to the task control block field TCBCMPLQ of the
task that issued the supervisor call 4C.
Index Register 1: Action control element address.
Output Parameters
The TCB field TC8@INL4 contains the type byte
(ACETYPE) of the action control element that was
posted.
)
Machine Instructions
3-61
LOG TRACE INFORMATION
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
1A
This instruction logs trace entries in the resident main
storage trace buffer. The 15 bytes of data addressed by
index register 2 are moved into the trace buffer. The
trace data must be translated the same as the current
instruction address register translation.
This supervisor call is nonprivileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Index Register 2: Address of information (15 bytes) to
be placed in trace buffer.
Example
Program A wants to log 15 bytes of data to the system
trace table. The data is at locations hex 2000 to 200E.
Assembler
Object Code
LA TRACE, XR2
SVC 26,0
C2022000
F4001 A
(
3-62
SCAN SYSTEM QUEUE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
00
1B
xx
xx
This instruction allows you to scan a queue for a
specific value in one of the blocks on the queue. The
search argument is passed by the caller and the address
of the block containing the value is returned.
If an action control element (ACE) exists on the
specified queue with the task control block address
specified in index register 1, the address of the action
control element is returned in index register 2.
Otherwise, index register 2 is returned set to zeros.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameter 1: Argument displacement (must be
2-byte field)-Ieft byte.
Inline Parameter 2: Chain field displacement-left byte.
Index. Register 1: Search argument (2 bytes).
Index Register 2: Queue header (address of queue to be
scanned).
Output Parameters
Index Register 2: Contains the address of the control
block containing the passed argument. If the argument
is not found, index register 2 is set to 0000.
Example
Program A wants to scan the disk spindle A 1 active
queue to find if the task control block for this program
has any request pending.
Assembler
Object Code
L @ATCB,XR1
L X'0130' ,XR2
SVC 27,0
F4001 BOEOO
DC AL1 (ACETCB - 1)
DC AL 1(ACECHAIN - 1)
)
Machine Instructions
3-63
TASK POST
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
00
1D
xx
The task post supervisor call posts a task's execution
status. Inline parameter 1 contains the condition to be
posted. TCBSTAT2 contains the task wait conditions
that are turned off when the task post supervisor call is
requested. If TCBSTAT2 becomes all zeros as a result
of the post, the task is ready for execution. The wait
conditions available for posting from main storage are:
• Task suspended
• Dedicated task wait
All other wait codes are handled internally by the control
storage supervisor and should be posted only when
purging associated requests.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameter 1: Task post conditions.
Index Register 1: Task control block address of task to
be posted.
Example
Program A has been suspended by an earlier task wait.
To restart program A, the following supervisor call is
issued:
Assembler
Object Code
L @TASKA,1
SVC 29,0
DC XL1'02'
F4001 D02
(
3-64
TASK WAIT
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
. (hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Paraf11eter· List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
xx
1E
xx
This instruction places the requesting task into a wait
state. Inline parameter 1 is read into TCBSTAT2. The
task remains in the wait state until all the bits in
TCBSTAT2 are set off by task post (supervisor call 1 D).
In addition, if task dispatching is disabled, task wait
automatically continues for the duration of the wait. The
valid conditions to be set on in TCBSTAT2 are:
• Event wait
• Transient area wait
• General wait
Example
Program A wants to place itself into a dedicated wait.
Program A issues:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 30,0
DC XL1'OS'
F4001EOS
Ji'rogram A will wait until its task control block is
specifically posted by another program for the dedicated
wait condition.
• Internal control storage wait
• Timer wait
• Dedicated program wait
• Suspension wait
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-5,7
6
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage tram~ient area.
Inline Parameter 1: Wait conditions to be set on in
TCBSTAT2.
)
Machine Instructions
3-65
RESOURCE ENQUEUE/DEQUEUE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
xx
21
xx
This instruction enqueues and dequeues allocation queue
elements (AQE) on a queue. It checks the share level of
each queued entry and processes each accordingly.
For enqueues:
If the caller can share with the current owner of the
queue (or if no owner exists), control is returned to
the caller with an allocation queue element queued to
the passed queue and the equal condition set in the
program status register. If the caller's task cannot
share with the owning task, a nonequal program
status condition is returned (low if the owner is never
ending or his task is suspended, high otherwise).
Optionally, a caller may wait for the resource to
become available (Q code, bit 7 = 1). In this case,
control will always return with equal program status
condition.
For dequeues:
The allocation queue element allocated for this task is
removed from the passed queue. If an allocation
queue element for the caller is not queued, a
nonequal program status register is returned.
Inline Parameter 1;
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0 =1
1 :;= 1
2,3
4-7
Enqueue request
NEP requestor
Not used
0000 Level 0 (shares with 0, 1, 2)
0001 Level 1 (shares with 0, 1)
0010 Level 2 (shares with 0)
0011 Level 3 (does not share)
Index Register 2; Address of queue header (left byte
where allocation queue element is to be built).
Example
Program A and program B want to use the same
common area. To prevent interferring with each other,
both programs agree to enqueue on the resource by
defining a queue header at locations hex 0190 and 0191
in main storage. This queue header represents the
resource for programs A and B. When program A
issues:
Assembler
Object Code
LA X'0190',XR2
SVC 33,1
DC XL1'03'
C2020190
F4012103
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte; Bit
0-5
6
7
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait.
Program A will be allocated the resource by an
allocation queue element (AQE) queued to locations hex
0190 and 0191. If program B now tries to allocate the
same resource, program B's task control block will be
placed in a general wait (if the Q-byte bit 7 = 1). When
program A has completed its access of the common
area, program A issues:
Assembler
Object Code
LA X'0190' ,XR2
SVC 33,0
DC XL1'83'
C2020190
F4002183
(
\..
3-66
The allocation queue element that was queued to
locations hex 0190 and 0191 is freed and dequeued.
Program B is automatically given control of the resource
and an allocation queue element is created to indicate
program B's task control block is now the owner of the
specified resource.
Note: This example shows two program requesting
exclusive ownership of a resource. Various levels of
sharing are possible using levels 0, 1, and 2.
)
Machine Instructions
3-67
DUMP MAIN STORAGE/TERMINATE TASK
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
00
22
xx
xx
This instruction terminates the calling task with a
message identification (error) code 0016. Storage is
dumped to disk and the instruction address register for
the issuing task is set to 0092 (the end of job supervisor
call) in the system communications area. The abnormal
termination bit in the task control block is set on. The
message identification code (MIC) is stored in the task
control block.
This supervisor call is nonprivileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Inline Parameters 1 and 2: Hexadecimal value of the
MIC number to be used to indicate the error. A value
less than hex 0100 will cause the system to proc check.
Values above hex OOFF will cause messages to be
issued with options as defined for M IC 0001.
Example
Program A wants to terminate with a dump. Program A
issues:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC 34,0
F40022
All of control storage and main storage are dumped to
the system dump file and the program set for abnormal
termination.
(
3-68
TEST AND SET
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
xx
23
xx
This instruction allows a main storage routine to test a
selected bit in storage and set the bit on at the same
time. If the bit is already on, the task is put into a
general wait.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Example
Program A and program B want to exclude one another
when accessing a common area. The common area is
located at 005C in main storage. Both programs issue
the following supervisor call before accessing the
common area:
Input Parameters
Assembler
Object Code
Q-Byte: Bit
LA X'005B',XR1
SVC 35,4
DC XL1'02'
F4042302
0-4
5
6
7
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
Byte is in real storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Do not wait if bit is already on.
If bit 6 at location hex 005C is on when the supervisor
call is issued by program A, then program A is placed in
a general wait. If the bit is off, it is set on and control
returned immediately to program A.
After accessing the common area, both program A and
program B must set the bit off and issue a supervisor
call 01 for the test and set failure condition.
InUne Parameter 1: Value is bit to be tested.
Index Register 1: Address (minus one) of the byte to be
tested and set.
Output Values
Program Status Register: False if the bit is on and the
no wait Q-byte is specified.
)
Machine Instructions
3-69
TASK CONTROL BLOCK PRIORITY QUEUE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
00
24
xx
This instruction stores the new task priority and passes
to it into the task control block. The instruction then
dequeues the task control block from the task priority
queue and requeues it by the new priority.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Inline Parameter 1: New priority.
Index Register 1: Task control block address.
Example
Program A wants to alter its priority from its current
value to 208.
Assembler
SVC 36,0
DC XL1'DO'
After executing this supervisor call, program A will run
at the new priority.
(
3-70
ASYNCHRONOUS TASK READY CHECK
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
25
This instruction accepts a task control block as input
and determines whether the task is in an event wait,
and, if so, whether the event is completed. Task control
block status byte 2 (TCBSTAT2) is checked first to see
if the passed task is in an event wait. If the task is not
waiting, control is returned to the caller. Index register 1
is used to test for completion of the waited event. If
the event is not complete, control is returned to the
caller. If the event is complete, a task post (supervisor
call 1 D) is issued for the posted task control block.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Index Register 1: Task control block address of task to
be checked.
Example
Program A wants to have program B's task control
block checked to determine if program B may now
satisfy a previous wait.
Assembler
Object Code
L @BTCB,XR1
SVC 37,0
F40025
)
Machine Instructions
3-71
PREPARE PRINT BUFFER
Example
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
00
26
This instruction'inserts printer control codes into the
print buffer to cause the requested skip and space
operations. It also maintains a record of the current
logical line in the print input/output block (lOB).
This instruction scans the data to be printed. When it
finds more than three contiguous blanks, it compresses
those blanks and replaces that data with the relative
horizontal print position codes. If it finds a character
less than a blank, it replaces that character with a hex
FF so that the graphic error action previously set in the
printer applies. This scan, compression, and
replacement is done within the printer buffer.
Program A wants to skip to line 1, print a line, and
space one line after printing. The lOB address is hex
4544 and the data buffer is at hex 6000.
Program A moves the data to be printed to address hex
6006, sets the skip before printing ($IOBPSKB) and
space after printing ($IOBPSPA) fields of the lOB to 1,
loads index register 1 with hex 4544, and issues:
Assembler
Object Code
SVC SVCPREP,QO F40026
The appropriate control characters are inserted into the
data buffer, the data is compressed, and control is
returned to program A.
If the data is to be routed directly to the printer instead
of being spooled, this instruction updates the forms
length and current line fields of the associated printer
terminal unit block (TUB).
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Not used; must be zero.
Index Register 1: Points to the address of the
input/ output block (lOB).
(
"
3-72
SECTOR ENQUEUE/DEQUEUE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
xx
29
The sector enqueue / dequeue supervisor call instruction
allows multiple users to share disk sectors while
preventing simultaneous access to the same sectors.
Index register 1 must contain the address of the disk
input/ output block (JOB). Sector queue blocks (SQB)
are built in the system queue space to protect the sector
space.
Upon issuing this supervisor call, any sector queue block
which already is associated with the caller's lOB is
deleted and all tasks which were waiting on enqueued
sectors are posted ready so that their sector
enqueue/ dequeue supervisor call is reissued.
If there is any conflict and the wait 0 bit is on, then the
caller's task is placed in a wait on sector
enqueue/dequeue failure (bit TCBFWAIT in
TCBWMASK field). When the owning task of the
conflicting sectors issues a sector enqueue/ dequeue·
supervisor call with a nonread operand in the lOB
command field ($IOBDCMD) then the caller's task will
be posted on TCBFWAIT and will then have a chance to
enqueue the required sectors and continue processing.
If there is no sector space conflict with any prior
outstanding read operation by any other task, then a
sector queue block is built for the caller's task
associated with the passed lOB address, and control is
returned to the caller.
All existing sector queue blocks are queued to the
system queue QHDSQB. Every time a sector queue
block is built for a task, the count field in the task
control block (TCBSQBCT) is increased by one. Every
time a sector queue block is deleted for a task, the
count field in the task control block is decreased by one.
This supervisor call is privileged.
If the sector queue block count (TCBSQBCT) in the
caller's task control block is zero and the caller's task is
marked for inquiry pending (bit TCBINQPD in task
control block field TCBSTAT3), then the command
processor task control block (address hex 0200) is
posted ready by posting that task-to-task event control
mask (address hex 0250). If the command operation in
the lOB (lOB field $IOBCMD) is a read (hex A 1) then
the caller's task is placed in a general wait in sector
enqueue/ dequeue failure (bit TCBFWAIT in
TCBWMASK field).
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-4,6
5
7
If the caller's task has not been waited and the lOB
command field is a read operation, then the sector
space (sequential sectors starting with the one specified
by $IOBDSSextending for as many sectors as are
specified by $IOBDN field) is checked for any overlap
with any other task's read operation (those tasks which
are also issuing this supervisor call) by testing the data
saved in the sector queue blocks. If there is any conflict
and the wait 0 bit is off, then the program status
register false bit is set and control is returned to the
caller.
Meaning
Not used; must be zero.
(If = 0) lOB address is in translated
main storage.
(If = 1) lOB address is in nontranslated
main storage.
(If = 1) Wait for sectors to become
available.
Index Register 1: Address of a disk lOB.
Output Values
Program Status Register: False is set if there is a sector
conflict and the wait Q-byte bit is not specified.
)
Machine Instructions
3-73
Example
Program A enqueues four sectors, sequential sectors
hex 0077 A5 through 0077AS; program 8 also enqueues
these same sectors.
Program B
Program A
Index register 1 points
to the 108
Index register 1 points to
the 108 (contents same as
program A)
108DCMD = hex A 1 (read op)
108DN8 = hex 03 (4 sectors)
108DSS = hex 0077A5 (starting SS)
Assembler
Object Code Assembler
Object Code
SVC X' 29',0
F40029
F40029
SVC X'29',O
Since program A issued the supervisor call first, a sector
queue block is built and program A is given back
control. Program 8 is placed in a wait (TC8FWAIT in
TC8WMASK field) until program A changes the
$IOBDCMD field to a hex 'A2 and reissues the same
supervisor call (SVC X'29'O).
(
3-74
DISKETTE 105
FIXED DISK 105
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
xx
40
F4
xx
41
Index register 1 must point to the input/ output block
(lOB), which is defined in the disk section of this
manual.
Index register 1 points to the input/output block (lOB)
which is defined in the diskette section of this manual.
This supervisor call is privileged.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
Q-Byte: Bit
0-2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning If On
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
This event has no translatable main
storage requirement.
This event is a mUltiple wait candidate.
Input/ output block (lOB) is in real
storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait for requested operation to
complete.
0-2
3
4
5
6
7
Not used; must be zero.
This event has no translatable main
storage request.
This event is a multiple wait candidate.
Input/ output block (lOB) is in real
storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait for requested operation to
complete.
Index Register 1: Input/output block (lOB).
Index Register 1: Input/ Output block (JOB).
)
Machine Instructions
3-75
WORK STATION lOCH
WORK STATION PRINTER lOCH
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
xx
42
F4
xx
43
Index register 1 points to the input/output block which
is defined in the work station section of this manual.
Index register 1 must point to the input/output block
(lOB) which is defined in the work station section of this
manual.
This supervisor call is privileged.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
Meaning If On
Q-Byte: Bit
0-2
3
4
5
6
7
Not used; must be zero.
This event has no translatable main
storage requirement.
This event is a multiple wait candidate.
Input/output block (108) is in real
storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait for requested operation to
complete.
0-2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
This event has no translatable main
storage requirement.
This event is a mUltiple wait candidate.
Input/output block (108) is in real
storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait for requested operation to
complete.
Index Register 1: Input/output block (108).
Index Register 1: Input/output block (lOB).
(
3-76
DATA COMMUNICATIONS lOCH
I/O TRANSIENT REQUEST
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
F4
xx
44
F4
xx
45
Index register 1 points to the input/output block (lOB),
which is defined in the data communications section of
this manual.
This supervisor call is privileged.
This instruction passes control to the input/ output
control storage transient area for the current
input/ output transient. Before this function can be
used, the input/ output block (lOB) for the specified
device must be set up. The input/ output block for each
device is defined in the section describing the device in
this manual.
Input Parameters
This supervisor call is privileged.
Q-Byte: Bit
0-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
Hold dispatching until I/O request has
been started.
This event has no translatable main
storage requirement.
This event is a multiple wait candidate.
Input/ output block (lOB) is in real
storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait for requested operation to
complete.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
0-2
3
4
5
6
7
Index Register 1: Input/output block (lOB).
Meaning If On
Not used; must be zero.
This event has no translatable main
storage requirement.
This event is a multiple wait candidate.
Input/ output block (lOB) is in real
storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Wait for requested operation to
complete.
Index Register 1: Input/output block.
)
Machine Instructions
3-77
ACTION CONTROL ELEMENT BUILD AND QUEUE
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
. (hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
xx
4C
xx
The action control element build and queue supervisor
call instruction assigns a 16-byte area to be used for
the action control element. This action control element
is then queued to the passed system queue header (a
first-in-first-out queue). The action control element is
initialized with the current values of the task as follows:
Output Values
Index Register 2: Address of the action control element
if requested in input.
Example
Bytes
Content
0-1
Address of next action control element (0000
if end of chain)
Current instruction address register
Reserved
Inline parameters 1 and 2
Inline parameter 3 and type byte
Current index register 1 value
Current index register 2 value
Caller's task control block address
2-3
4-5
6-7
8-9
A-B
C-D
E-F
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
Meaning If On
Program A wants to create an action control element
and have it queued to the system queue header at
location hex 0148. The address of the action control
element is requested.
Assembler
Object Code
SVC X'4C',0
DC XL1'49'
F4004C49
with index register 2 containing hex 0000 and
address 0148 containing hex 0000.
After execution of the supervisor call, an action control
element is built at location 3478, for example. Location
0148 is set to 3478 and index register 2 is returned,
also containing address 3478.
0-2,6,7 Not used; must be zero.
3
This event does not require user main
storage. (The task is swappable while
the event is active.)
4
This event will satisfy a multiple wait.
(This may be used to make translated
events satisfy a multiple wait.)
5
The associated event control mask is in
real storage.
Inline Parameter 1: Offset of left byte of queue header.
Bit
Meaning
0-6
Displacement of queue
header from start of system queue headers.
(If = 1) Return address of action control
element in index register 2.
7
3-78
(
CONTROL STORAGE TRANSIENT SCHEDULER
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
F4
xx
50
xx
xx
Op Code
This instruction loads control storage transients. The
control storage transient to be loaded is identified by a
1-byte transient number given as inline parameter 1
(byte 4). If the transient area is not busy, the requested
transient is loaded into the transient area and control is
passed to the transient.
Control is returned to the caller after the transient has
executed completely.
This supervisor call is nonprivileged.
Input Parameters
Q-Byte: Bit
Meaning If On
Byte 6
. xx
Example
Program A wants to call a control storage transient to
get the time of day. The transient 10 is hex OA and the
input to this transient requires hex 40 in in line parameter
2 and index register 2 must contain the address of a
14-byte timer request block (TRB).
Assembler
Object Code
LA @TRB,XR2
SVC 80,0
F400500A4000
DC XL'OA'
DC XL2'4000'
When the supervisor call completes, the timer request
block contains the current time and date.
0-3,5,7 Not used; must be zero.
4
Parameter list, if needed, is in real
storage.
6
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Inline Parameter 1: Control storage transient
identification.
Inline Parameters 2 and 3: Input to the transient.
)
Machine Instructions
3-79
TASK WORK AREA ACCESSES
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inlihe Parameter List
Byte 6
xx
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
l3yte 5
F4
xx
51
xx
xx
This instruction is used to access the task work area on
disk. Task work area access is a keyed variable-length
aCCess method for referencing disk work storage. The
key is an offset into the task work area of the sector to
be accessed.
Index Register 1: Task control block address (if byte 1
bit 6 = 1).
Two areas are maintained on disk for each task:
Work station work area-WSWA
Task work area-TWA
Example
Data may be accessed in either of these areas,
depending on inline parameter 1. The address of the
work station work area or task work area must be givSh
in the task control block field TCBWSWA or TCBTWA.
This supervisor call is privileged.
Input Parameters
Program A wants to read from the task work area. The
address in the TCBTWA field is OF01. Program A wants
to read 4 sectors at offset 8 from the task work area.
The data address in main storage is hex 2000.
Assembler
Object Code
LA X'2000' ,XR2
SVC 81,0
DC XL1'40'
DC XL1'08'
DC XL1'04'
C2022000
F40051400804
Meaning If On
Q-Byte: Bit
0-5,7
6
Index Register 2: Main storage address of data.
Not used; must be zero.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the dUration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
The data located at sequential sector address 000F059
through OOOFOC is read into main storage at locations
hex 2000 through 23FF.
Inline Parameter 1: Type Byte (get/ put)
Bit
Meaning
0,2-4
Not used; must be zero.
1
5
Real data addresses.
(If = 0) Task work area request.
(If = 1) Work station work area request.
System request.
Put request.
6
7
Inline Parameter 2: Key (0-59).
Inline Parameter 3: Number of disk sectors (0-255).
3-80
(
MAIN STORAGE RELOCATION LOADER
Op Code
(hex)
Q-Byte
(hex)
R-Byte
(hex)
Inline Parameter List
(hex)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
F4
xx
52
xx
This instruction uses a loader parameter list pointed to
by index register 2. It determines the type of request
and takes the necessary action as given by inline
parameter 1 (byte 4). If relocation is required, the
relocation transient is called to perform the relocation
after the module has been read into storage.
This supervisor call in non privileged.
Hex
Value
Type of Request
06
Fetch to address: Reads the module into
storage and passed control to the module's
start control address.
OA
System load to address: Updates the task
relocation factor and disk address values (in
the task's task control block) from the
loader's parameter list. Reads the module
into storage and returns control to the calling
program.
OE
System fetch to address: Updates the task
relocation factor and disk address values (in
the task's task control block) from the
loader's parameter list. Reads the module
into storage and passes control to its start
control address.
Input Parameters
Meaning If On
Q-Byte: Bit
0-4,7
5
6
Not used; must be zero.
Parameter list is in real storage.
Transient area is not refreshable. The
current transient is locked into the
transient area for the duration of the
wait. This takes effect only when
issued from instructions executed in
the main storage transient area.
Inline Parameter: Indicates the type of request.
Hex
Value
01
02
04
)
Index Register 2: Loader parameter list. (See IBM
System/34 Data Areas and Diagnostic Aids, for these
parameters.)
Type of Request
Example
Load by relative address: Adds the task
loader disk address to the relative address
passed in the user's parameter list. The
resulting address is the location of the
desired module at its link-edit address;
control returns to the calling program.
Program A wants to load a subroutine from disk into
main storage. The sequential sector address of the
module is 010342. The parameter list built by program
A is:
Load to address: Reads the module into
storage and returns control to the calling
program.
The loader supervisor call issued is:
Fetch: Adds the task relocation factor to the
module's link-edit address, and, using the
resulting value as the load address, reads the
module into storage and passes control to
the module's start control address.
01034210200020001E102000
Assembler
Object Code
LA @PL,XR2
SVC 82,0
DC XL1'02'
F4005202
Machine Instructions
3-81
Program A will have control returned when the
subroutine is loaded at main storage locations 2000
through 2FFF.
Relocation of the subroutine is not necessary since the
load address and link address of the subroutine are
identical.
(
3-82
Chapter 4. Programming Considerations
INSTRUCTION TIMINGS
Instruction Name
Time in Microseconds
Zero and add zoned
Add zoned decimal
Subtract zoned decimal
Move hex character
Edit (last byte hex 20)
Edit (last byte not hex 20)
Insert and test characters
(last byte significant digit)
(last byte not significant digit)
Move character
Compare logical characters
Add logical characters
Subtract logical character
Store registers
Load registers
Add to register
Test bits on masked
Test bits off masked
Set bits on masked
Set bits off masked
Move logical immediate
Compare logical immediate
Branch on condition
Load address
Jump on condition
Supervisor call
Load program mode register
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
T2
Note:
L
=
+
+
+
+
+
+
1.2L2
1.8L2
1.8L2
1.8
1.2L2
1.2L2
+ 0.6(L1-L2) + T3
+ 1.2(L1-L2) + T3
+ 1.2(L1-L2) + T3
+ .6L1
+ .6L1 + .8
T2 + 1.2L1 + .2
T2 + 1.2L1 + .6
T2 + 1.2L
T2 + 1.4L
T2 + 1.8L
T2 + 1.8L
T1 + 1.4
T1 + 1.2
T1 + 1.6
T1 + 0.8
T1 + 0.8
T1 + 1.2
T1 + 1.2
T1 + 0.6
T1 + 0.8
1.6 (not taken), T1 (taken)
T1
1.6 (not taken), 2.0 (taken)
1.8 + service time
2.4
length
Tl = 2.4 if direct, 2.0 if indexed.
T2 = 3.6 if direct, 2.8 if indexed, 3.2 if direct/indexed.
T3 = 1.2L1 if recomplemented and result does not equal minus zero, or 1.2 if
recomplemented and results equal minus zero, else zero.
L2 = length of operand 2
L1 = length of operand 1
)
Programming Considerations
4-1
CONDITIONING THE PROGRAM STATUS REGISTER
Machine
Instruction
Zero-add
zoned
decimal
Add and
subtract
zoned
decimal
Edit
Compare
logical
characters
Compare
logical
immediate
Add logical
characters
Condition
Binary
Overflow
Test False
Decimal
Overflow
High
Low
Equal
Set
Operand 2
positive
Operand 2
negative
Operand 2 zero
Reset
Operand 2
negative
Operand 2
positive
Operand 2 not
zero
Result
positive
Result
negative
Result zero
Reset
Result
negative or
zero
Result
positive or
zero
Result not zero
Set
Operand 2
positive
Operand 2
negative
Operand 2 zero
Reset
Operand 2
not positive
Operand 2
not negative
Operand 2 not
zero
Set
Operand 1
greater than
operand 2
Operand 1
less than
operand 2
Operand 1 equal
to operand 2
Reset
Operand 1
not greater
than
operand 2
Operand 1
Operands not
not less than equal
operand 2
Set
Operand 1
greater than
immediate
data
Operand 1
less than
immediate
data
Reset
Operand 1
not greater
than
immediate
data
Operand 1
Operand 1 not
not less than equal to
immediate
immediate data
data
Set
Result
overflow
Operand 1 equal
to immediate
data
Set
Carry out
Carry out
and result
not zero
No carry and Result zero
result not
zero
Reset
Reset at
start of
instruction
No carry or
result zero
Carry out or
result zero
Result not zero
(
4-2
CONDITIONING THE PROGRAM STATUS REGISTER (continued)
Machine
Instruction
Subtract
logical
characters
Add to
register
Condition
Binary
Overflow
Test False
High
Low
Equal
Set
Operand 1
greater than
operand 2
Operand 1
less than
operand 2
Result zero
Reset
Operand 1
not greater
than
operand 2
Operand 1
Result not zero
not less than
operand 2
Set
Carry out
Carry out
and result
not zero
No carry and Result zero
result not
zero
Reset,
At start of
instruction
No carry or
result zero
Carry out or
result zero
Test bits on
Tested bits
not all ones
Test bits off
Tested bits
not all zeros
Branch or
jump on
condition
Load
register
(PSR)
Decimal
Overflow
Set
Reset
Reset if
tested
Reset if
tested
Set
Set if loaded Set if loaded Set if loaded Set if loaded
bit 12 on
bit 15 off
bit 10 on
bit 11 on
and bit 14
off
Reset
Reset if
loaded bit
10 off
Reset if
loaded bit
11 off
Reset if
loaded bit
12 off
Reset if bit
15 on, or bit
15 off and
bit 14 on
Set if loaded Set if loaded bit
bit 15 off
15 on
and bit 14
on
Reset if bit
Reset if loaded
15 on, or bit bit 15 off
15 off and
bit 14 off
Equal set on
Set
System
reset
Result not zero
Reset
Binary
overflow
reset
Test reset
Decimal
overflow
reset
High reset
Low reset
)
Programming Considerations
4-3
(
4-4
Chapter 5. Printer
The IBM System/34 has either an IBM 5211 Printer or
an IBM 5256 Printer, or both. Although the 5256 Printer
is attached to the system through the work station
controller, its functions and programming characteristics
are similar to the 5211 printer's. Therefore, both
printers are described in this chapter.
PRINTER KEYS AND LIGHTS
5211 Printer Keys and Lights
The operator's panel on the 5211 printer contains lights
and touch keys as shown in Figure 5-1.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operator Panel Keys
The 5211 printer is a line printer with rates of 160 lines
per minute (Model 1) or 300 lines per minute (Model 2).
These rates were measured using a 48-character set
while printing 132 positions to a line with single-line
spacing. Other characteristics of this printer are:
Ready: Turns on the Ready light, sets the printer to a
ready state, starts the print belt, and signals the system
that the printer is ready to receive commands. This key
does not work when either the Interlock or Check light
is on, or if the printer controller is not running.
• 132 print positions per line
Stop/Reset: Causes the printer to stop and the Ready
• 6 or 8 lines per inch (25.4 mm)
• Forms length: 3 inches to 14 inches
light to go off. If the printer is printing when the
Stop/Reset key is pressed, the current line is completed
before the printer stops. This key also resets printer
check conditions (Check and Forms lights are reset). In
addition, it is used for operator error recovery
procedures as described under Printer Error Recovery,
later in this chapter.
• Character sets of 48, 64, 96, or 128 characters
Carriage Restore: Causes (1) the carriage to skip to line
• Special character-set belts with restricted character
sets for better throughput
10f the next form if the Ready, Check, and Interlock
lights are off and (2) the horizontal print position to be
set to 1. This key operates the same as the Forms Feed
command.
• 10 characters per inch (25.4 mm)
• Forms width: 3-1 /2 inches to 15-1 /4 inches
The 5256 Printer is a serial printer with rates of 40, 80,
or 120 characters per second; the rate is determined by
the model selected. Other characteristics of this printer
are:
Carriage Space: Causes the carriage to advance a single
line if the Ready, Check, and Interlock lights are off; this
key does not affect the horizontal print position.
• 132 print positions per line
• 6 or 8 lines per inch (25.4 mm)
• 10 characters per inch (25.4 mm)
• Single form/ledger card processing: The maximum
size of the forms is 14-1/2 inches wide by 14 inches
long. The minimum size is 6 inches wide by 3 inches .
long.
)
• Character sets of 96 characters or 128 characters for
Katakana
Printer
5-1
©
©
1"""0,.,oclc
©
©
©
Figure 5-1. 5211 Printer Operator's Panel
Operator Panel Lights
The Check, Forms, and Interlock lights flash on and off
when active.
Power On: Indicates that power to the printer is on.
Interlock: Indicates that the printer unit throat is open or
the belt cover is not in place.
Forms: Indicates that less than 13 inches (356 mm) of
forms remain in the printer below the current print line;
more forms must be placed in the printer. If the Forms
light is on at the same time as the Check light, a
carriage check condition was sensed; this might be a
forms jam or loss of vertical position.
Ready: If the Interlock, Forms, and Check lights are off,
the Ready light is turned on by the system in response
to the Ready key; it indicates that the printer is ready to
print.
Check: Indicates that a check condition was sensed by
the system and informs the operator that error recovery
action is needed. (Also see the description of the Forms
light.) If the check condition is corrected, the Check
light can be turned off by pressing the Stop/Reset key.
5-2
(
5256 Printer Switches and Lights
The operator's panel on the 5256 printer contains lights
and switches as shown in Figure 5-2.
Status: Selects online (Norma\) or offline (Test) mode.
The Cancel position generates a request to cancel the
current print operation. The request is reported to the
system and a message is displayed on the system
console.
Operator Panel Switches
Power: Turns power on or off to the printer.
Stop: Makes the printer not ready and permits the
operator to position the forms. The Stop switch must be
pressed before positioning the forms by hand, or the
system loses control of the vertical positioning. If the
Stop switch is pressed while the printer is printing, the
current line of printing is completed before the printer
stops.
Start: Makes the printer ready to execute commands.
The Ready light is on if there is no end-of-forms, not
ready, or wire check condition.
When in online mode, the printer can respond to any
command from the system if the Ready light is on.
When in offline mode, the printer does not respond to
any commands from the system. Offline mode is used
for problem determination.
Operator Panel Lights
Line Feed: Permits a single line feed, but before this
switch can be used the printer must be not ready; press
the Stop switch to r:nake the printer not ready. This
switch operates the same as the line feed command.
The horizontal print position is not affected by the line
feed command or the Line Feed switch.
The operator panel has five status lights that show the
status of the printer and eight dual-purpose lights that
display diagnostic information.
Status Lights
Power On: The power in the printer is on.
Forms Feed: Permits a series of single line feeds to the
first line of the next form. (The horizontal print position
is set to 1). The printer must be not ready before the
Forms Feed switch w"iI\ work; press the Stop switch to
make the printer not ready.
Line Spacing: Selects the number of lines to be printed
per inch; 6 or 8 lines per inch can be selected. If
printing at 8 lines per inch, some characters might print
over other characters if print wire 8 is used.
Ready: The printer is ready to print data or execute
commands from the system.
Attention: Operator action is needed. If the alarm
feature is installed, the alarm is also sounded.
Forms: There is some type of forms problem such as
forms jammed or end-of-forms.
Unit Check: Indicates a check condition in the printer.
o
Stop
Power
2
Power
On
ORead Y
Start
Oline
Sync
OSystem
Available
line
Feed
Form
Feed
0°" 0 0 0 0
Off
)
3
Oline
Check
o
4
o
QAttention
QForm
Qunit
Check
o
Internal
Check
0
7
6
5
Storage
Check
Graphic
Check
o
8
Data
Cleared
Line
Spacing
Transparent
Mode
Status
0: 0"'"""
Normal
Test
Figure 5-2. 5256 Printer Operator's Panel
Printer
5-3
Diagnostic Lights
Each of the eight diagnostic lights shows one of two
conditions, depending on the position of the Status
switch. The following paragraphs describe the meaning
of each light when the printer is online (the Status
switch is in the Normal position). The device check
status conditions are given in parentheses after the light
names; these conditions are indicated when the printer
is offline (the Status switch is in the Test position).
Line Sync (Wire Check): Signals from the controller
caused synchronization with the system. This light is
reset by an internally generated signal.
System Available (Slow Speed Check): The printer
recognized its own address. This light is reset by an
internally generated signal.
Line Check (Fast Speed Check): There was a parity
check on data received from the controller. The line
parity status is sent to the system and the light is reset
by the system.
OPERATIONAL AND PROGRAMMING
CHARACTERISTICS
Whether the system has a line printer, a serial printer, or
both, the system program handles all printers the same
in that each printer attached to the system has an
associated terminal unit block (TUB). (The system
console and all additional display stations also have an
associated TUB.) The TUBs, located in main storage,
are chained together on a queue with the TUBs for the
printers at the start of the queue. If the line printer is
attached to the system, its TU B is the first one on the
queue.
The printer queue header byte of the TUB (TUBQHDR)
points to a system queue header which in turn points to
an action control element and the action control element
contains the address of the printers associated
input/ output block (lOB); this relationship is shown in
Figure 5-3. The TUB and lOB are described in the
following paragraphs and the action control element is
described in the IBM System/34 Data Areas and
Diagnostic Aids, LY21 -0049.
Storage Check (Left Margin Check): There was a parity
check in the printer controller storage. To reset the
light, power to the printer must be turned off.
Internal Check (Forms Stopped): There was a parity
check in the printer. To reset the light, power to the
printer must be turned off.
Graphic Check (Emitter Sequence Check): An unprintable
character was sensed. Also, the printer stops printing.
Data Cleared (No Emitters): A clear command has been
received from the system. The Data Cleared light will
not come on if the printer is ready.
Transparent Mode (Forms Position Lost): Indicates that
the printer is in a mode of operation in which the
hexadecimal code for each byte of input data is
displayed directly above the output of the character.
(
5-4
...-------"t- - -This field (in the system queue headers) contains
the address of the first TUB in the TUB chain.
TUB for
5211 Printer
T
U
B
T
U
B
C
Q
H
A
I
D
H
R.
N
This field (in the system queue headers)
contains the address of the action control
element where n is a number from 1 to
the number of printers attached to the
system.
Next TUB
in chain
I
I
I
Element
I
~
Additional
TU B for ea'ch
printer and
each display
station
Action
Control
Element
ACECHAIN
0000
ACEXR1
ACEXR1
:~
ACEXR 1 contains
address of lOB.
Last lOB
Figure 5-3. Relationship of TUB to lOB
Terminal Unit Block
The terminal unit block (TUB), located in main storage,
is used by the work station input/output control handler
(WSIOCH) routine to identify printers and their
associated lOB queue. (WSIOCH is common for display
stations and printers). Figure 5-4 shows the format of
the TUB as used by the WSIOCH routine.
)
Printer
5-5
IBM
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
Program
Label
Length
in Bytes
o
TUBECM
1
Event control mask: This byte is not used by the printers.
TUBCOMPL
1
lOB completion code
Field Description
Hex
Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
Reserved
lOB request complete
Reserved (must be 0)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Note: Bit 1 is not changed by WSIOCH and it must be set off when
opening a printer file and set on when the file is closed to prevent unnecessary control storage activity.
2
TUBFLAG
Flag byte
Hex
Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
User defined error recovery procedure
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Printer is online
Reserved
Reserved
Data is in control storage
Note: Bit 0 specifies that the system error recovery procedure (ERP)
cannot be used. Instead, it allows the reporting of errors to the application program.
3
TUBCMND
Device address
Hex
Meaning
EO
CO
Device address of line printer
Device address of work station printer
Note: The device address (CO or EO) must be set during initial
program load.
4
TUBCMOD
Reserved
5
TUBUNIT@
Unit address: Address of the serial printer. If this is the TUB for the
line printer, the unit address is hex 00.
Figure 5-4 (Part 1 of 4). Printer Terminal Unit Block
5-6
(
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
Length
in Bytes
Field Description
6
TUBDATA@
2
Reserved
8
TUBCOUNT
2
Reserved
A
TUBSENSO
1
B
TUBSENS1
1
C
TUBSI:NS2
1
D
TUBSENS3
1
E
TUBSENS4
1
F
TUBSENS5
1
10
TUBTCB@
2
\
I
( These are the error status bytes. (See Printer Status Bytes and Error
( Recovery Procedures later in this chapter.1
I
Reserved
The following 10 bytes contain the error recording block; they are used for error recovery procedures (ERP).
12
TUBCHAIN
14
TUBDEVID
2
TUB chain field: Points to the next TUB in the chain; it is set to hex
0000 if this is the end of the chain.
TUB device identification for ERP: Contains a unique code for each
printer type on the system; EO for line printers and E 1 for serial printers.
Note: The device identification identifies the ERP to use. Also, it is
set during initial program load.
15
TUBQHDR
Queue header pointer for printers: Contains the displacement into the
system queue headers for locating the operation queue.
Note: The queue header pointer is set during initial program load.
16
TUBERPCT
ERP control byte
Hex Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
The ERB is in use waiting for main storage action.
Control storage operation complete.
Main storage ERB operation complete.
Ready response was a second error.
Reserved (must be 0).
Figure 5-4 (Part 2 of 4). Printer Terminal Unit Block
)
Printer
5-7
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
Length
in Bytes
16
(continued)
Field Description
An error is in process if bit 5, 6, or 7 is on and the bits are encoded with
the function to be performed. These functions are:
Bits
17
TUBERBFG
1
5 6 7
Function
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Get message identification code (M Ie) number from
control storage transient area
Perform error recovery
Send message to screen
Waiting for ready condition from printer
Purge message from screen
Not used
Not used
ERB flag byte
Hex
Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
04
03
Put work station identification in the text message.
Put 4-byte error code in the last four positions of the text message.
No response needed for informational message.
Suppress logging.
TUB posted complete with error.
This ERB is in retry mode.
Bit 6 and 7 are encoded as follows:
00
01
10
11
18
TUBERAID
1
Attention identifier (AID) byte
Hex
Meaning
01
00
Error pending
Attention not requested
19
TUBMIC
2
ERP message identification code
1B
TUBOPTS
1
E R P message options
Figure 5-4 (Part 3 of 4). Printer Terminal Unit Block
5-8
= Not used
= Programming error
= Hardware error
= Resources not available
Hex
Meaning
FO
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
D option was taken to message.
Option 0 was selected.
Option 1 was selected.
Option 2 was selected.
Option 3 was selected.
Option 0 is allowed.
Option 1 is allowed.
Option 2 is allowed.
Option 3 is allowed.
(
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
Length
in Bytes
Field Description
The remaining bytes of the TUB contain miscellaneous data.
1C
TUBSIOCT
2
Start liD count
1E
TUBERRCT
1
Error retry count
1F
TUBWSID
2
Logical identification of the work station
21
TUBPCFG@
2
SS of printer configuration record
23
TUBTCB
2
TUB owner TCB address and printer queue header
25
TUBAID
1
Reserved
26
TUBCPAID
1
Reserved
27
TUBRESVI
1
Reserved
Figure 5-4 (Part 4 of 4). Printer Terminal Unit Block
Printer Input/Output Block
Printer operations are specified by an input/output block
(lOB) located in main storage. Each lOB is queued and
sent to the printer by a supervisor call instruction.
Multiple operations may be queued by sending multiple
supervisor call instructions. See Chapter 3 for a
description of the supervisor call instructions.
Each lOB contains an address of a data stream in main
storage. This data stream contains the commands to
the printer and the data, if any, to be printed. Before
using an lOB, the command code (bits 0 through 4), unit
address, and queue header displacement bytes must be
copied from the correct terminal unit block. Figure 5-5
shows the format of the printer lOB.
)
Printer
5-9
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
0
IBM
Program
Label
$IOBPECM
Length
in Bytes
1
Field Description
Event control mask: This byte is not used directly by the work station
input/output control handler but the following bits must be set prior
to issuing a supervisor call for a printer.
Hex
Meaning
80
40
No skip bit for general waits.
Data adress is real-the supervisor call processor sets up the task
control block (TCB) address with this bit.
If on == TCB containing real storage.
If off = user's TCB.
20
1
$IOBPSTA
1
Must be O.
Printer completion code
Hex
Meaning
80
lOB request active-an operation is in process and is waiting
for completion.
lOB request complete-the operation is completed.
Data transfer complete-data has been transferred to the printer.
(This bit is only returned on error conditions.)
Error detected-the operation could not be completed because
of an error in the printer.
40
02
01
Note: This bit is turned on if the user's error recovery procedure
(ERP) is specified in the terminal unit block (TUB).
00
2
$IOBPFLG
1
lOB request inactive.
lOB flag byte
Hex
Meaning
40
20
Do not allow a 2 option on an error message.
Do not issue a message if the message normally needs a 2 or
3 option.
Do not log the error.
Printer output is to be spooled.
Data address is a control storage address.
10
02
01
Figure 5-5 (Part 1 of 3). Printer lOB
(
5-10
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
3
IBM
Program
Label
$IOBPCMD
Length
in Bytes
1
Field Description
lOB command code
Bits
0
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 0
Bits
Meaning
Line printer is attached.
Serial printer is attached.
5 6 7
0 1 0
Qu iesce-requests an interrupt and completion status
the printer operation is complete.
Execute-requests that the data stream associated with
this lOB be sent to the printer.
wh~n
0 0 0
Note: The lOB is posted complete when the data
transfer is complete and a device interrupt indicates
another buffer is available.
4
$IOBPMDR
1
lOB command modifier: Command that specifies the operation to be
performed. The output and clear commands are supported on all printers.
Hex
Meaning
40
Clear command-required for any permanent printer error resulting
in a cancel to clear the printer buffers.
Note: No data is accepted with the clear command.
27
Output command-causes the information in the data stream to
be sent to the printer. The data stream can be from 0 to 256
bytes long.
5
$IOBPUAD
1
Unit address: This is the printer address that is set in the TUB during
initial program load (IPL).
6
$IOBPDAT
2
Data address: Provides the logical address of the data to be sent to the
printer. (The logical address is the same as the real address if so specified by the event control mask.)
8
$IOBPLNG
2
Length in bytes of the data to be transferred. A length value of more
than 256 (maximum length) causes error completion status.
Figure 5-5 (Part 2 of 3). Printer lOB
Printer
5-11
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
Length
in Bytes
Field Description
The following bytes are used by the prepare print buffer supervisor call to insert control characters into the data buffer
and to maintain a record of the current print line.
A
$IOBPCTL
Control byte
Hex
Meaning
80
40
AI ignment requested
Print operation
B
$IOBPSKB
The line number to skip to before printing.
C
$IOBPSPB
The number of lines to space before printing.
o
$IOBPSKA
The line number to skip to after printing.
E
$IOBPSPA
The number of lines to space after printing.
F
$IOBPWKA
Work area.
10
$IOBPTCB
2
Task control block (TCB) address: Address locates the address
translation register (ATR) for the requesting task.
Note: Bit 1 of the event control mask determines how the supervisor
call processor sets this address.
12
$IOBPSQO
13
$IOBPTUB
Printer queue header displacement: Contains the displacement into
the system queue headers of the printer queue for this printer.
2
Address of the terminal unit block.
The following bytes are used by the prepare print buffer supervisor call to validate the skip and space values and to main·
tain a record of the current print line.
15
$IOBPFML
Forms length (lines per page).
16
$IOBPCLN
Current line number.
17
$IOBPLEN
Length of the printer lOB.
Figure 5·5 (Part 3 of 3). Printer lOB
(
5·12
Printer Output Data Stream
Printer Commands
The output data stream contains all print data and
commands to the printer. The data stream (1) is limited
to 256 bytes since this is the size of the printer receive
buffers, (2) is free-form; that is, commands can appear
anywhere in it, and (3) must be prepared by the
program before the lOBs are put on the queue. The
commands, described in the following paragraphs and in
Figure 5-7, have hexadecimal values from 00 to 3F, and
the print data characters have hexadecimal values from
40 to FF.
The printer commands control carriage operations and
supply formatting information for forms length and chain
image. For a better understanding of the following
command descriptions, see Figure 5-6, which shows the
format of a printer form. View the form as a
presentation surface on which a presentation position (the
print position after an executed command) can be
moved.
Note: Program transparency to a printer type can be
guaranteed only when the commands used are common
to both the serial and line printers.
Left Margin
(print position 1)
I" '"-.--------------
A summary of all the commands is given in Figure 5-7.
This figure gives the hexadecimal code for each
command, the command description, and the availability
of the commands by printer type.
Nu mber of Li nes
(bottom line is
maximum presentation
line)
Maximum Presentation Position
(print position 132)
I
Print Positions 1 through 132 - - - - - - - - - - -.....
~
Figure 5-6. Format of Printer Form
)
Printer
5-13
Hexadecimal
Code
Command Description
Available on
Printer Type
00
Null: No. character is printed and no. functien is perfermed.
Serial
oc
Ferms feed: Meves the print pesitien to' the first pesitien ef the next
legical page.
Serial and line
Note: Although it is net a restrictien, it is suggested that all new pages
be entered with the ferms feed cemmand to' assist speol intercept in
its numbering ef pages.
00
Carriage return: Meves the print pesitien to the first pesitien ef the
same line. If the current print pesitien is the first pesitien ef a line, a
no-ep eccurs.
Serial and line
15
New line: Meves the print pesitien to the first positien ef the next
line. If the current print pesitien is en the last line ef a page, the print
pesitien is moved to' the first pesitien ef the first line en the next page.
Serial and line
1E
Interchange record separater: Same as New line.
Serial
25
Line feed: Meves the print pesitien to the same print pesitien ef the
next line. If the print positien is en the last line ef a page, it is moved
to' the same print pesition ef the first line en the next page.
Serial
2B
Fermat: Hex 2B is the fermat character that defines the start ef a fermatting data stream. The fermat character is always fellewed by a
functien byte (C1, C2, C7, er C8) that identifies the fermat type. The
functien byte is fellewed by a count byte which specifies the length ef
the remaining data stream (including the count byte).
See the fellewing
feur fermat
descriptiens.
Note: Fermats must be established befere any print er carriage eperatien. Fermats net used by a printer will cause an invalid SCS (standard
character string) parameter check.
2BC1 nnhh
Set herizental fermat: Defines the maximum herizental print pesitien,
where:
Serial
nn = number ef bytes remaining in the data stream plus 1. This value
is 02 when hh is specified but valid values are 01 and 02. If nn is 01,
hh defaults to 132. An invalid value causes a default ef 132 fer hh and
an SCS parameter check.
hh = maximum herizental print pesitien up to, and including, 132. An
invalid value causes ,a default ef 132 and an SCS parameter check.
Figure 5-7 (Part 1 of 3). Printer Commands Description
(
5-14
Hexadecimal
Code
Command Description
Available on
Printer Type
2BC2nnvv
Set vertical format: Defines the forms length, where:
Serial and line
nn = number of bytes remaining in the data stream plus 1. This value
is 02 when vv is specified but valid values are 01 and 02. If nn is 01,
vv defaults to 01. An invalid value causes a default of 01 for vv and an
SCS parameter check.
vv = forms length up to and including 255. An invalid value causes a
default of 01 and an SCS parameter check.
Note: When the forms length is set, the current line is set to 1.
2BC7nncsi
Set chain image: Loads the character set image of the line printer, where:
Line
nn = number of bytes remaining in the data stream plus 1.
csi = character set image representing the sequence of print characters
as they appear on the print belt.
2BC8nngguu
Set graphic error action: Defines the action to be taken when a character
that is not defined in the character set image is sensed, where:
Serial and line
I
nn = number of bytes remaining in the data stream plus 1. This value
is 03 when gg and uu are specified but valid values are 01 through 03.
The defaults apply when a value of 01 is specified.
gg
= default graphic. If gg is not specified, it defaults to a blank (hex 40).
Note: For the line printer, all defaults are a blank character. For the
serial printer, the default graphic is the character specified. However, for
any specified value below hex 40, the default is a blank.
uu = unprintable character option of:
OO-the default of 01 is set
o1-ne ither ha It no r retu rn status
02-neither halt nor return status for expanded character set
03-halt and return status
04-halt and return status for expanded character set
Note: Invalid values for nn and/oruu cause the defaults to be set, and cause
an invalid SCS parameter check.
2F
Bell: Turns on the Attention indicator to indicate that operator action is
needed and, if the audible alarm feature is installed, it sounds the alarm.
Serial
Figure 5·7 (Part 2 of 3). Printer Commands Description
)
Printer
5·15
Hexadecimal
Code
34
Command Description
Presentation position: Hex 34 is the character that defines the start of a
presentation (print) position data stream. This character is always followed by a function byte (CO, C4, C8, or 4C) that identifies the type of
move. The function byte is followed by a value byte that specifies a
column or line number (in the absolute sense) or an incremental change
from the current print position (in the relative sense).
Available on
Printer Type
See the
following four
presentation
position
descriptions.
Note: Invalid function and/or value bytes cause an invalid SCS (standard
character string) parameter check. Also, no carriage or forms movement
operations are performed.
34COah
Absolute horizontal position: Moves the print position to the horizontal
position specified by the ah parameter. Valid values for ah include.any
positive number up to, and including, 132.
Serial
Note: If the value specified by ah is less than the current horizontal position, a carriage return is performed and the line is printed again to the
specified position. An ah value of zero causes a no-op; a value greater than
the end of the line causes an invalid SCS parameter check.
34C4av
Absolute vertical position: Moves the print position to the line specified
by the av parameter. Valid values for av include any positive number up
to, and including, the forms length. The horizontal position does not
change.
Serial and line
Note: If the value specified by av is less than the current line, the forms
are moved to the specified line of the next page. An av value of zero
causes a no-op; a value greater than the forms I,ength causes an invalid
SCS parameter check.
34C8rh
Relative hoizontal position: Moves the print position horizontally from
its present position the number of positions specified by the rh parameter.
Valid,values for rh include any positive number up to, and including,
the maximum print position.
Serial and line
Note: A rh value of zero causes a no-op; a value greater than the end of
the line causes an invalid SCS parameter check.
344Crv
Relative vertical position: Moves the print position vertically from its
present position the number of lines specified by the rv parameter.
Valid values for rv include any positive number up to, and including,
the number for the last line on the form.
Serial
Figure 5-7 (Part 3 of 3). Printer Commands Description
(
5-16
Form Feed (OC)
This command moves the presentation position to the
top line and left margin of the next page as specified by
the maximum print line parameter which is set by the
set vertical format operation as described under Format
(28). If it is not set, the maximum print line is assumed
to be one, and the presentation position moves to the
left margin of the next line.
Programming Note: Use the form feed command to
move the presentation position to a new form because
this command is used for page numbering by spool
intercept. Do not use the new line command or the
absolute vertical parameter when moving the
presentation position from one form to the next.
Carriage Return (00)
This command moves the presentation position to the
left margin of the same line. If the current presentation
position equals the left margin, the carriage is not
moved.
Set vertical format (28C2): Specifies the vertical format
for the forms length. The format code of hex 28C2 is
followed by a count byte of either hex 01 or hex 02. If
the count byte is hex 02, a forms length byte follows
the count byte. If the count byte is hex 01, the forms
length byte has a default value of 1.
Set chain image (28C7): Loads the character set image
of the line printer. The format code of hex 28C7 is
followed, in order, by:
1.
A count byte of L+1, where L is the length of
the chain image.
2.
The character set image in the sequence that
the characters appear on the print belt.
Set graphic error action (28C8): Causes a substitute
character to be printed when an unprintable character is
sensed in the data stream. The format code of hex
28C8 is followed, in order, by:
1.
A count byte of hex 03. (See note below.)
2.
The character (blank) substituted for the
unprintable character.
3.
An error stop control byte of ~ither hex 01 (no
stop on unprintable characters and no status
returned) or hex 03 (unit check set and status
returned). A value of hex 00 causes a default of
no stop on unprintable characters.
New Line (15)
This command moves the presentation position to the
left margin of the next line. If a sequence of print
characters attempts to cause the presentation position
to go beyond 132 (the maximum presentation position),
an automatic new line is generated.
Format (28)
The format character (hex 28) specifies the start of a
formatting data stream. It is used with one of the
function bytes described below (hex C1, C2, C7, and
C8). The function byte is followed by a count byte that
specifies the number of bytes remaining in the
formatting data stream (including the count byte). All of
the printer formats must be assembled before any print
or carriage operation.
Set horizontal format (28C1): Specifies the horizontal
format for the forms width. The format code of 28C1 is
followed by a count byte of either hex 01 or hex 02. If
the count byte is hex 02, a forms width byte follows the
count byte. If the count byte is hex 01, the forms width
byte has a default value of 132.
Note: If the count byte is hex 01, the defaults are set
with blank character substitution and no stop on
unprintable characters. A count byte of hex 02 permits
character substitution but the error stop control byte
defaults to no stop on unprintable characters.
Presentation Position (34)
This command, used with four different function
parameters, moves the presentation position as specified
by the parameters. Each function parameter follows the
command in the data stream; they are described below.
A value parameter follows the function parameter in the
data stream; it is a 1-byte number that describes either
a position or line number.
)
Printer
5-17
The four valid function parameters are the absolute
horizontal position (hex CO), the absolute vertical
position (hex C4), the relative horizontal position (hex
C8), and the relative vertical position (hex 4C). If any
value other than hex CO, C4, C8, or 4C is sensed, an
invalid SCS (standard character string) parameter is
indicated.
When an absolute horizontal position is specified, the
presentation position is moved to the print position
specified by the value parameter. This parameter is valid
for any move to (but not past) the end of the line.
When an absolute vertical position is specified, the
presentation position is moved to the line specified by
the value parameter. This parameter is valid for any
value that does not exceed the maximum presentation
line. A value that is less than the current line will cause
the presentation position to be moved to the specified
line on the next page. The horizontal position is not
affected.
When a relative horizontal position is specified, the
presentation position is moved relative to the current
position, by the number of positions specified in the
value parameter. This parameter is valid for any move
to (but not past) the end of a line.
Printer Status Bytes and Error Recovery Procedures
When an error is sensed at the end of an operation, the
terminal unit block is posted with status and error bytes
indicating printer conditions, and processing of the lOB
queue stops. If the user's error recovery procedure is
used, the first lOB on the queue is posted complete
with error. However, jf the system's error recovery
procedure is used, the control processor is called to
process the error. In order to determine the cause of
the error, the control processor checks the status bytes
in a priority sequence (see Figures 5-8 and 5-10 for the
priorities).
Because the 5256 printer is attached to System/34 as a
work station printer, it needs an additional level of
recovery not needed by the 5211 printer. All possible
error conditions associated with the twinaxial interface
(the 5256 printer is connected to System/34 through a
twinaxial cable), must be corrected before the printer
errors are checked. These possible error conditions are
common for the 5256 printer and all display stations and
are described in Chapter 7.
The status bytes and error recovery procedures for the
5211 printer are given in Figures 5-8 and 5-9
respectively; for the 5256 printer, they are given in
Figures 5-10 and 5-11, respectively.
When a relative vertical position is specified, the
presentation position is moved relative to the current
position, by the number of lines specified in the value
parameter. This parameter is valid for any move down
to (but not past) the last line on the form.
(
5-18
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
o
o
2
Bit Name
Bit Description
Suggested
Recovery
Action
(See Note 1.)
Controller unit
check
Hardware parity check or controller time-out.
5
Note: If this bit is on, status bytes 1 through 5
contain all zeros. In addition, the status of this bit
determines the contents of bits 1 through 7 of
status byte O.
---- - - ---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - o
When bit 0 is off, bits 1 through 7 mean the
following:
(with bit
off)
o
16
Unprintable
character
A print character not defined in the belt image
was sensed.
2
9
Hammer echo
check
Incorrect printing, or no printing when printing
should have occL!rred. (Also see description of
status bytes 4 and 5.)
3
28
Not ready
Printer is not ready to print.
4
13
Belt sync check
Printer is out of sync; printing might be in error.
4
15
Belt speed
check
Belt either failed to start or it stops.
6
14
Belt up to
speed check
Belt failed to get up to speed in required time.
4
1 or 6
(See Note
2.)
7
- - - - -
5
- -- -
o
Any hammer
on check
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
- - --
When bit O' is on, bits 1 through 7 mean the
following:
(with bit
o on)
)
A print hammer is on when it should not be.
Power to the printer is de-activated.
N/A
Not used
2-3
N/A
Controller
unit check
decode
4
N/A
Not used
5-6
N/A
Speed select
jumpers
7
N/A
CE sense bit
N/A
00 = Controller time-out
01, 10, or 11 = Hardware parity check
N/A
N/A
00 = Jumpers not correctly placed on adapter card
01 = 300 Iines-per-minute printer
10 = Jumpers· not correctly placed on adapter card
11 = 160 lines-per-minute printer
N/A
N/A
Figure 5-8 (Part 1 of 3). 5211 Printer Status Bytes
Printer
5-19
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
Bit Name
Bit Description
Suggested
Recovery
Action
(See Note 1.)
1
0
22
End of forms
Less than 13 inches of forms remain in printer.
3
1
11
Forms jam
Forms fail to move in last 10 to 22 lines; overprinting probably occurred.
2
2
23
Throat open
The paper path throat is open or the belt cover
is not in place. (Interlock light is on.)
1 or 4
(See Note
,
2
3.)
3
24
Printer busy
too often
Printer was busy too often in a single print operation; that is, the 'printer busy' line was active
more than 3 times.
1
4
25
Printer busy
too long
The 'printer busy' line was on more than 3 seconds
during a single print operation.
1
5
26
Ribbon check
The ribbon is moving too slow.
1
6
3
Cable interlock
A cable is unplugged in either the attachment
board, cable tower, printer unit, or printer console.
1
7
27
Hammer bus
out parity check
Printer sensed even parity on the bus out Jines
during print time.
1
0
7
Not powered
on
No power to the printer. (Power light is off.)
4
1
17
Data transfer
check
Data byte from the system was lost or an extra
data byte was sensed.
5
2
19
Data stream
reject
An invalid data stream was sent to the printer.
5
3
N/A
Not used
4
21
Invalid SCS
parameter
The parameter byte that follows an SCS control
character was not recognized.
5
5
20
Invalid SCS
command
An undefined control character was sensed in the
data stream.
5
6
18
Invalid lOB
The data stream length in the lOB exceeded 256
bytes, or an invalid command code or command
modifier was sensed.
5
7
4
Printer power
check
The printer lost power unexpectedly. (Power
light is off.)
1
(See Note
N/A
4.)
Figure 5-8 (Part 2 of 3). 5211 Printer Status Bytes
5-20
(
Status
. Byte
3
4
Bit
Test
Priority
Bit Name
Bit Description
Suggested
Recovery
Action
(See Note 1.)
0
6
CE switch on
A CE switch on the printer is on.
4
1
N/A
Lines per inch
If on, 8 lines per inch; if off, 6 lines per inch.
N/A
2-3
NIA
Mode I attached
Bit 2
Bit 3
N/A·
0
0
0
1
Model 1 (160 Ipm)
Model 2 (300 Ipm)
4
8
Fire tier check
Fire tier lines are out of sequence.
1
5
12
PSS emitter check
Print subscan emitters failed.
1
6
10
Carriage
check 2
(carriage speed
check)
A single-space operation did not complete in 34
milliseconds, the time needed to keep printing
at the rated speed. This is not an error unless
it occurs 3 times on a single page.
2
7
10
Carriage
check 1
(carriage sync
check)
A carriage emitter pulse failed to occur when
expected, or occurred when not expected.
2
0-7
1
Hex FF
Status bytes 0 through 3 contain the error status.
N/A
0-7
1
Hex 04
Invalid storage page or I/O buffer boundary was
used for the print buffer.
6
0-7
1
First failing
hammer
If a hammer echo check occurs (bit 2 of status
byte 0 is on), this byte contains, in hex, the
number of the first failing hammer.
N/A
0-7
1
Number of
fail ing hammers
If a hammer echo check occurs (bit 2 of status
byte 0 is on), this byte contains, in hex, the
number of failing hammers.
N/A
f---
5
Notes:
1. The suggested recovery actions ar~ described in Figure 5-9.
2. Recovery action 6 requires no action from the operator; the printer recovers itself.
3. Perform recovery action 1 if the throat was opened while printing; otherwise perform recovery action 4.
4. Turn the printer off, and then go on. Then perform recovery action 1.
Figure 5-8 (Part 3 of 3). 5211 Printer Status Bytes
)
Printer
5-21
Suggested
RecovQry
Action
1
lights
(see note)
Type of Error
Error Description and Recovery Action
Check
Print check
An error occurred while printing.
Operator action:
1.
Correct error cond ition.
2.
Press Stop/Reset to clear the check condition (Check
Iight goes off).
3.
Press Ready (Ready light comes on)
Printer recovery: After Ready is pressed, the printer tries
the operation again; if not successful, more operator action
is needed.
2
Check and
Forms
Carriage check
Either the carriage moved too slowly, or it moved when
not expected, or it did not move when expected.
Operator action:
1.
Press Stop/Reset to clear the check condition (Check
and Forms lights go off).
2.
Press Carriage Restore to set the current line counter
to 1.
3.
Manually align the forms to line 01 of the next form
to be printed.
4.
Press Ready.
Print recovery: After Ready is pressed, the printer skips to
the line it was headed for when the error occurred unless the
carriage moved when not expected.
3
Forms
End of forms
The printer is out of forms.
Operator action:
1.
Press Stop/Reset to clear the check condition (Forms
Iight goes off).
2.
Put more forms in the printer.
3.
Press Ready.
Note: One more form can be printed before putting new
forms in the printer; press Stop/Reset to clear the check
condition and then press Ready.
Printer recovery: Normal operation continues after
pressing Ready.
Figure 5-9 (Part 1 of 2). 5211 Printer Error Recovery Procedures
5-22
(
Suggested
Recovery
Action
4
I
Lights
(see note)
None or
Interlock
Type of Error
Error Description and Recovery Action
Not ready
The printer is not ready.
Operator action:
1.
Press Ready, or
2.
If the Interlock indicator is on, correct error condition
and then press Ready.
Printer recovery: Any operations loaded into the print buffers
begin executing.
Note: If the printer does not respond after pressing the
Ready key, the printer controller is not operational. System
IPL is needed.
5
None or
Ready
Progr~m
check
System or programming error occurred.
Operator action: Cancel the job from the system console.
Printer recovery: None.
6
Ready
Soft error
An error was sensed but recovery was automatic.
Note: The Lights column identifies the lights that come on for each error condition.
Figure 5·9 (Part 2 of 2). 5211 Printer Error Recovery Procedures
)
Printer
5-23
Status
Byte
(See Note 1.) Bit
a
2
Test
Priority
(See
Note 3.)
Bit Name
Bit Description
Work station
controller
command
reject
When this bit is on, status byte 4 (lOB 14) contains
a code that gives the reason for the error. If status
byte 4 contains:
Suggested
Recovery
Action
(See Note 2.)
7
-Hex 01, the data stream was directed to a printer
when the print buffer in the work station control·
ler was full.
-Hex 04, the data stream was directed to a printer
when the printer needed initialization.
2
2
13
(See
Note 4.)
Device not
available
The printer is not ready. This bit may be on by
itself if the printe"r has not been made ready, or
it may be on with another bit to indicate a hard
error. The other bits that may be on at the same
time that this bit is on are bits a through 7 of
status byte 5 and bit 5 of status byte 4.
4
2
3
None
Outstanding
status
Indicates a printer error condition with status
posted in status bytes 4 and 5.
None
3
0-7
(See
Note 3.)
Hex FF
The work station controller sensed an error while
processing. The status is contained in status bytes
0, 1, 2,4, and 5.
None
3
0-7
(See
Note 3.)
Hex D1
The Cancel key was pressed. A message is displayed
on the screen offering cancel options. Select 'option
a if you want to ignore the cancel.
None
3
0-7
(See
Note 3.)
Hex 04
An invalid storage page or boundary was sensed by
the work station input/output control handler.
5
4
a
10
Invalid SCS
command
A character between hex 00 and hex 3F in the data
stream was not recognized.
5
4
1
11
Invalid SCS
parameter
One of the parameter bytes following the SCS com·
mand byte in the data stream was not recognized.
5
4
5
3 (15)
(See
Note 4.)
Printer
mechanism
not ready
The printer power is off or an undervoltage condi·
tion exists.
1 or 6
(See note
5.)
Note: If the printer automatically recovers from
this error, the print head moves to the left margin
and prints the character (and all remaining charac·
ters on the print line) that was being printed when
the error occurred.
Figure 5·10 (Part 1 of 3). 5256 Printer Status Bytes
5-24
(
Suggested
Recovery
Action
(See Note 2.)
Status
Byte
(See Note 1.) Bit
Test
Priority
Bit Name
Bit Description
4
6
1
End of forms
The end of forms was sensed. More forms must
be loaded in the printer.
3
4
7
12
Graph ic error
(unprintable
character)
A hexadecimal value between hex 40 and hex F F
not defined in the printer character set was sensed.
1
5
0
2 (15)
Wire check
Print wires were on too long while printing. The
'printer mechanism not ready' bit also comes on.
1 or 6
(See Note
(See
Note 4.)
5.)
5
1
20
Slow speed
check
The print emitters are occurring too slow. The
printer continues to print but at a slower speed.
6
5
2
7 (17)
Fast speed
check
The print emitters are occurring too fast. The print
coils may overheat.
1 or 6
(See Note
(See
Note 4.)
5.)
Note: If the printer automatically recovers from
this error, the print head moves to the left margin and prints the character (and all remaining
characters on the print line) that was being printed
when the error occurred.
5
5
3
4
1 or 6
(See Note
(See
Note 4.)
Emitter
sequence
check
The print emitters did not occur in the proper
sequence. This usually indicates that the head
moved in the wrong direction.
8 (18)
No emitters
No emitters were sensed while the head was moving.
1 or 6
(See Note
Note: If the printer automatically recovers from
5.)
6 (16)
(See
Note 4.)
5.)
this error, the print head moves to the left margin
and prints the character (and all remaining characters on the print line) that was being printed when
the error occurred.
5
5
9 (19)
(See
Note 4.)
)
Overrun
check
The em itter pulses occurred faster than the work
station controller could handle them.
1 or 6
(See Note
5.)
5
6
5
Forms
stopped
The carriage feedback to the system failed when
the forms were advanced. The forms are probably
jammed.
2
5
7
4
Forms
position
check
The carriage feedback to the system indicates that
the forms moved more than expected since the
last carriage operation. The work station controller
has lost the position of the current print line.
2
Figure 5-10 (Part 2 of 3). 5256 Printer Status Bytes
Printer
5-25
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Most of the bits in status bytes a through 2 for the printer are common with the same bits for the display station.
The common bits are:
8
Bits a, 1,3,4,5, and 7 of status byte a
•
Bits 1 through 5 and bit 7 of status byte 1
•
Bits a, 1, and 4 through 6 of status byte 2
See Figure 7-13 for a description of these bits.
The suggested recovery actions are described in Figure 5-11.
Status byte 3 has the highest test priority followed by the bits in status bytes a through 2. The priority of the bits
in status bytes a through 2 are given in Figure 7-13. After all the bits in status bytes a through 2 have been tested,
the bits in status bytes 4 and 5 are tested in the priority that is given in the Test Priority column.
If bit 2 of status byte 2 is off, bit 5 of status byte 4, and bits a and 2 through 5 of status byte 5 are tested for a soft
error. The test pri?rity for the soft errors is given in parentheses.
No operator action is needed for recovery action 6; the printer recovers automatica"y.
Figure 5·10 (Part 3 of 3). 5256 Printer Status Bytes
(
5·26
Suggested
Recovery
Action
1
Lights
(see note)
Type of Error
Error Description and Recovery Action
Unit Check
Print check
An error occurred while printing.
Operator action:
1.
Correct the error condition.
2.
Press Stop to clear the check condition (Unit Check
light goes off).
3.
Press Start (Ready light comes on).
Printer recovery: Automatically tries operation again; if not
successfu I operator action is needed.
2
Unit Check
and Forms
Carriage check
Either the carriage moved when not expected, or it did not
move when expected.
Operator action:
1.
Press Stop to clear the check condition (Unit Check
and Forms lights go off and the print head moves to
the left margin).
2.
Press Form Feed to set the current line counter to 1.
3.
Manually align the forms to line 1 of the next form to
be printed.
4.
Press Start.
Pri nter recovery: After Start is pressed, the printer skips to
the line it was headed for when the error occurred.
3
Forms
End of forms
The printer is out of forms.
Operator action:
1.
Press Stop to clear the check condition (Forms light
goes off).
2.
Put more forms in the printer.
3.
Press Start.
Printer recovery: Normal operation continues after
pressing Start.
4
None
Not ready
The printer is not ready.
Operator action: Press Start.
Printer recovery: Any operations loaded into the print buffer
begin executing.
)
Figure 5-11 (Part 1 of 2). 5256 Printer Error Recovery Procedures
Printer
5-27
Suggested
Recovery
Action
5
Lights
(see note)
Type of Error
Error Description and Recovery Action
Ready
Program check
System or programming error occurred.
;
Operator action: Cancel the job from the system console;
the printer remains ready.
Printer recovery: None.
6
Ready
Soft error
An error was sensed but recovery was automatic.
7
None
Twinaxial
interface check
An error occurred on the twinaxial interface to the work
station. The printer is reset and data has been lost.
Operator action: Cancel the job from the system console.
Printer recovery: None.
Note: The Lights column identifies the lights that come on for each error condition.
Figure 5·11 (Part 2 of 2). 5256 Printer Error Recovery Procedures
(
\.
5·28
Chapter 6. Disk
The disk which is inside of the 5340 System Unit, has
either 8.6 or 13.2 megabytes of storage. A second disk
can be installed to give a total of 27.1 megabytes of
storage. The specifications for the disk are shown in
Figure 6-1.
The disk has two areas of data tracks on the front side
and one more area on the back side. There are three
data heads installed on a moving actuator, one data
head for each data area. There is one servo head
installed on the actuator, the servo head uses a separate
area of servo tracks on the back side of the disk. The
servo head guides the actuator during a seek and during
track following.
DISK SU RFACE
Cylinder 0 is the inside edge of the data area and the
CE cylinder is on the outer edge of the data area for
each head. The tracks are shown in Figure 6-2 and
Figure 6-3.
40 Tracks (base machine)
Control Storage Program
Disk
Surface
(first
disk)
,.-'-..
U
I
I
I
Customer
Products
t
2964 (:t3.0%) RPM
CE tracks
on each disk
{!
10.1 milliseconds
Customer
Products
\.
I
J
'II'
303 Tracks
Average seek time
(excluding latency) over
one-third of the disk:
9.1 megabytes
35 milliseconds
13 megabytes
40 milliseconds
Increasing
Cylinder
Addresses
Capacity
Sectors per track
60
Bytes per sector
256
Bytes per track
15,360
Tracks per cylinder
3
Bytes per cylinder
46,080
Cylinders (9.1)
202
Capacity (9.1)
9,169,920 bytes
Cylinders (13.7)
303
Capacity (13.7)
13,777,920 bytes
Data rate
2 alternative
tracks on
each disk
t-- 3
a
Disk
Surface
(second
disk if
installed)
.J
r-L
202/303 Tracks
+
Cy linder
Item Speed or Size
Average rotational delay or
latency
I
'II'
0
Rotational speed
I
t>
Home
Cylinder
oqo
Axis
Hub
L
I
889,000 bytes/ sec or 1.13
J.Ls/byte or 141 ns/bit
•
I
j
Head 0
~
v
Data Tracks
Data Tracks
I\.
Head 2
Head 1
v
I
1
Data Tracks J
Servo Tracks
A
Servo Head
I
Figure 6-2. Disk Surface
ONU089
Figure 6-1. Disk Speed and Size
)
Disk
6-1
,/"
//
-- ---
-..........
~
/
/
"'" "'"
Data Tracks for Head 0
\
I
I
I
Data Tracks for Head 1
\'II.~II
\
The
60 sectors on each track
I~",
and data
"'~
field sync byteS'--- __
--------:-,.----------i
24 54 25 55 26 56 27 57 28 58 29 59\
are each a hex OE used to
I
synchronize a bit ring, which allows
the bits from the disk to be formed
"- .....
into recognizable bytes.
/"
/'
VFO sync is 12 bytes
/'
of hex FF used to
/
synchronize the read ./
clock and bits on the
disk
"" ,,-
"-
/"
J
/'
ID
Field
Sync
VFO
Sync
EWG
-------- ---4
213
....
LL
"0
c
Cl.l
-0
>."0
U 0003EO
hexadecimal)
)
Disk
6-7
Actual Sector Addresses - Skewed Sector Track Format
Index -
I
Skewing the sector track format gives a minimum
head switching delay when crossing tracks.
~One Sector
Head 0 29
59
00
30
01
31
02
32
03
33
04
34
05
35
Head 1 28
58
29
59
00
30
01
31
02
32
03
33
04
34
Head 2 27
57
28
58
29
59
00
30
01
31
02
32
03
33
)
Figure 6-5. Disk Addressing
For determining the seek time for the disk use the
following:
Time Needed for a Disk Operation
The time needed to execute an operation is made up of
the following:
If N$100, T
• Processing unit time needed to set up the operations.
If 100150, T
= 5.12 +
= .147N
3.47(N)1/2 + (.02 (100-N))1/2
+ 25.52
where:
• Disk turning delay.
• Data move time.
N = number of cylinders passed
• Head switching time, if a many sector operation is
needed.
T
= maximum
seek time, in milliseconds
• Seek to the next cylinder, if needed on a many sector
operation.
Read Operations
• If the operation uses both disks of a two-disk
system, the above steps are taken one more time.
Read Data
The seek times for the 8.6-megabyte disk are:
Cylinder to cylinder
10 ms (maximum)
Average seek (67 cylinders)
35 ms (maximum)
Maximum seek (201 cylinders)
55 ms (maximum)
This operation automatically seeks to the correct cylinder
and reads data, starting at the sector specified by the
sequential sector address. The processing unit reads
N+1 (N is the main sector count in the input/output
block) sectors into continuous positions of main storage,
starting at the address specified by the input/output
block. Head switching or seeking to the next cylinder, if
needed, is automatic.
The seek times for the 13.2-megabyte disk are:
Read Identification
Cylinder to cylinder
10 ms (maximum)
Average seek (101 cylinders)
40 ms (maximum)
Maximum seek (302 cylinders)
70 ms (maximum)
The read identification operation seeks to the correct
cylinder and reads the 5-byte identification field, from
the sector specified by the sequential sector address in
the input/output block.
(
6-8
The processing unit starts the read identification
operation at the index mark and counts the sector marks
to locate the specified sector. The sector identification
field is read and sent to the main storage data area
specified by the data address in the input/output block.
Read Data Diagnostic
This operation seeks to the correct cylinder, locates the
specified sequential sector, and sends the sector data
field to main storage. The processing unit starts the
read data diagnostic operation at the index mark and
counts sequential sector marks until the sector specified
in the sequential sector field of the input/output block is
located. The identification field is compared and the
data field is read and sent to the main storage .data area
specified by the data in the input/output block. If the
identification field does not compare or if a check
occurs as the identification field is being read, the data
field is still read and sent to main storage. The
identification orientation correct bit is off if a check
occurs as the identification field is being read.
At the end of each compare field a test is made to
determine if the data read from disk was equal to the
compare field in main storage. If the two fields are not
equal, scanning starts again at the next compare field. If
after scanning N+1 sectors a scan hit does not occur, a
completion code of hexadecimal 42 is set in byte 1 of
the input/output block. If the two fields are equal,
scanning stops. Starting at the end of the compare field
on which scan equal hit occurs, the remainder of the
256-byte sector is read into the data field in main
storage, the operation is ended, and a completion code
of hexadecimal 44 is set in byte 1 of the input/output
block. The data that is read into main storage is moved
2 bytes to a higher address. Therefore, the 2 bytes
following the compare field in main storage are not
changed.
The following is a guide to the format of the main
storage data field.
1.
The compare and scan mask fields can be 1 or
more bytes long.
2.
The 258-byte main storage field may start with a
scan mask field.
3.
Each compare field must be followed by a scan
mask field.
4.
The last scan mask field must extend to the end
of the 258-byte data field and be at least 2 bytes
long.
5.
If the main storage data field is 258 bytes of
hexadecimal FF, the completion code will be
hexadecimal 42. If the last compare field in the
258- byte main storage data field ends with byte
256, the completion code will indicate if a scan hit
occurred, but no data will be read into main
storage. Head switching or seeking to the next
cylinder, if needed, is automatic.
Read Verify
This operation seeks to the correct cylinder and verifies
that the specified sectors can be read. The processing
unit verifies N+1 (N is the sector count in the
input/ output block) sectors starting at the specified
sequential sector. Head switching or seeking to the next
cylinder, if needed, is automatic.
Scan Read Equal
This operation starts at the sector specified by the
sequential sector address and compares N+1 (N is the
sector count in the input/output block) sectors read
from disk to a single 258-byte main storage data field
addressed by the data address in the input/ output
block. The 258-byte main storage data field is made up
of compare fields followed by scan mask fields. The
scan mask fields are hexadecimal 'FF' bytes and the
compare fields are data which is compared byte to byte
to the data read from the disk.
Examples of the starting and ending status of the main
storage data field for a scan read command are shown
in Figure 6-6.
)
Disk
6-9
Example 1: A scan hit occurs on the first compare field of
the third sector scanned.
Contents of the main storage data field at start of the operation:
Contents of the third sector scanned by the operation:
Contents of the main storage data field at end of the operation:
Completion code = X'44'.
Example 2: A scan hit occurs on the second <;:ompare field.
Contents of the main storage data field at start of the operation:
Contents of the sector with scan hit:
I 0 I 8 I 2 I 4 [ tbl
JIG I JI 0
IN IE
Is I tb I tb 1 tb 1 tb 1 tb 11
I4 18 I
#
I 4 I 1 I 8 I6
~
Contents of the main storage data-field at end of the operation:
Completion cotJe
==
X'44'.
Figure 6-6. Main Storage Starting and Ending Status
6-10
(
Scan Read Low or Equal
CHECK CONDITIONS AND STATUS
The scan read low or equal operation is the same as the
scan read equal operation except that a scan hit
decision occurs if the disk data is a binary value which
is less than or equal to the compare field in main
storage. At the end of each compare field a test is
made to determine if the data read from the disk was
less than or equal to the compare field in main storage.
If the disk data was more than the compare field,
scanning starts again with the next compare field. If
after scanning N+1 sectors a scan hit does not occur, a
completion code of hexadecimal 42 is set in the
input/ output block and no data is sent to main storage.
If the disk data was less than the compare field, the
remainder of the 256-byte sector is read (with no more
compare) and sent to main storage moved by a two
byte higher main storage address, and a completion
code of hexadecimal 40 is set in the input/output block.
If the two compare fields were equal then the remainder
of the 256-byte sector is read into main storage and
moved 2 bytes to a higher address, and a completion
code of hexadecimal 44 is set in the input/output block.
When an error occurs, the device status bytes show the
conditions that result after executing or attempting to
execute an operation requested by the input/output
block. The processing unit automatically executes disk
error recover routines.
Scan Read High or Equal
2
Sector sync check: Indicates an error was found
while reading the identification sync byte or the
data field sync byte. A disk read, write, or scan
operation resets this bit.
3
Off track check: Indicates that the actuator arm
moved off the servo track when not seeking. A
disk read, write, or seek operation resets this bit.
4
Cyclic redundancy check: Indicates a cyclic
redundancy check occurred on either an
identification field or a data field. The no record
found status is set at the same time. A disk read,
write, or scan operation resets this bit.
5
Parallel data bus out parity check: Indicates a
parity error on the data bus out as data is sent
from main storage to the disk. A disk read, write,
or scan operation resets this bit.
6
Write data echo check: Indicates the serial write
data and write data echo from the disk do not
compare. This check can only occur during a write
operation. A disk read, write, or scan operation
resets this bit.
7
Cycle steal overrun: Indicates that the processing
unit did not move data between the disk and main
storage quickly enough, or it moved data too
quickly and lost a byte. A disk read, write, or scan
operation resets this bit.
The scan read high or equal operation is the same as
scan read low or equal operation except that the scan
hit decision occurs if the disk data is a binary value
which is larger than or equal to the compare field in
main storage.
Write Operations
Status Byte 0
Bit
Description
o
Disk not ready: Indicates that the disk"':(1) did not
come ready after the initial power up sequence, (2)
is not turning at the correct speed, (3) is unsafe, or
(4) has a motor brake failure.
Alternative sector process: Indicates the error
recovery failed while attempting to process an
alternative sector. This bit is set on during the first
seek from the primary track to the alternative track
and is reset when the seek back to the primary
track is complete. A disk read, write, or scan
operation resets this bit.
Write Data
This operation automatically seeks to the correct
cylinder, locates the specified sequential sector and
sends data from the main storage data area specified by
the data address in the input/output block to the disk.
This operation starts at the sector specified by the
sequential sector address and N+1 (N is the sector
count in the input/output block) sectors are written.
Head switching and seeking to the next cylinder, if
needed, is automatic.
The disk attachment generates 2 cyclic redundancy
check bytes for each data field. These 2 bytes are
written in the cyclic redundancy check field on the disk.
Disk
6-11
Status Byte 1
Status Byte 2
Bit
Description
Bit
.Description
o
No operation: Set when a disk read, write, or scan
operation is used while the disk is not ready. A
disk read,· write, or scan operation resets this bit.
o
Serializer /deserializer check: Indicates that a parity
check occurred in the hardware. A disk read,
write, or scan operation resets this bit.
2
3
4
Data not safe: Indicates a select unsafe, write
unsafe, or servo unsafe condition. This indicates
that the hardware has failed so that errors may not
be found during processing or that data may be
lost. (The not ready status bit is set at the same
time).
2
Not valid seek address: Indicates that the file
attempted to seek to a cylinder address higher
than any on the disk. A read, write, or scan
operation resets this bit.
Channel transfer error: Indicates that a parity
failure was found as data was sent from the disk
to main storage. A disk read, write, or scan
operation resets this bit.
3
Attachment equipment check: Indicates a hardware
check. For a list of the conditions that set
equipment check, see Figure 6-5.
Phase lock oscillator out of sync: Indicates the
phase .Iock oscillator is out of sync. A disk read,
write, or scan operation resets this bit.
4
Interrupt time-out check: The disk attachment did
not request an interrupt by two seconds after an
interrupt was enabled.
5
Behind home: The actuator is behind home.
6
Identification orientation correct: Indicates that the
correct identification orientation occurred during
any read data, write data or scan read operation.
7
Sector check: A sector or index pulse occurred at
the wrong time.
No record found: Indicates that the sector
specified in the sequential sector field was not
found in two complete turns of the disk. This
normally results from a seek failure, finding an
alternative sector, or surface damage in the
identification field. A disk read, write, or seek
operation resets this bit.
5
Scan equal hit: This bit is set on in the
input/ output block if a scan equal condition
occurred during a scan read operation, and some
type of an error also occurred.
6
Scan not hit: This bit is set on in the input/output
block if a scan hit condition was not found during
a scan read operation, and some type of an error
also occurred.
7
Seek Check: Set if any adapter checks occur
during a seek operation. A read, write, or scan
operation resets this bit.
Write check: Indicates that a data head is writing
on the disk when it should not be or that it is not
writing when it should be. A disk read, write, or
scan operation resets this bit.
(
6-12
Status Byte 3
Status Byte 4
Bit
Description
Bit
Description
o
A second disk is installed: The second disk storage
drive is installed.
o
Not valid input/output buffer address: Indicates
that the I/O buffer address was not in the user's
area of main storage or that it did not start on an
8-byte boundary.
Select unsafe: Indicates that more than one head
is selected during a write operation. (The data
unsafe and not ready status bit are set at the
same time.) Correcting the error condition resets
the select unsafe bit.
2
3
Write unsafe: Indicates that one of the following
conditions were found during a write operation. (1)
Write was selected and no writing occurred, or (2)
write was not selected and write current was on.
(3) Write selected with no head selected. (The
data unsafe and not ready bits are set at the same
time.) Correcting the error condition resets the
write unsafe bit.
1-5
Not used
6,7
Head select sense bits:
Bit 6
Bit 7
1
1
o
2
0
Head selected
o
1
Brake failure: Indicates a failure in the disk drive
motor brake. (The not ready status bit is set at
the same time.) The system disconnects AC
power from both disks. The system power must
be turned off to reset this bit.
4
Servo unsafe: Indicates that one of the following
conditions was found during a write operation. (1)
Write was selected and the head was off the
track, or (2) write was selected and the phase lock
oscillator was out of sync. (The data unsafe and
not ready bits are set at the same time.)
Correcting the error condition resets the servo
unsafe bit.
5
Not used
6
Not used
7
Storage indicator: When this bit is on, the installed
disks have 13.2 megabytes of storage each. When
this bit is off, the installed disk has 8.6 megabytes
of storage capacity.
)
Disk
6-13
Status Byte 0
Bit
Description
o
Disk not ready is part of unit-check condition.
XXXXXXXX
Alternate sector process is part of unit-check condition.
x
2
4
5
XXXXXXXX
Off track check is part of unit-check condition. Equipment check
is set concurrently.
XXXXXXXX
CRC is part of unit-check condition. Equipment check is set
concurrently.
XXXXXXXX
Parallel DBO parity check is part of unit-check condition. Equipment
check is set concurrently.
6
XXXXXXXX
Write data echo check is part of unit-check condition. Equipment
X
check is set concurrently.
7
X X X X
Sector sync check is part of unit-check condition. Equipment
check is set concurrently.
3
x
Cycle steal overrun is part of unit-check condition. Equipment check
is set concurrently.
XXXXXXXX
Status Byte 1
Bit
Description
o
No operation is part of unit-check condition.
2
Data not safe is part of unit-check condition.
X X X X X X X X
Invalid seek address is part of unit-check condition.
xxxxxxxx
Equipment check is set at the same time.
3
Attachment equipment check is part of unit-check condition.
X X X X X X X X
4
No record found is part of unit-check condition.
X
5
Scan equal hit.
X X X
6
Scan not hit.
X X X
7
Seek check is part of unit-check condition. Equipment check is
set concurrently.
6-14
X X X X X
XXXXXXXX
(
Status Byte 2
Bit
Descri ption
o
Serializer-deserializer check is part of unit-check condition.
Write check and equipment check are set concurrently.
x
XXXXXXX
Channel transfer error is part of unit-check condition. Equipment
check is set concu rrently.
x
X X
3
PL a out of sync.
XXXXXXXX
4
Interrupt timeout check.
XXXXXXXX
5
Behind home.
6
10 orientation correct.
XXXXXXXX
7
Sector count or data check.
XXXXXXXX
2
XXX
Status Byte 3
Bit
Description
o
Disk Storage Drive B is installed (27.1 Mb).
Select unsafe is part of unit-check condition.
XXXXXX
x
2
Write unsafe is part of unit-check condition.
XXXXXXX X
3
Brake failure is part of unit-check condition.
XXXXXXXX
4
Servo unsafe is part of unit-check condition.
5
Reserved.
6
Reserved.
X
Capacity indicator.
8.6 Mb
7
o
13.2 Mb or 27.1 Mb
X X X X X: X X X
Status Byte 4
Bit
Description
o
Not valid I/O buffer address.
X X X
X X X X
Reserved.
2
Reserved.
3
Reserved.
4
Reserved.
5
Re"served.
6
7
}
Head select bits:
Head 0
Head 1
Head 2
0
0
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X
(
6-16
DISK OPERATING PROCEDURES
5.
Seeks to the primary track and changes the
identification field of the damaged sector, writing
hexadecimal 02 in the flag byte of the
identification field and writing the address of the
alternative sector in the remainder of the
identification field.
6.
Verifies the identification field. If the identification
field cannot be read, the identification field is
written using a write identification with skew
operation. Then the processing unit verifies the
identification field using a read identification with
skew operation.
Disk Program Load
Pressing the Load key on the operator panel starts the
program load. The CSIPL and MSIPL switches on the
CE panel determine which device reads data during the
control storage initial program load and the main storage
initial program load.
A disk initial control storage program load procedure
starts an immediate recalibrate to cylinder 000, track a
and loads sectors 00 through 15 (2048 words) into
control storage locations from address 0000 through
2047. The processing unit starts main storage initial
program load from the disk during the execution of
control storage initial program load if the MSIPL switch
is set to Disk. The Load light turns off when the
processing unit completes a correct main storage initial
program load. The display screen signals the end of the
initial program load if the IBM system support
programming is used.
Alternative Sector Assignment
The processing unit uses an alternative sector
assignment procedure for assigning alternative sectors
to damaged disk sectors. If a sector is damaged the
processing unit automatically assigns a good alternative
sector. The processing unit does not use the procedure
for cylinders 000 and 001 on the first disk, which must
not be damaged, nor for alternate tracks and CE
cylinders on either disk.
Alternative Sector Processing
If the identification field does not compare during read
data, read verify, write data, or scan read operation, the
processing unit automatically reads the identification
field. If the identification field has an alternative sector
assigned, the processing unit automatically seeks to· an
alternative sector and executes the specified operation
on the assigned alternative sector.
If the identification field does not compare on the
alternative sector, the processing unit sets the no record
found status bit and alternative sector processing status
bit in the disk status byte. If the identification field does
compare on the alternative sector, the assigned
alternative sector is processed. After processing the
assigned alternative sector, the processing unit seeks
back to the primary track and processing continues.
Error Recovery
In the alternative assignment procedure, the processing
unit:
)
1.
Recovers the data part from the damaged sector.
2.
Seeks to the alternative sector cylinder (see Figure
6-2) and locates the next available good
alternative sector, using a read identification
operation ..
3.
Writes the data recovered from the damaged
sector in the data field of the alternative sector.
4.
Writes hexadecimal 01 in the flag byte of the
alternative sector to indicate a good alternative
sector and writes the address of the damaged
sector in the remainder of the identification field.
Then the processing unit verifies the identification
field.
The processing unit executes disk error recovery if bit a
of the input/output block flag byte is set to O. If bit a
of the input/output block flag byte is set to 1, the
processing unit does not do error recovery. Check
conditions are used for error recovery in the following
way:
Seek Check, Not Valid Seek Address Check, or No Record
Found: The processing unit resets the check,
recalibrates, and seeks to the correct cylinder.
Data Unsafe or Not Ready: The first time this check
occurs, the data unsafe condition is reset, a recalibrate
and seek to the current cylinder is executed, and the
operation is executed again. The second and all
following operations are not executed and the
processing unit sets the no operation status bit. The
• processing unit must be loaded again to recover from
the no operation status because of a data unsafe
condition.
Disk
6-17
All Other Checks:. The processing unit resets the check
and starts the operation over again.
Error Recovery by the IBM Input/Output Supervisor
Program
If a unit check continues for 17 attempts to execute the
operation, the type of unit check indicates which type of
error recovery will be used. If the processing unit
determines that the error cannot be recovered from, the
processing unit error routine assembles an operator
message which indicates the error cannot be recovered.
from. If the error can be recovered from, the processing
unit also enters an alternative sector assignment routine.
For all unit check status conditions, the processing unit
error routine logs the error data.
(
6·18
Chapter 7. Work Stations
Two types of work stations can be attached to the IBM
System/34: the 5251 Display Station and the 5256
Printer. Because of programming characteristics, the
5256 Printer is described with the 5211 Printer in
Chapter 5, Printer Functions.
System/34 supports up to eight work stations. A 5251
Display Station must be attached to each System/34 as
the system console. It is the only work station attached
to cable entry position 0 on the cable entry tower. All
other work stations are optional, and must be attached
to cable entry positions 1 through 3. The cable-thru
feature is used to attach more than one work station to
these three cable entry positions.
System/34 supplies the commands, orders, and control
characters needed to direct the operation of the work
stations. The display station commands control such
operations as writing, reading, erasing of data, and
cursor positioning; they also control the indicators on
the display station. Printer commands control printing,
formatting, and forms movement. The commands and
the input/ output blocks, status bytes, and error recovery
procedures for the display station are described later in
this chapter. For the 5256 Printer, they are described in
Chapter 5.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 5251
DISPLAY STATION
The 5251 Display Station is a fully buffered display
station used for inquiry and data entry applications. The
major parts of the 5251 are the display screen and
keyboard.
The display screen can display up to 1920 characters at
the same time. The characters are displayed in 24 rows
with 80 characters in each row. A marker (called a
cursor) indicates the position on the screen where the
next character will be entered. The cursor can be moved
to any position on the screen either by the operator (by
pressing the cursor motion keys), or under control of the
system program.
The keyboard, shown in Figure 7-1, supports the
character set shown in Figure 7-2. For a description of
the keys, see Keyboard Key Functions later in this
chapter.
Figure 7-1. 5251 Keyboard (United States)
Work Stations
7-1
2nd
Hex I
Char " .
o
o
1
4
3
2
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
c
D
E
F
1st
~Hex
Char
(see
note)
sp
}
&
/
1
a
A
J
\
o
2
b
k
s
B
K
S
2
3
c
I
t
C
L
T
3
d
m
u
o
M
U
4
./.i··i>/
4
...........•........••.•••.•......................
.••.
VI
//
.,.
~
...
5
e
n
v
E
N
V
5
~--------4---~--~~E~··~---+---+---+--~--~r---r---+---+---+---~--~--~
6
o
w
F
W 6
......
.~
o
«
~--------~--~--~--->--~---+---+---+--~----r---~--+---4---~--~---r--~
CtI
7
9
C.
VI
p
x
G
p
X
7
~--------~--~--~--o--~---+---+---+--~----r---~--+---4---4---~---r--~
....
8
h
o
q
y
H
Q
Y
8
~--.------~--~--~--~--~---+--~.---r---+--~--~r---~--+---+---+---~--~
C1l
9
r
VI
~--------4---.4---~--
::::>
B
D
Z
9
$
........•.
"*
... <
.
........,......
....... '
......
%
@
(
..........
..............
>
E
.......
F
R
¢
A
c
z
---+---4---4---4----r---+---+---~--~--~---r---+--~
.....•
.
..
.•. . . .•. •.' I
?
Note: The null character is hex 00.
Figure 7-2. Character Set for Display Station
(
7-2
OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 5251
DISPLAY STATION
Internal Check: Indicates that a display station parity
error has occurred.
The operational characteristics for the 5251 Display
Station include operator aids, keyboard key functions
and display station modes.
Storage Check: Indicates that a display station parity
error has occurred on the extended storage card.
Ready Indicator: Indicates the status of the display
station; either ready or not ready.
Operator Aids
The display station has aids that inform the operator of
specific operating conditions. These aids include 10
indicators, (five program status indicators and five
hardware status indicators), a clicker, an audible alarm,
and a set of four-digit error codes.
Clicker
When the operator is entering information into the
system through the keyboard, a clicking sound occurs
each time a key is pressed. However, if the keyboard is
locked, the clicker is inhibited and no sound occurs.
Indicators
Audible Alarm
The five program status indicators (lighted squares on
the right-hand side of the display screen) and the
function of each are:
System Available: Indicates that the work station
controller in System/34 is polling the display station;
data can be entered from the keyboard.
An audible alarm on the keyboard is activated by the
system program when the display station needs operator
attention. Once activated, the alarm will sound for
approximately 1 second.
Four-Digit Error Codes
Message Waiting: Indicates that a message for this
display station is in the system. The operator must
press the Sys Req / Attn key or press (and hold) a
shift key followed by the Sys Req/ Attn key and the
Enter / Rec Adv key to display the message.
When an operator presses the wrong key and the
keying error is sensed by the work station controller:
1.
The display station is forced into operator-error
mode (see Operator-Error Mode later in this
chapter).
2.
The keyboard locks (clicker disabled) and the Input
Inhibited indicator comes on. 'Only the Error Reset,
Help, Attn, and shift keys are operational when the
keyboard is locked.
3.
The cursor blinks and is placed under the
character position in error, or under the first
position of the field in error.
4.
A four-digit error code is displayed on the bottom
row (left side) of the screen; the four-digit error
code blinks and is intensified. The four-digit error
code replaces the characters, if any, that were on
the bottom row.
Keyboard Shift: Indicates that the keyboard is in
upper-shift.
Insert Mode: Indicates that the display station is in
insert mode; characters can be inserted into a data
field.
Input Inhibited: Indicates that System/34 will not
accept input from the keyboard with the exception of
the shift keys and the Sys Req/ Attn key. However, if
the display station is in operator-error mode when
this indicator is on, the Help key and Error Reset key
are also accepted.
The five hardware status indicators and the function of
each are:
Line Sync: Indicates that error-free data is being
received.
Line Check: Indicates that a command byte or data
byte with wrong parity has been received from
System/34.
If the Error Reset key is pressed, the four-digit error
code is cleared and the characters that were on the
bottom row are again displayed. Pressing the Error
Reset key also unlocks the keyboard if the keyboard
was not locked before the error was sensed.
Work Stations
7-3
If the Help key is pressed, an AI D code of hex FB and
the four-digit error code are sent to the host. The host
responds with a message that clears the four-digit error
code, and a message number and description of the
operator error is displayed on the bottom row of the
screen. The message number is preceded by the letters
KBD. To recover from any of the operator errors, see
the KBD messages in the Displayed Messages Guide.
Keyboard Key Functions
The keyboard for the 5251 Display Station includes
three different groups of keys. The alphameric keys are
similar to the keys on a typewriter (letters, numbers, and
special characters); they are used to enter alphabetic
and numeric data. The numeric keys on the right side of
the keyboard are used for entering numeric data only.
The remaining keys are divided into:
• Signal keys
• AID request keys
• Cursor motion keys
• Editing keys
• Special field keys
The signal keys and the AID request keys are AID
generating keys; that is, when one of these keys (or a
combination of these keys) is pressed, an AID byte is
stored in the work station controller. How the AID bytes
are sent to the host, the priorities of the AI D bytes, and
other information is given under Signal Keys and AID
Request Keys. All of the AID bytes are shown in Figure
7-3.
Depending on the state of the keyboard (locked or
unlocked), the signal keys mayor may not be
operational, but none of the AI D request keys are
operational when the keyboard is locked. When these
keys are operatio':lal is shown in Figure 7 -4. Figure 7-4
also shows the relationship of these keys to the
mandatory fields (fill and enter)' to the check digit
verification fields, and to insert mode.
(
7-4
Key or Function
AID Code
(Note 1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Test Request
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
Command 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Clear
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
Command
Key or Function
AID Code
Printer Cancel (Note 2)
D1
Printer Operation Complete (Note 2)
Printer Transfer Complete (Note 2)
D3
D4
Sys Req/Enter (2 keys)
Enter/Rec Adv
Attention
Help (not in operator-error mode)
Roll Down
Roll Up
Print
Record Backspace
Resources Available (Note 3)
Help (in qperator-error mode)
Work Station Controller Sensed
Error AID (Note 2)
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F8
FA
FB
Work Station Input/Output Sensed
Error AID (Note 2)
FF
04
Notes:
1. The AID codes in this table are given in hexadecimal notation; they can be found in byte 13 of the
input/output block (lOB).
2. The AID is not generated from the keyboard.
3. The AID cannot be generated under control of the keyboard operator even though the Error Reset
key must be pressed.
Figure 7-3. Attention Identifier (AID) Bytes
Work Stations
7-5
Signal Keys
The AID bytes generated by the signal keys (or by a
signal key in combination with an AID request key) are
sent to the host under control of the enable-interrupt bit
(bit 2 of the device control byte). The device control
byte is in the work station control field, and is described
in the Data Areas Handbook.
The work station input/output control handler
(WSIOCH) microcode sets the enable-interrupt bit on to
allow the signal key AIDS to be sent to the host.
Although the enable-interrupt bit must be on before the
AID byte can be sent to the host, the
invite-response-allowed bit (bit 0 of the same device
control byte) can be either on or off. In other words, the
user cannot inhibit the AID byte from being sent to the
host.
Other characteristics of the AID bytes generated by the
signal keys are:
• They are of a higher priority than the AID bytes
generated by the AID request keys.
• More than 1 can be stored in the work station
controller, but only 1 is sent at a time to the host.
They are sent in the following priority:
a. FA (Resources Available)
b. FB (Help key in operator-error mode)
c. F2 (Attn)
d. FO (Sys Req/Enter)
The signal keys include the Sys Req / Attn key, the Error
Reset key (in system request mode or operator-error
modeL the Help key (in operator-error mode), and the
Enter/Rec Adv key (Enter, in system request mode); all
are described in the following paragraphs.
Sys Req: Forces the display station into system request
mode if (1) the Sys Req/ Attn key is pressed while a
shift key is held down, and (2) the display station is not
in command key mode, insert mode, or operator-error
mode. Once the display station is in system request
mode, the only operational keys are Enter / Rec Adv,
Error Reset, and shift. Pressing any other key causes an
operator error.
No AID byte is generated when the Sys Req / Attn key is
pressed (while a shift key is held down). Instead, the
AID byte is generated after the display station is in
system request mode, and the Enter / Rec Adv key or
the Error Reset key is pressed.
7-6
The system request function of the Sys Req/ Attn key is
used in free key mode to sign on to the system or to
get messages displayed that are waiting in the system
(indicated by the Message Waiting indicator). A
three-key sequence is needed to sign on to the system
or to get a message displayed; press and hold a shift
key, press the Sys Req / Attn key, and then press the
Enter / Rec Adv key.
Attn: Activated by pressing the Sys Req/ Attn key if (1)
a shift key is not pressed at the same time, and (2) the
display station is not in free key mode, command key
mode, or system request mode.
An AID byte of hex F2 is generated when the Sys
Req/ Attn key is pressed (and a shift key is not pressed
at the same time). The AID byte is generated if the
keyboard is locked or unlocked, and the state of the
keyboard (locked or unlocked) does not change.
The attention function of the Sys Req/ Attn key is used
to do an inquiry function. By pressing the Sys
Req/ Attn key, the system causes an option menu to be
displayed on the screen.
Error Reset (System Request Mode or Operator-Error
Mode): Functions according to the mode the display
station is in when the Error Reset key is pressed. If the
display station is in system request mode, this key
causes:
• A reset of system request mode.
• The keyboard to lock; the same state the keyboard
was in before pressing the Sys Req/ Attn key.
• An AID byte of hex FA if a command was rejected
during system request mode. If a command was not
rejected, no AID byte is generated.
If the display station is in operator-error mode, this key
causes:
• A reset of operator-error mode.
• The keyboard to the same state (locked or unlocked)
the keyboard was in before pressing the Sys
Req/ Attn key.
• The display station to restore the last line of data.
• An AID byte of hex FA if a command was rejected
during operator-error mode. If a command was not
rejected, no AID byte is generated.
(
Key or Function
Insert
Mode
Check Digit
and/or
Mandatory
Fill Field
Mandatory
Enter Field
Commands 1-24
A
Y
Y
U
Test Request
A
N
N
U
Clear
A
N
N
U
Attention
B
N
N
L
System Request/Enter
E
Y
N
L
Print
E
Y
N
U
Roll Up
E
Y
Y
U
Roll Down
E
Y
Y
U
Record Backspace
E
N
N
U
Enter /Rec Adv
R
Y
Y
U
Help (not operator-error mode)
R
N
N
U
Help (operator-error mode)
A
N
N
L
Keyboard
Lock
State
Legend
Insert Mode
A=
B=
E=
R=
Key or function is not operational if display station is in insert mode.
Key or function is operational if display station is in insert mode, or if it is not in insert mode.
Error; four-digit code is 0017.
Insert mode is reset when key is pressed.
Check Digit, Mandatory Fill, and Mandatory Enter Fields
Y = Yes; these fields are checked.
N = No; these fields are not checked.
Keyboard Lock State
U:..: Unlocked; the key or function is not operational unless the keyboard is unlocked.
L = Locked; the key or function is' operational even though the keyboard is locked. However, the
System Request/Enter function is not operational in operator-error mode, and Help (operatorerror mode) is operational only when the keyboard is locked and the display station is in
operator-error mode.
Figure 7-4. Signal Keys and AID Request Keys
Work Stations
7-7
See Error Reset later in this chapter for more
information on the Error Reset key.
Help (Operator-Error Mode): Generates a four-digit
error code, and an AID byte of hex FB. The error code
is sent to the host with the AID byte. The Help key
(when pressed in operator-error mode) also locks the
keyboard. Then, the only keys that are valid are the Attn
key and the shift keys. Because the Error Reset key is
not valid, the operator cannot unlock the keyboard. To
enable the operator to unlock the keyboard, the SSP
must issue a write error command.
Issuing a write error command helps the operator during
error recovery because an error message, taken from the
disk, is sent to the appropriate display station where it
is displayed on the bottom row of the display screen.
The displayed message gives the operator more
information on the type of error so that the operator can
recover from the error.
AID Request Keys
The AID bytes generated by the AID request keys are
sent to the host under control of the user if the
invite-response-allowed bit (bit a of the device control
byte) and the enable-interrupt bit (bit 2 of the device
control byte) are on. The device control byte is in the
work station control field, and is described in the Data
Areas Handbook.
Other characteristics of the AI D bytes generated by the
AID request keys, and of the AID request keys, are:
• None of these keys are operational if the keyboard is
locked, if the display station is in free key mode, or if
the cursor is in an active, right-adjust field.
• All of these keys force the keyboard into a locked
state, and an AID byte to be stored in the work
station controller.
• The AID bytes are of a lower priority than the AID
bytes generated by the signal keys.
Enter (System Request Mode): Resets system request
mode, restores the keyboard to the locked state (same
state the keyboard was in before pressing the Sys
Req/ Attn key), and causes an AID byte of Fa to be
posted in the work station controller. If an error was
sensed in system request mode and the Enter / Rec Adv
key' is pressed, the display station is forced into
operator-error mode.
The display station is also forced into operator-error
mode if the Enter / Rec Adv key is pressed when the
cursor is in a mandatory fill field or a check digit field,
and the requirements of these fields are not satisfied.
For example, the mandatory fill field is not filled when
the Enter / Rec Adv key is pressed. If the requirements
of these fields are satisfied, the Enter/Rec Adv key
causes an AID byte of hex Fa to be posted in the work
station controller.
When the Enter/Rec Adv key is pressed, an AID byte of
hex FA is also posted in the work station controller if a
command was rejected during system request mode.
The AID byte of hex FA has priority over the AID byte
of hex Fa.
See Enter fRee Adv later in this chapter for more
information on the Enter / Rec Adv key.
7-8
The AID request keys include the Cmd key (followed by
a valid command key), the Enter/Rec Adv key, the Help
key, .the Print key, and the Roll keys. All of these keys
are described in the following paragraphs.
Cmd: Puts the display station into command key mode
if the display station is not in operator-error mode, in
system request mode, or in insert mode.
No AI D byte is generated when the Cmd key is pressed.
Instead, the AID byte is generated after the display
station is in command key mode, and a valid command
key is pressed. However, the AI D byte is not sent to
the host until all field checks (mandatory fill, mandatory
enter, and so on) are performed. The valid command
keys are shown in Figure 7-5, and the AID bytes for
these keys are shown in Figure 7-3.
The Cmd key, used in combination with the valid
command keys, assigns the clear, test request, or
reverse image function, or assigns 1 of 24 commands as
determined by the user's program. The 24 commands
determined by the user's program should be marked on
a template located above the keyboard. To perform a
command assigned to the bottom row of the template
(commands 1 through 12), press the Cmd key and a
valid command key. To perform a command assigned to
the top row of the template (commands 13 through 24),
press the Cmd key, press and hold a shift key, and then
press a valid command key.
(
User Determined Commands
I
Reverse
Image
,.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Test
Request
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Clear
Note: If any key other than a shift key, Error Reset key,
or valid command key is pressed after the Cmd key is pressed,
operator error 0003 is displayed. If the Error Reset key is pressed,
command key mode is reset.
Figure 7-5. Valid Command Keys
Enter fRee Adv: Informs the system that the operator
has completed entering on the current screen. If there is
no keying error before the Enter / Rec Adv key is
pressed, an AI D byte of hex F1 is generated.
To roll the information on the display screen up or
down, press and hold a shift key and then press the
appropriate roll key. All rolls are defined by, and under
control of, the host.
For information on the Enter / Rec Adv key when the
display station is in system request mode, see Enter
(System Request Mode) earlier in this chapter.
Help: Causes an AID byte of hex F3 to be sent to the
host without a four-digit error code. For information on
the Help key when the display station is in
operator-error mode, see Help (Operator-Error Mode)
earlier in this chapter.
Print: Informs the host with an AID byte of hex F6 that
the operator wants to print the contents of the current
display.
Roll (Up or Down): Informs the host that the operator
wants to roll the information on the display screen up
(AID byte of hex F5), or down (AID byte of hex F4).
Work Stations
7-9
Cursor
Left
Cursor
I
I
••••
I
Cursor
Right
Field
Backspace
Field
Advance
Up
I
Cursor
Down
I
I
Character
Backspace
New
------Line
~--------------.....------.....
These keys move the cursor
to any location.
These keys move the cursor only to locations
programmed to accept operator input.
Figure 7-6. Cursor Motion Keys
Cursor Motion Keys
The cursor motion keys, as shown in Figure 7-6, permit
positioning of the cursor to any character position on
the display screen. These keys cause the cursor to
move in the direction indicated by the arrows on the
key. None of the cursor motion keys are operational
when the keyboard is locked.
If any cursor motion key causes the cursor to leave an
automatic enter field or a right adjust field, the
automatic enter or right adjust functions are not
executed even though the function is selected in the
field format word. Also, there are limitations on the use
of these keys when the cursor is in a mandatory fill field
(see Mandatory Fill (Bits 13-15) later in this chapter).
Cursor Up, Down, Left, and Right: Moves the cursor
either one line (up or down) or one character position
(left or right) in the direction indicated by the arrow on
the key. These keys also cause the cursor to wrap to
the next line (cursor right), to the previous line (cursor
left), to the bottom line (cursor up), or to the top line
(cursor down).
If the cursor is blinking at the end of an input field
(indicates that the operator must press one of the
field-type keys) and the Cursor Left key is pressed, the
cursor stops blinking but does not move. If the key is
pressed a second time, the cursor moves one character
position to the left.
Field Advance: Moves the cursor to the first position of
the next unprotected field on the screen. If there are no
unprotected fields on the screen, the cursor moves to
the position specified by the home address. If the home
address is not specified, the cursor automatically moves
to the first position of row 1.
Character Backspace: Functions the same as the Cursor
Left key unless the cursor is in the first position of a
field. If the cursor is in the first position of a field, the
cursor moves to the left to the last position of the
preceding unprotected field. If the new field is a signed
numeric field, the cursor moves to the position before
the sign position.
If the cursor is blinking at the end of an input field
(indicates that the operator must press one of the
field-type keys) and the Character Backspace key is
pressed, the cursor stops blinking but does not move. If
the key is pressed a second time, the cursor moves one
character position to the left.
Field Backspace: If the cursor is in any position of an
unprotected field other than the first position,. the cursor
moves to the first position of the same field. If the
cursor is in the first position of an unprotected field or
in any position of a protected field, the cursor moves to
the first position of the preceding unprotected field.
New Line: Moves the cursor to the first position of the
next or subsequent line that is in a non bypass input
field. If all the fields specified are bypass fields, the
cursor moves to the position specified by the home
address. If the home address is not specified, the
cursor automatically moves to the first position of row 1.
7-10
(
Editing Keys
The editing keys are not operational if the keyboard is
locked. These keys also cause an operator error if
pressed after the Sys Req or Cmd key is pressed.
Del: Deletes the character above the cursor and moves
the remaining characters in the field (must be an
unprotected field) one position to the left. The last
character position of the field is filled with a null
character.
To delete a character, press and hold a shift key and
then press the Del/Ins (Delete/Insert) key.
Ins: Sets the display station to insert mode. In this
mode, characters can be inserted in a field (must be an
unprotected field) while the character above the cursor
and all following characters in the field are shifted 1
position to the right. Characters can be inserted as long
as the rightmost character position in the field is a null
character (hex 00).
Note: Insert mode must be established for each field;
that is, the display station does not remain in insert
mode for more than one field.
Erase Input: Clears all unprotected fields that have been
modified by the operator, and moves the cursor to the
position specified by the home address. To clear the
unprotected fields, press and hold a shift key and then
press the Erase Input/ Home key.
Home: Moves the cursor to the position specified by
the last home address. If there are no home addresses
specified for the current screen, the cursor moves to the
first position of row 1.
Error Reset: Lets the operator recover from a keyboard
disabled condition. If there is no operator error
condition at the time this key is pressed, this key will
reset command mode, system request mode, or insert
mode.
See Error Reset (System Request Mode or
Operator-Error Mode) earlier in this chapter for more
information on the Error Reset key.
Shift and Shift Lock: The two shift keys are each
marked with a wide arrow pointing up, and the Shift
Lock key is marked with a wide arrow pointing down.
Pressing either shift key sets the keyboard in
upper-shift for as long as the key is held down.
Pressing a shift key also identifies the start of a shifted
key function such as system request, delete, roll, and so
on. The end of the shifted key function is identified by
releasing the shift key.
When the Shift Lock key is pressed, the keyboard is set
to upper-shift, and the keyboard remains in upper-shift
after the Shift Lock key is released. To reset
upper-shift, press (and release) one of the shift keys.
An inhibit downshift function permits the operation of
some keys while a shift key is being held down without
changing the shift state of the keyboard after the shift
key is released. For example, if the keyboard is in
upper-shift and a character is to be deleted, a shift key
and the Del/Ins key must be pressed to delete the
character. Then, when the shift key is released, the
keyboard remains in upper-shift because of the inhibit
downshift function.
The inhibit downshift function is enabled when any of
the following occur (without an operator error):
• The keyboard is not locked, a shift key is pressed,
and the Erase Input, Del/Ins, Roll Up, or Roll Down
key is pressed.
• The keyboard is not locked, the Cmd key is pressed,
a shift key is pressed and a valid command key is
pressed.
• A shift key is pressed and then the Sys Req / Attn key
is pressed.
The inhibit downshift function is reset if an operator
error occurs, or if any key is pressed that does not
enable the function.
Reverse Image: Reverses the image of the display
screen if the keyboard is not locked. Normally, green
letters appear on a black screen, but with the reverse
image function the operator can display black letters on
a green screen. To reverse the image, press the Cmd
key, press and hold a shift key, and then press the \
key (see Figure 7-5).
Note: The \ key is the only command key that does not
cause an AI D byte to be sent to the host.
Work Stations
7-11
Special Field Keys
Display Station Modes
The special field keys include the Field Exit, Field -,
Field+, and Dup keys. These keys:
A display station can be in anyone of several different
modes .. The following paragraphs describe each of
these modes and how the modes are initialized.
• Are not operational if the keyboard is locked.
• Will cause operator errors if pressed after the Sys
Req or Cmd key is pressed.
• Will not cause the cursor to leave a field if the
display station is in insert mode.
Power On - No Mode Set
This mode is initialized when power to the display
station is turned on but the display station is not
operational. Characteristics of this mode are:
• The Ready indicator on the display station is on.
Field Exit: Clears all of the characters from the current
cursor position in a field to the end of the field, and
moves the cursor to the first position of the next
unprotected field. If the cursor is in any position of a
mandatory fill field other than the first position, the
cursor does not move and a four-digit error code is
displayed. If the cursor is in the first position, the cursor
moves to the first position of the next unprotected field.
If the cursor is in a signed numeric field, this key causes
a positive number to be generated. If the cursor is in a
mandatory enter field that has not been modified, this
key is not valid when pressed and causes a four-digit
error code to be displayed.
Field-: Signals the end of an entered signed numeric
field and causes a minus sign (-) to be displayed in the
low-order character position of that field. This key is
operational only in a signed numeric field.
• Nothing is displayed on the screen except for the
cursor which is positioned in the upper right-hand
corner (row 1, column 80)' and for the markers
associated with the 5 indicators on the right side of
the screen.
• Keystrokes are not serviced even though the Input
Inhibited indicator is off.
Note: If the System Available indicator does not come
on, System/34 is not powered on. If the System
Available indicator comes on but the cursor stops in the
upper right-hand corner of the display screen, the
operator should turn the power off to the display station
and then turn power back on. If the cursor again stops
in the upper right-hand corner of the display screen, call
your service representative.
Free Key Mode
Field+: Functions the same as the Field Exit key.
Dup: Causes a special character (an asterisk with a bar
over it) to be displayed in the current cursor position
and in all positions to the right of the cursor if the field
is a dup-allowed field. This key also causes the cursor
to move to the first position of the next unprotected
field.
Note: The special character has a hex 1C value and is
shown in Figure 7-2.
Free key mode is initialized when power to the display
station is turned on, and the following conditions are
set:
• System/34 is powered on and operational.
• The serial interface between System/34 and the
display station is operational.
• The system configuration has been specified.
• The display mode is set; that is, the display station is
not in power on-no mode set and the cursor is
moved to the upper left-hand corner (row 1, column
1) of the screen.
A display station remains in free key mode until the Sys
Req/Enter keying sequence causes System/34 to write
to the display station.
7-12
(
The first command issued to a display station in free
key mode should be a Clear Unit command. This
command is needed to reset field definitions that have
been automatically set up for free key mode, and to
clear the screen of any data that may have been entered
in free key mode.
System Request Mode
System request mode is initialized by pressing and
holding a shift key, and then pressing the Sys Req / Attn
key. This mode cannot be initialized if the display
station is already in command key mode, operator-error
mode, or insert mode.
Characteristics of free key mode are:
• The display screen is specified as an alphameric enter
field.
• Operator errors that are normally sensed by the work
station controller are also sensed in free key mode,
and the appropriate error code will be displayed.
• Keyboard functions handled by the work station
controller operate normally except for those shown in
Figure 7-7.
•
Keyboard functions that generate an AI D byte (except
for Sys Req / Enter or Clear) cause error message
0099 to be displayed (see Figure 7 - 7). This error
message is reserved for keyboard functions not
allowed in free key mode.
System request mode is usually reset by pressing the
Enter/Rec Adv key. However, if the Sys Req/ Attn key
is pressed by accident, this mode can be reset by
pressing the Error Reset key.
Command Key Mode
Command key mode is initialized by pressing the Cmd
key. This mode cannot be initialized if the display
station is already in system request mode, insert mode,
keyboard locked mode, or operator-error mode.
Command key mode is usually reset by pressing one of
the valid command keys; that is, one of the top row
keys as shown in Figure 7-5. However, if the Cmd key
is pressed by accident, this mode can also be reset by
pressing the Error Reset key.
Function in Free Key Mode
Keyboard Function
(see Note 1)
Print
Help
Roll Up
Roll Down
Enter fRec Adv
Test Request
Attention
Commands 1-24
Field minus
Home (see Note 2)
Duplicate
Operator
Error
Number
Free Key
Error
(0099)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0016
X
0019
Notes:
1. All other keyboard functions operate normally in free key mode.
2. The home function causes an error of 0099 only if the cursor is already
home.
Figure 7-7. Key Functions in Free Key Mode
Work Stations
7-13
Keyboard Locked Mode
Keyboard locked mode is initialized for either of the
following conditions:
•
PROGRAMMING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 5251
DISPLAY STATION
Program operation of each display station attached to
System/34 is controlled by:
By pressing any AID request key.
• An input/output block.
• A system command is executed and the command
forces the display station into this mode.
The keyboard locked mode cannot be reset from the
keyboard. Instead, a system command is needed to
reset this mode.
Insert Mode
• A set of commands and orders that must be
assembled by the users program.
• The appropri.ate supervisor call instruction.
Figure 7-8 shows the relationship of the host to the
work stations and how the lOB, commands, and orders
are passed between the two.
Insert mode is initialized by pressing the Del/Ins key.
This mode cannot be initialized if:
• The display station is in keyboard locked mode,
command key mode, system request mode, or
operator-error mode.
Host
SSP or User's
Ma i n Storage
• The cursor is in a bypass or protected field.
• The Field Exit key needs to be pressed.
Insert mode is reset by pressing the Error Reset key, the
Help key, or the Enter / Rec Adv key.
Work Station
. ._ _~ Data Management
(WSDM)
108
Operator-Error Mode
Operator-error mode is initialized by the work station
controller when a rules violation is sensed during
keystroke processing. For example, the operator presses
an alphabetic key (instead of pressing a top row key)
after pressing the Cmd key. A four-digit error code is
displayed on the bottom row of the screen to inform the
operator of the error. This mode can also be initialized
by the system issuing a write error command.
Work Station
Input/Output
Control Handler
(WSIOCH)
Output Data
Stream
(output commands, L-.-_ _. . . _ - - - - '
orders, control
characters, and data)
This mode is reset by pressing the Error Reset key.
Figure 7-8. Relationship of Host to the Work Stations
7-14
(
Display Station Input/Output Block
Each display station operation is specified by an
input/ output block (lOB) located in main storage. If
more than one display station needs an operation to be
performed, the lOBs are placed on a queue and a
supervisor call instruction (see Chapter 3) is issued for
. each lOB. A supervisor call instruction cannot be issued
for an lOB that is on a queue until the preceding lOB is
posted complete; that is, until bit 1 of byte 1 in the lOB
is set on.
The display station lOB is contained in the first 18 bytes
of the terminal unit block. For purposes of this manual,
and as shown in Figure 7-9, only the lOB is described.
For a definition of each bit in the terminal unit block,
see the Data Areas Handbook.
Work Stations
7-15
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
0
IBM
Program
Label
Length
in Bytes
in Decimal
TUBECM
1
Field Description (Note 1)
Event control mask
The following bits must be set up before a supervisor call instruction
is issued.
Hex Meaning
80
40
No skip on general wait.
Data address is real.
On = Task control block address points to real storage.
Off = Task control block address points to the user's task control
block for translated output.
Note: The task control block address is in bytes 16 and 17 of
the lOB.
20
1
TUBCOMPL
1
lOB completion code
Hex
Meaning
80
40
04
Active: Operation is in process and waiting completion.
Complete: Operation has been completed.
Input buffer assigned: The work station inputloutput control
handler has successfully assigned the required input buffer.
Error detected: The requested operation could not be completed
because of an error in the display station. Error status is posted
in bytes 10 through 15 of this lOB.
01
2
TUBFLAG
1
Non liD event.
Flag byte
Hex Meaning
80
20
10
08
Report errors back to user: The system error recovery procedures
are suppressed and the errors are reported to the user.
Automatic input buffer assignment. Successful assignment of an
input buffer is indicated in the completion code (bit 5).
Terminal unit block not allowed off vertical TUB chain: Indicates
that the operation is complete, and the TUB can be pulled off the
verticle TUB chain.
Device is online: This bit must be on before the system can accept
any interrupts from the display stations.
Figure 7-9 (Part 1 of 3). Display Station lOB
(
7-16
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
2
(continued)
TUBFLAG
Length
in Bytes
in Decimal
Field Description (Note')
Hex Meaning
04
02
01
3
TUBCMND
1
Read input command is issued to the terminal unit block.
Read input command is not completed. When the work station
controller finishes the read input operation, this bit is turned off
by the work station input/output control handler, and if the
terminal unit block is posted complete, bit 5 will also be turned
off by the work station input/output control handler.
Data is in control storage.
Command code
Bits 0-4 Work station controller address (11000)
Bit 5
Must be 0
Bits 6-7 Set to indicate the operation
00 = Execute
01 = Invit~ (allow interrupts from work stations)
10 = Quiesce printer
11 = Cancel (used to transfer from invite to execute)
4
TUBCMOD
1
Command modifier: Specifies the operation to be executed.
Hex
Command
A7
Output/invite. This is a combined function of output (hex 27) and
invite (as defined In the command code byte).
Read screen.
Read input fields.
Output (causes the output data stream to be read by System/34).
Save screen.
Save tables .
62
42
27
06
02
5
.TUBINIT@
1
Device address
Bits 0-3 Twinaxial cable address.
Bit 4
Must be O.
Bits 5-7 Work station address. (The address of each work station is set
with toggle switches on each work station.)
6
TUBDATA@
2
Data buffer address: The logrcal address of the data buffer to be used
for execute commands. The data buffer can be in main storage or in
control storage as indicated by bit 7 of byte 2 of this lOB.
Figure 7-9 (Part 2 of 3). Display Station lOB
Work Stations
7-17
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
Length
in Bytes
in Decimal
Field Description (Note 1)
8
TUBCOUNT
A
TUBSENSO
Status byte 0 (Note 2)
B
TUBSENS1
Status byte 1 (Note 2)
C
TUBSENS2
Status byte 2 (Note 2)
D
TUBSENS3
Status byte 3 or attention identification (AID) byte (Note 3)
E
TUBSENS4
Status byte 4 (Note 2)
F
TUBSENS5
Status byte 5 (Note 2)
10
TUBTCB@
2
2
Data buffer length (byte count): The exact length, in bytes, to be sent
to the work station. Length values greater than 4096 cause error completion status.
Task control block address for data buffer address translation registers.
Notes:
1. Unused and reserved bits, or bits not used by the work station input/output control handler are not shown in the
Field Description column.
2. See Display Station Status Bytes and Error Recovery in this chapter for a description of the status bytes.
3. See Figure 7-3 for the hexadecimal representations of the AID byte.
Figure 7-9 (Part 3 of 3). Display Station lOB
(
7-18
Read Commands and Control Commands
The format of the data restored is:
System/34 controls the display stations with a set of
commands that are sent to the work station controller
(see Figure 7-8). The read commands are sent in the
command modifier byte (byte 4 of the lOB), the control
commands are defined by bits in the terminal unit block,
and the output commands are sent in the output data
stream.
Bytes
o and
Description
1
2 and 3
Length of the data (in bytes) sent in
response to the save tables command,
including bytes 0 through 3. When executing
the save tables command, the byte count in
lOB bytes 8 and 9 must be equal to, or
greater than, the number of bytes sent. Use
this value when generating the byte count for
the restore tables command.
4-67
Display station parameters (generated by the
work station controller).
68-579
Format table of 512 bytes for the display
station
The four read commands and two control commands
are described in the following paragraphs; the output
commands are described under Output Commands later
in this chapter. The hexadecimal value of each read
command is given in parentheses after the name of the
command.
Save Tables (Hex 02)
The save tables command lets System/34 save the
control information and field definitions for any display
station. Then, if, needed at a later time, the data can be
restored by the restore tables command.
Characteristics of the AIDs when this command is
executed are:
• Any pending AI D is also saved (except for Sys Req
and Attn) but is not reset when the command is
completed.
• The AID is established again when the data is
restored.
• The AID byte must not be processed twice.
CAUTION
The data received with this command must not be
modified in any way. Failure to follow this rule can
result in unpredictable work station controller operations
when the data is restored.
Hex 0401, which is the format of the restore
tables command; it permits the data to be
restored with no modifications or additions
by the user.
This command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, or is in system request or
hardware-error mode.
The save tables command causes the keyboard to lock
before the command is executed, and all keystrokes are
ignored (including those normally processed when the
keyboard is locked) until a save screen or clear unit
command is executed. The save screen or clear unit
commands are the only commands that should be sent
to a display station after the save tables command is
executed.
Save Screen (Hex 06)
The save screen command lets System/34 save the
data on the current screen. Then, if needed at a later
time, the data can be restored by the restore screen
command. This command must follow a save tables
command directed to the same display station. The
command sequence of save tables followed by save
screen is needed to save all the status (control
information and data) of a display station. This
command sequence does not affect the state of the
display station; that is, the state that the display station
was in before the save tables command was executed.
Work Stations
7-19
CAUTION
The data received with this command must not be
modified in any way. Failure to follow this rule can
result in unpredictable work station controller operations
when the data is restored.
Any nulls characters sensed in the fields are converted
to blank characters. Therefore, the field is filled to its
original length and the field is sent immediately
following the preceding field without any intervening
control information.
The format of the data restored is:
If the field is specified as a signed numeric field, the
last character in the field is never sent to the system. In
addition, if the last character of a signed numeric field is
a minus sign, the zoned portion of the second to last
character in the field is changed to a hex D. If the last
character is not a minus sign, the second to last
character is not changed.
Bytes
o and
Description
1
2 and 3
Hex 0405, which is the format of the restore
screen command; it permits the data to be
restored with no modifications or additions
by the user.
Length of the data (in bytes) sent in
response to the save screen command, but
excluding bytes 0 through 3. When
executing the save screen command, the
byte count in 108 bytes 8 and 9 must be
equal to, or greater than, the number of
bytes sent. Change this value to include
bytes 0 through 3 when generating the byte
count for the restore screen command.
4-1043
Displayed data for 12 rows.
4-2003
Displayed data for 24 rows.
This command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, or is in hardware-error
mode; or if the Save Table command was not issued
before the save screen command was issued.
Note: If an error is sensed while the save screen
command is being executed, the error retry process
must start with the save tables command.
The read input fields command is not valid if the display
station is offline, is not powered on, or is in
hardware-error or operator-error mode. Also, the
command is not valid if the keyboard is not locked, or if
the format table is not loaded.
Note: Any pending AID byte, except for hex F2 (Attn) or
hex FO (Sys Req/ Enter), is reset when this command is
completed.
Read Screen (Hex 62)
The read screen command causes all data on the display
screen to be sent to System/34. The data is sent in the
sequence in which it appears on the display screen; that
is, the first row is sent first, the second row is sent
next, and so on. The data includes all fields (input and
noninput) and all display attributes.
The byte count in 108 bytes 8 and 9 must be equal to,
or greater than, the number of bytes sent. An error is
posted for byte counts that are too small.
The read screen command is not valid if the display
station is offline, is not powered on, or is in
hardware-error or operator-error mode.
Note: Any pending AID byte, except for Attn or Sys
Req/Enter, is reset when this command is completed.
Read Input Fields (Hex 42)
Set Operator Alert Indicators
The read input fields command causes the work station
controller to move the data from all fields specified in
the format table back to System/34. The fields are sent
in the sequence in which they are specified on the
display screen unless the user has selected a different
sequence. A different sequence is selected by using the
start of header order and resequencing field control
words. Both are described in this chapter.
The set-operator-alert-indicators command is one of
the two control commands; it lets the system inform the
operator that attention is needed by:
• Sounding the audible alarm on the display station for
approximately 1 second.
• Turning on the Message Waiting indicator on the
display station.
7-20
(
This command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, or is in hardware-error
mode.
Note: Any pending AID byte is not reset by this
command.
Start of Header (Hex 01): Selects the resequencing
function when data is read from the display screen.
Four data bytes follow this order in the output data
stream. These four bytes are:
Byte
Meaning
Set to hex 03.
Reset Operator Alert Indicators
The reset-operator-alert-indicators command is one of
the two control commands; it lets the system turn off
the Message Waiting indicator on the display station.
The audible alarm, set by the
set-operator-alert-indicators command, is not affected
by this command. Instead, the audible alarm is
automatically reset.
2
Not used.
3
Not used.
4
Set to hex 00 if the displayed data is to be
returned to the system in the same sequence
as it appears on the screen. If set to a value
other than hex 00 the displayed data will be
returned to the system in a sequence
determined by the resequencing field control
words in the format table. The value of this
byte also points to the first field to be
returned by the read input fields command.
This command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, or is in hardware-error
mode.
Note: Any pending AID byte is not reset by this
command.
Display Station Output Data Stream
The output data stream (see Figure 7-10) sent to the
work station controller includes data and control
information. The control information includes two write
control characters, five orders, and seven output
commands as described in the following paragraphs.
The two write control characters are described under
Write Data (Hex 11).
Orders
The following paragraphs describe the five orders and
the associated data that are a part of the write data
command in the output data stream. The hexadecimal
value of each order is given in parentheses after the
name of the order.
Figure 7-10 shows the combination of orders that
follow the write data command byte in the output data
stream.
Either of the following conditions associated with the
start of header order will cause an error:
• The output data stream ends before the number of
bytes needed have been sent.
• The first byte after the order is not hex 03.
Repeat to Address (Hex 02): Causes a character to be
displayed in every position on the display screen starting
in the position specified by the current buffer address to
(and including) the last position specified in this order.
Only one character is displayed if the position specified
in this order is equal to the position specified by the
current buffer address. The current buffer address is
then updated to the value of the last position plus 1.
The last position and the character displayed are
specified in the three bytes that follow this order in the
output data stream. These three bytes are:
Byte
Meaning
Row address.
2
Column address.
3
Character that is displayed.
Work Stations
7-21
Any of the following conditions associated with the
repeat to address order will cause an error:
Any of the following conditions associated with the
insert cursor order will cause an error:
• The output data stream ends before the number of
bytes needed have been sent
• The output data stream ends before the number of
bytes needed have been sent.
• A row address value of 0 or a value greater than 24.
• A row address value of 0 or a value greater than 24.
• A column address value of 0 or a value greater than
• A column address value of 0 or a value greater than
80.
Set Buffer Address (Hex 11): Determines where the
displayed data will start on the display screen as
instructed by the two address bytes that follow this
order in the output data stream. The first address byte
is the row address and the second address byte is the
column address.
When this order is not in the output data stream, the
displayed data starts in row 1, column 1 because the
write data command initializes the buffer address to the
start of the display screen.
80.
Start of Field (Hex 1D): Resets any pending AID bytes
(except Attn or Sys Req / Enter), specifies an input field,
and causes the characteristics of the input field to be
saved in the format table (see Format Table later in this
chapter) as instructed by the information that follows
this order in the output data stream. The sequence of
this information is:
1.
A 2-byte field format word (see Field Format Word
later in this chapter).
2.
Up to two 2-byte field control words which are
optional. (See Field Control Word later in this
chapter.)
3.
A 1-byte display attribute pertaining to the input
field. The bits in the display attribute byte and the
meaning for each bit (when on) are:
Any of the following conditions associated with the set
buffer address order will cause an error:
• The output data stream ends before the number of
bytes needed have been sent.
• A row address value of 0 or a value greater than 24.
Bit
Meaning
0-2
Set to 001
3
Column mark on
4
Blink field
5
Underscore field
6
Select high intensity
7
Select reverse image (black on green) if
this bit is on, or select normal image
(green on black) if this bit is off .
• A column address value of 0 or a value greater than
80.
Insert Cursor (Hex 13): Establishes the home address
and inserts the cursor in a position on the display screen
as instructed by the two address bytes that follow this
order in the output data stream. The first address byte
is the row address and the second address byte is the
column address.
If the keyboard is locked when the write data command
is issued, and if the write data command causes the
. keyboard to unlock, the cursor is moved to the location
specified by this order. If the keyboard does not unlock,
the cursor does not move.
If more than one insert cursor order is in the output data
stream, only the last one is used. The position specified
is saved and it becomes the home address for the Erase
Input/Home function.
Note: If bits 5, 6, and 7 are all on, the input field
is not displayed.
4.
Two length bytes that determine how many
character positions are reserved for this field on
the display screen.
(
7-22
Any of the following conditions associated with the start
of field order will cause an error:
• The output data stream ends before the needed
number of bytes have been sent.
• More than 8 bytes separate the order and the display
attribute.
• The field length is zero.
• The address ·for the end of the field is past the end
of the display screen.
• Input field addresses are not in an increasing order.
This pertains to input fields that were specified by a
preceding write data command. No input field can be
specified if its starting address is less than, or equal
to, the starting address of an input field already
specified.
• Too many input fields have been specified for the
display screen.
The following information should be considered when
using the start of field order:
• The order reserves character positions on the display
screen and these positions are not modified.
• The display attribute needs one byte on the display
screen but this position is not included in the length
bytes. The display attribute is placed at the position
specified in the current buffer address.
• The first character position of an input field is at the
position specified by the address counter plus 1.
After the order is executed, the current buffer
address points to this position.
• An ending display attribute of hex 20 is written to the
display screen after the input field being specified.
Therefore, two display attributes are written for each
input field and they are separated by the number of
character positions indicated in the length bytes.
Work Stations
7-23
Hex 01
Data received via the save tables command
Note-}
Data received via the save screen command
The data returned with the save tables command (or with the save
screen command) is used for the restore tables command (or for the
restore screen command). Therefore, the escape character (hex 04)
and the command byte (hex 01 or hex 05) do not have to be inserted
in the data stream.
Note-
Note
for every
output
command
Up to
78
.VI" of do<,
rn--
N",
LEGEND
Character
A
ESC
FCW
FFW
IC
L L
RA
SBA
SF
SOH
WCC
@
@
Hex
04
13
02
11
10
01
Definition
Display attribute
Escape character
Field control word
Field format word
Insert cursor order
Two length bytes
Repeat to address order
Set buffer address order
Start of field order
Start of header order
Writer control character
Two address bytes
Note: If more output commands are needed in the data stream,
. return to the left side of the chart and continue with the escape
character.
Figure 7-10. Display Station Output Data Stream
Output Commands
When byte 4 of the 108 (command modifier) is equal to
hex 27 or hex A7, the output data stream (containing
the output commands) is moved from main storage to
the work station controller. Then the work station
controller executes the output commands in the order in
which they appear in the data stream. The data stream
can have one or more output commands but cannot
have any of the read commands or control commands
(see Read Commands and Control Commands earlier in
this chapter.)
Restore Tables (Hex 01): Restores the contents of the
format table and the state of the display station by
returning the same data (received via the save tables
command) to the work station controller. The data
restored must be directed to the display station that the
data originated from. After this command is executed,
the clear unit command or the restore screen command
are the only commands that should be sent to the
display station.
This command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, or is in hardware-error or
system request mode.
In the following descriptions of the output commands,
the hexadecimal value of each output command is given
in parentheses after the name of the command.
(
7-24
Restore Screen (Hex 05): Restores the contents of the
display screen by returning the same data (received via
the save screen command) to the work station
controller. The data restored must be directed to the
display station that the data originated from.
The bits in the first write control character and the
meaning for each bit (when on) are:
Bit
Meaning
o
Write null characters to all input fields
(except bypass fields) that have the
modified-data-tag bit set on (bit 4 of the
field format word), lock the keyboard, and
reset any pending AI D byte (except Attn or
Sys Req/Enter).
The restore screen command must follow the restore
tables command in the output data stream, and both
commands must be directed to the same display station.
The command sequence of restore tables followed by
restore screen is needed to save all the status of a
display station. If an error is sensed while executing the
restore screen command, the error retry process must
start with the restore tables command.
This command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, is in hardware-error mode,
or if a restore tables command was not directed to the
same display station before issuing this command.
Reset the modified-data-tag bit in all input
fields (except bypass fields), lock the
keyboard, and reset any pending AID byte
(except Attn or Sys Req / Enter).
2-7
Reserved.
The bits in the second write control character and the
meaning for each bit (when on) are:
Write Data (Hex 11): Writes data to the display screen,
unlocks or locks the keyboard, sets various display
screen modes, and assembles or adds to a format table
(see Format Table later in this chapter). To do all these
functions the command byte (hex 11) is followed by two
write control characters that are followed by orders and
other data as shown in Figure 7-10. See Orders earlier
in this chapter for a description of the orders.
Data bytes are defined as any character following the
write data command in the output data stream if the
character is not a write control character, escape
character, order, or a parameter associated with an
order. Each character is checked to determine if it is an
order or an escape character and if the character is
neither, the character is written to the display screen.
The data written to the display screen includes all data
bytes and all display attributes. The data is written to
the display screen at the present value of the address
counter, and the address counter is increased by a value
of 1 for every byte written.
The write control characters must immediately follow
each write data command in the output data stream to
select specific operations for the display stations to
perform. T~e operations selected in the first write
control character are performed as soon as the work
station controller receives this character. The operations
selected in the second write control character are not
performed until all information associated with the write
data command is processed.
Bit
Meaning
o
Reserved.
Reserved.
2
Reset blinking cursor.
3
Set blinking cursor.
Note: If bits 2 and 3 are both on, set the
blinking cursor.
4
Unlock keyboard and reset any pending AID
byte (except Attn or Sys Req/Enter).
5
Sound alarm.
6
Set Message Waiting indicator off.
7
Set Message Waiting indicator on.
Note: If bits 6 and 7 are both on, set the
Message Waiting indicator on.
The end of the data stream for a write data command is
determined in one of two ways:
• By sensing another escape character (hex 04) which
would indicate the start of a new command.
• By a byte count in the lOB (bytes 8 and 9) reaching a
value of O.
Work Stations
7-25
The write data command is not valid if the display
station is offline, is not powered on, is in
hardware-error mode, or is in operator-error mode.
Write Error (Hex 21): Forces the display station into
operator-error mode, or it lets the operator reset
operator-error mode. For example, if the display station
is in operator-error mode and the Help key has been
pressed, the write error command must be issued by the
system to let the operator reset operator-error mode.
When a display station receives this command, the
following occurs:
• Display station is forced into operator-error mode
(command key mode, insert mode, and system
request mode are reset).
• Keyboard is locked.
5.
Display attribute selected by the user. To be
consistent with operator-error mode, this attribute
should be hex 2A to select high intensity and blink
field. However, if the Help key is pressed when
the display station is in operator-error mode, the
work station controller forces an attribute of hex
22 (high intensity and no blinking) into the first
position of the last line.
6.
Up to 78 data bytes. The total number of data
bytes (including the 2 display attributes) cannot be
more than 80.
7.
Display attribute selected by the user. To be
consistent with operator-error mode, this attribute
should be hex 27 to select nondisplay.
Note: No checks are made to verify the presence of the
two display attributes. For a description of the display
attributes, see Start of Field (Hex 10) earlier in this
chapter.
• Cursor is made to blink.
• The last line of the display screen is saved, but is not
changed.
The write error command is not valid if the display
station is offline, is not powered on, is in
hardware-error mode, or if the Help key is not pressed
after the display station is in operator-error mode.
• The cursor is moved if an insert cursor order follows
the write error command in the output data stream.
• The data following the write error command in the
output data stream is displayed on the last row of the
display screen.
If the command byte (hex 21) is followed in the output
data stream by an insert cursor order and two address
bytes (all three are optional), the format of this
command is:
1.
Escape character (hex 04).
2.
Command byte (hex 21).
3.
Insert cursor order (hex 13); this order and the two
address bytes described in number 4 are optional.
If the insert cursor order immediately follows the
command byte, the first four data bytes in number
6 generate the error code. The error code is sent
to the host if the Help key is pressed. If the insert
cursor order does not immediately follow the
command byte, the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh
data bytes following the last insert cursor order
generate the error code.
4.
7-26
Two address bytes (row address followed by
column address) that determine where the cursor
is moved to.
Roll (Hex 23): Causes the message on the display
screen to roll up or roll down as determined by the 3
parameter bytes that follow the command byte (hex 23)
in the data stream. The 3 parameter bytes are:
Bits
Meaning
o
If on, roll down.
If off, roll up.
All 80 character positions
of each line are rolled, including
the display attribute bytes.
1 and 2
00
3-7
Number of lines rolled (0 = no roll).
2
0-7
Number specifying the top line of
the information rolled. This number
cannot be o.
3
0-7
Number specifying the bottom line
of the information rolled. This
number must be greater than the
number specified in byte 2 for
the top line
Byte
(
The roll command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, is in hardware-error mode,
or is in operator-error mode.
Any of the following conditions will cause an error:
The clear unit command should be executed as the first
command of any new job to ensure that any preceding
data is cleared from the display screen and also from
the format tables. This command is not valid if the
display station is offline, is not powered on, or is in
hardware-error mode.
• There are less than 3 bytes in the data stream after
the command byte (hex 23).
Clear Format Table (Hex 50): Performs the same
• The number specifying the top line of the roll is O.
• The number specifying the bottom line is greater than
24, or it is less than, or equal to, the number
specifying the top line.
• The roll magnitude is greater than the value obtained
by subtracting the top line number from the bottom
line number.
functions as the clear unit command (as described in the
preceding paragraph) but does not (1) clear the
information on the display screen, (2) clear
operator-error mode, or (3) clear system request mode.
This command is not valid if the display station is
offline, is not powered on, or is in hardware-error or
operator-error mode.
Format Table
The format table is not affected by this command. It is
the user's responsibility to be sure that the display
corresponds to the format table after the roll is
completed.
Note: Lines rolled out of the roll area are lost, and lines
vacated by the roll are not modified.
Clear Unit (Hex 40): Performs the following functions
for the addressed display station:
• Clears the information on the display screen and the
format table.
The format table contains an entry for each input field
specified on the display screen. All fields specified in
the format table are returned to the system when a read
input fields command is issued. Input fields can be
coded so that they cannot be modified from the
keyboard.
Each entry in the format table must include a 2-byte
field address word and a 2-byte field format word.
Another word, a 2-byte field control word, is optional;
the entry can have up to two field control words.
Therefore, each entry in the format table is at least 4
bytes long but can be as many as 6 or 8 bytes long.
The format table is less than, or equal to, 512 bytes.
• Clears any pending AID byte.
• Locks the keyboard.
• Moves the cursor to row 1, column 2.
• Sets the home address to row 1, column 1.
To determine the number of input fields permitted on
the display screen, use this calculation: 4 (total number
of input fields) plus 2 (number of input fields needing
resequencing field control words) plus 2 (number of
input fields needing modulus 10/11 check digit
verification). The total number must be less than 512
bytes.
• Sets the initial resequence field number to O.
• Resets the system request, command key,
operator-error, and insert mode.
• Resets the master modified data tag bit.
• Writes a display attribute of hex 20 to row 1, column
Field Address Word
A 2-byte field address word is generated by the work
station controller for each input field. This word
determines the starting address of the input field on the
display screen.
1.
Work Stations
7-27
Field Format Word
A 2-byte field format word is generated by the user's
program and is sent to the work station controller via
the output data stream. This word determines the
characteristics of the input field and is shown in Figure
7-11.
See Input Fields later in this chapter for a description of
the different types of input fields.
If the input fields are resequenced, the first field sent to
the system is identified with the start of header order,
and the last field must have bits 8 through 15 of the
field control word set to hex FF. The bits of the
resequencing field control word are as follows:
Bits
o and
Meaning
1
Set to 10.
2 and 3
Set to 00.
Field Control Word
4-7
Set to 0000.
A 2-byte field control word is not always needed in the
format table entry when describing the input fields, but
any format table entry can have as many as two of
these words. If used, the field control words are
generated by the user's program and sent to the work
station controller via the output data stream.
8-15
Indicates the next field returned to the
system. For example, assume that 10
input fields are specified on the display
screen and they are sequentially
numbered 1 through 10. However, they
are to be resequenced in the order 5, 6,
2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 1, 7, and 8 when the read
input fields command is issued. In this
case:
Two types of field control words are used; the
resequencing type and the check-digit type. When both
types are used, the resequencing type must be the first
one in the data stream.
Resequencing Field Control Word: Identifies the
sequence in which the input fields are sent to the
system when a read input fields command is issued.
When the input fields are not resequenced, they are
sent to the system in the sequence in which they appear
on the display screen.
• The fourth byte of the start of header
order would contain hex 05 (indicating
the first field returned to the system).
• Input fields 2, 3, 5, 7, and 9 do not
need resequencing field control words
because the next sequential fields are
returned next; that is, 3 follows 2, 6
follows 5, etc.
• Input fields 1, 4, 6, 8, and 10 need a
resequencing field word as follows:
Field
4
6
8
10
Field control word in hex
8007 (field 7 follows field 1)
8009 (field 9 follows field 4)
8002 (field 2 follows field 6)
80FF (field 8 is the last input
field in this example)
8001 (field 1 follows field 10)
(
7-28
Bits
Input Field Attribute and Description
0-1
Set to 01 to indicate a field format word.
2
Bypass bit
0= Not a bypass field.
1 = A bypass field: The operator cannot key data into this area of the display screen, and the cursor
is positioned in the first position of the next input field that isn't a bypass field.
3
Dup key enabled
·0 = Dup key cannot be used in this field.
1 = Dup key can be used in this field.
4
Modified data tag (MDT) bit
0= This field has not been modified.
1 = This field has been modified.
5-7
Field description
000 = Alphameric: All characters allowed.
001 = Alphabetic only: Allows uppercase and lowercase letters, comma, period, hyphen, blank,
and Dup keys.
011 = Numeric only: Allows 0-9, comma, period, +, ., blank, and Dup keys.
100 = Katakana (Japan only).
111 = Signed numeric: Allows 0-9 and Dup keys.
Note: All remaining bit configurations are reserved.
8
Automatic enter
a = No automatic enter.
1 = Automatic enter: System assumes that the Enter/Rec Adv key was pressed after the cursor
left the input field via the Field Exit key, Field+ key, Field· key, or by entering the rightmost
character into the field.
9
Field Exit key needed
a = Cursor leaves field when rightmost character is entered.
1 = Cursor does not leave field when rightmost character is entered.
10
Monocase mode
0= Display lowercase a through z.
1 = Convert lowercase a through z to uppercase,
Figure 7-11 (Part 1 of 2). Field Format Word
Work Stations
7-29
Bits
Input Field Attribute and Description
11
Reserved
12
Mandatory enter
0= Not a mandatory enter field.
1 = Is a mandatory enter field; at least 1 character must be entered.
13-15
Adjust or fill option
000 = No adjust specified.
101 = Right adjust and 0 fill: The rightmost character entered in this field is shifted to the right
boundary of the field. The positions to the left of the characters entered are filled with zeros.
110 = Right adjust and blank fill: The rightmost character entered in this field is shifted to the right
boundary of the field. The positions to the left of the characters entered are filled with blanks.
111 = Mandatory fill: Requires that if one position of the field is filled, then all positions must
be filled. The Dup key satisfies this requirement and causes an exit to the next input field.
Note: All remaining bit configurations are reserved.
Figure 7-11 (Part 2 of 2). Field Format Word
Check-Digit Field Control Word: Specifies that an input
·field is to be checked for its validity using modulus 10
or modulus 11 checking. This word is assembled as
follows:
Bits
o and
Meaning
1
10.
2 and 3
11.
4-7
0001.
8-10
Self check operation where bits 8 through
10 are set to 010 for modulus 11
checking, or set to 101 for modulus 10
checking.
11-15
00000.
• The check digit is the rightmost character in the field.
• Only the four low-order bits of each character are
used for the check digit.
• The number to use in calculating the check digit for
non-numeric characters is determined by the EBCDIC
representation for the character.
A is equal to C1 ; the number to use is 1
R is equal to D9; the number to use is 9.
% is equal to 6C; the number to use is O. The
number to use is 0 when the four low-order bits
are either A, B, C, D, E, or F.
• If an input field does not check correctly, an error
code of 0015 is displayed, and the cursor is moved
to the first position of the field in error.
Figure 7-12 shows the calculations of the check digit
used for modulus 10 and modulus 11 checking.
The following rules apply when input fields are checked:
• Signed-numeric, numeric only, alphabetic only, and
alphanumeric fields can be specified for checking.
• Field lengths are limited to 32 character positions.
Signed-numeric fields can be 33 positions, but the
signed position is not checked.
7-30
(
Check Digit
Units Position
Field Positions (32 maximum)
I1
I 2 I 1 I>
Modulus 10 Multiplier
,) I
(See Note 1.)
i
I 2 I 71~,
Modulus 11 Multiplier
!I
,
1 21)
(See Note 2.)
JI
II
25
I
26
I
27
I
28
I
29
31
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Modulus 11 (Multiply each number in
corresponding multiplier in
fJ .)
I
I
I
2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 1
I
I
I
6
2
5
3
6
lEI
X
I
I
I
I3
12
2
10
3
1210
[IlO
I
I
I
I
I
10
I
I
I
II by the
I 1 10
I
1 3
II by the
I
I
I
D.)
I,
I
I
,
Modulus 10 (Multiply each number in
corresponding multiplier in
32
I
I
I
Field to be checked contains 362536.
I 30 I
I
21
36
10
20
9
12111
[2]0
For modulus 10:
III (3 + 1 + 2 + 2 + 1 + 0 + 3 + 1 + 2 = 15).
1.
Add the digits in
2.
Subtract the sum from the next higher number ending in O. (20 - 15 = 5)
3.
In this example, the check digit is 5.
If the sum ends in 0, the check digit is O.
m
For modulus 11:
II (21 + 36 + 10 + 20 + 9 + 12 = 108),
1.
Add the numbers in
2.
Divide the sum by 11 and record the remainder. If the remainder is 1, the number being checked cannot be used.
108/11 = 9 (with a remainder of 9)
3.
Subtract the remainder from 11 (11 - 9
4.
In this example, the check digit is 2.0
= 2).
Notes:
1. The modulus 10 multipliers are 2 and 1 for every other position in the field.
2. The modulus 11 multipliers are 7, 6,5,4,3, and 2 for positions 2 through 7,8 through 13,14 through 19,20 through
25, and 26 through 31. The multiplier for position 1 is 2.
Figure 7·12. Calculation of Modulus 10/Modulus 11 Check Digit
Work Stations
7·31
Input Fields
The user must specify the input fields that are modified
from the keyboard and then sent from the display
stations to an application or utility program. Bits 5
through 7 of the field format word specify the type of
input field, and the remaining bits of the field format
word specify the characteristics of the input field.
Types of Input Fields
There are five types of input fields as described in the
following paragraphs. The decode of bits 5 through 7
of the field format word determine the type of input
field; the decode of these bits is given in parentheses
after the name of the input field.
Alphameric (000): Lets the operator enter any
lowercase or uppercase character (alphabetic, numeric,
or special) 'from the keyboard. The shift keys override
the lowercase letters (and numbers) and force uppercase
letters (and special characters).
Alphabetic Only (001): Lets the operator enter any
lowercase or uppercase letter and blank, comma, period,
hyphen, or dup (if the dup allowed bit is on). An error
occurs if the operator tries to enter any other character.
Numeric Only (011): Lets the operator enter any
number (0-9) and blank, plus, minus, comma, period, or
dup (if the dup allowed bit is on). An error occurs if the
operator tries to enter any other character.
Field Exit key is used to exit the field, a blank is placed
in the rightmost field position. The rightmost field
position is not returned when a read input field
command is issued.
Characteristics of Input Fields
Bits 2 through 4 and 8 through 15 of the field format
word specify the characteristics of the input fields. Bit 4
is the modified data tag bit, bit 10 is the uppercase bit,
and bit 11 is reserved. The remaining bits are described
in the following paragraphs and the bit numbers are
given in parentheses after the name of the input field
characteristic.
Bypass (Bit 2): Prevents the operator from entering
data into a specified input field. Bypass also causes the
cursor to move to the first position of the next
nonbypass input field.
Note: Bypass specified input fields are returned to the
system when a Read Input Fields command is issued.
Dup Allowed (Bit 3): Allows the Dup key function in
this field.
Automatic Enter (Bit 8): Causes an enter AID to be
sent to the host when the cursor is in the input field
and:
• the Field Exit or Field+ key is pressed.
• the Field- key is pressed in a signed numeric field.
Katakana (100): This type of input field is used only in
Japan. If Katakana is specified for a display station that
does not support Katakana, the input field type defaults
to alphameric.
Signed Numeric (111): Lets the operator enter any
number (0-9) and dup (if the dup allowed bit is on). An
error occurs if the operator tries to enter any other
character.
Signed numeric fields are always right-adjusted and the
rightmost field position is always reserved for the sign
(minus for negative and blank for positive). Therefore,
the maximum number of characters that can be entered
is 1 less than the field length.
If the Field- key is used to exit the field, a minus sign is
placed in the rightmost field position. If the Field+ or·
7-32
• the Dup key is pressed and the dup allowed bit is on.
• a character is entered into the low-order character
position of the input field and field exit control is not
enabled.
Field Exit Control (Bit 9): The operator must press a
nondata type key before the cursor will leave the input
field.
Mandatory Enter (Bit 12): The modified data tag bit
associated with the input field must be set on before
the information on the display screen can be returned to
the system This is normally accomplished by entering at
least one data character into the field from the
keyboard.
(
When any automatic enter function is activated, all fields
on the display screen are checked to see if they are
specified as mandatory enter fields. If any specified
mandatory enter field does not have its modified data
tag bit set on, the automatic enter function is not
executed. Instead, the cursor is positioned in the first
position of the first mandatory enter field that does not
have its modified data tag bit set on, and a four-digit
error code of 0007 is displayed.
Right-Adjust (Bits 13-15): Causes the data entered in
this field to shift to the right until the rightmost
character entered is at the right boundary of the field.
The Field Exit, Field+, or Field- (in a signed numeric
field only) keys, when pressed, cause the data to shift.
All character positions to the left of the characters
entered are filled with O's (bits 13-15 are set to 101
respectively) or with blank characters (bits 13-15 are set
to 110 respectively).
When the cursor is in the first position of a specified
mandatory enter field, the Field Exit, Field+, and Fieldkeys will not cause the cursor to move until at least one
character has been entered. A four-digit error code of
0021 is displayed if any of these keys are pressed when
the cursor is in the first position of the field.
Other rules that apply to an input field that is specified
as a right-adjust field are:
Mandatory Fill (Bits 13-15): If one position of the input
field is filled, then all positions must be filled. The Dup
key satisfies this condition and causes the cursor to
move to the first position of the next input field. Bits
13-15 of the field format word are set to 111 for a
mandatory fill field.
• Signed numeric fields are always blank filled and
right-adjusted unless otherwise specified.
• If no characters are entered in this field after the
cursor is moved to this field, the Enter / Rec Adv key
can be pressed.
• If any AID request key is pressed after some
characters have been entered and the cursor is still in
this field, a four-digit error code of 0020 is displayed.
Other rules that apply when the cursor is in a mandatory
fill field are:
DISPLAY STATION STATUS BYTES AND ERROR
RECOVERY
• If no characters have been entered in this field, the
cursor can be moved from this field by pressing the
Field Advance, Field Backspace, Field Exit, Field+,
Field-, Erase Input/Home, any of the cursor motion
keys, or any AI D generating key that locks the
keyboard.
When an error is sensed during a display station
operation, bytes 10-15 of the input/output block (lOB)
are posted with status indicating the cause of the error.
Byte 13 of the input/output block is the AI D byte (see
Figure 7-3). If the AID byte is hex 04, a byte count
error or an address translation error was sensed.
However, if the AID byte is hex FF. the status
information is posted in lOB bytes 10,11, 12. 14, and
15. (lOB bytes 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15 are equal to
status bytes 0 through 4. respectively.)
Note: The Field Exit, Field+, and Field- keys will
cause the cursor to move only from the first position
of a mandatory fill input field. If the Field- key is
pressed when the cursor is in the first position of a
mandatory fill input field (but the field is not a signed
numeric field), a four-digit error code of 0016 is
displayed.
• If some characters have been entered in this field and
the field contains null characters, the cursor motion
keys can be used unless they would cause the cursor
to leave this field. A four-digit user code of 0014 is
displayed if the cursor motion keys cause the cursor
to leave this field.
The status posted in bytes 10 and 11 of the lOB specify
the error conditions associated with the interface
between the display station and the work station
controller. The status posted in bytes 12. 14, and 15 of
the lOB specify the error conditions associated only with
the display stations.
Figure 7-13 describes the error conditions, gives the
lOB bit definitions for each status byte, gives the priority
in which the bits are tested, and gives a message
number for each error condition. The message number
is a reference to the Displayed Messages Guide, which
contains the error recovery procedures needed for each
of the error conditions.
Work Stations
7-33
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
0
0
7
lOB
Byte 14
(in hex)
Bit Name
Bit Description (See Note)
Data stream
reject
Invalid data was sensed in the output data
stream while executing an output command.
After this error occurs:
1.
The processing of data ends immediately.
Therefore, the states of the display screen
and the format table are not predictable.
2.
The error must be corrected before
try ing the same operation that caused
the error.
3.
A clear unit command should be executed
to restore the display screen and format
table to a known state.
4.
Byte 14 of the lOB contains a code that
gives the reason for the error.
Message
Number
(See Note)
The following conditions cause this error:
01
•
Premature termination of data stream: The
byte count in the work station control
field contains a number that causes the
output data stream to end too soon.
SYS-7501
(SYS-6501)
02
•
Invalid address: An invalid address
follows a set buffer address, repeat to
address, or insert cursor order.
SYS-7502
03
•
Address is less than the current display
address: The address specified in a
repeat to address order is valid, but it
is less than the current value in the display
address register.
SYS-7503
04
•
Invalid output data stream: Either an
escape character (hex 04) is missing, or
the command byte is not valid. Valid
command bytes include hex 01, 05, 11,
21, 23,40, and '50.
SYS-7504
05
•
Invalid field length: The length bytes
following the start of field order are O.
SYS-7505
Figure 7-13 (Part 1 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
(
7-34
Status
Byte
0
Bit
0
(continued)
Test
Priority
Bit Description (See Note)
Message
Number
(See Note)
•
Invalid field starting address: An attempt
was made to define an input field with a
starting address that is less than, or equal
to, the starting address of an input field
already defined in the format table. The
error is sensed when processing a start of.
field order.
SYS-7506
07
•
Incomplete or invalid data on a restore
command: Either a restore command was
sent to the wrong display station, or there
was not enough information following the
command (even if the command was sent
to the correct display station).
SYS·7507
08
•
Input field too large: An attempt was made
to define an input field that extends past
the end of the display screen area. The error
is sensed when processing a start of field
order.
SYS-7508
09
•
Format table overflow: Too many input
field are defined in the format table.
SYS·7509
OA
•
Display overrun: An attempt was made to
write data past the end of the display screen
area. This error is sensed when processing
a write data command, or a write error
command.
SYS-7510
OB
•
Inva Iid start of header parameter: The
parameter byte following the start of header
order is not hex 03.
SYS-7511
OC
•
Invalid roll parameter: One of the three
parameter bytes following the roll command
is not valid.
SYS-7512
00
•
Too many field control words defined: Too
many field control words are defined after
a start of field order, or the work station controller sensed an invalid parameter byte
following a start of field order (the first three
bits of the byte are set to 000).
SYS-7513
lOB
Byte 14
(in hex)
06
Bit Name
Data stream
reject
.
Figure 7-13 (Part 2 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
Work Stations
7-35
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
0
1
6
lOB
Byte 14
{in hex}
Bit Name
Bit Description {See Note}
Work station
control field
error
Invalid data was sensed in the work station
control field. After this error occurs:
1.
The error must be corrected before
trying the same operation that caused
the error.
2.
Byte 14 of the lOB contains a code
that gives the reason for the error.
Message
Number
{See Note}
If this error occurs, any data sent to the host
should not be used.
The following conditions cause this error:
01
•
Invalid command modifier (lOB byte 4).
SYS-7533
(SYS-6533)
02
•
Invalid byte count (lOB bytes 8 and 9):
The byte count is 0 for a display station,
or it is more than 256 for a printer.
SYS-7534
(SYS-6534)
03
•
Invalid unit address (lOB byte 5).
SYS-7535
(SYS-6535)
Note: The display screen and the format
table are not changed by the above three
errors, and,no data is sent to (or received
from) the display station.
04
•
Incorrect byte count (lOB bytes 8 and 9):
The byte count is not equal to the byte
count associated with the following
commands:
- For the read screen, save screen, and save
tables commands, the byte count is too
small to permit the transfer of all data.
- For the read input fields command, the
byte count is either too small to permit
the transfer of all data, or the byte count
is not equal to 0 after all data has been
tra nsferred.
SYS-7536
Figure 7·13 (Part 3 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
(
7-36
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
0
2
5
lOB
Byte 14
(in hex)
Message
Number
(See Note)
Bit Name
Bit Description (See Note)
Resources
temporarily
not available
A requested operation cannot be executed at
this time. The operation can be tried again
when the condition causing the error is
cleared.
The following conditions cause this error:
02
•
Work station is not operational
SYS-7566
(SYS-6566)
03
•
Work station is offline
SYS-7567
(SYS-6567)
05
•
Display station error state: The display
station is in operator-error mode'or
system request mode, and a command
cannot be executed. In operator-error
mode, the only valid commands are save
tables, save screen, restore tables, restore
screen, write error (in response to the
Help key), set-operator-alert-indicators,
and reset-operator-alert-ind icators. In
system request mode, the only commands
that are rejected are save tables, save
screen, restore tables, and restore screen.
None
Note: After this error occurs (and has been
cleared), an AID byteof hex FA is generated. No other commands should be issued
until the host receives the AID byte.
06
•
Read input fields command is rejected
because the keyboard is not locked.
SYS-7570
07
•
Work station is not powered on: A
command was sent to a work station
that is not powered on (and mode set).
SYS-7571
(SYS-6571 )
Figure 7-13 (Part 4 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
Work Stations
7·37
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
0
lOB
Byte 14
(in hex)
09
2
(continued)
Bit Name
Resources
temporarily
not available
Bit Description (See Note)
•
Invalid save/restore command sequence:
The command following a save tables or
save screen command is not valid. Valid
commands following:
- A save tables command are save screen,
set- (or reset-) operator-alert-indicators,
clear unit, or another save tables
command.
- A restore tables command are restore
screen, set- (or reset-) operator-alertindicators, clear unit, or another restore
tables command.
Message
Number
(See Note)
SYS-7573
Note: A save tables command and a restore
tables command can be retried inimediately,
but a save screen command and a restore
screen command can not be retried unless
preceded by a save tables or save screen
command, respectively.
0
3
3
Work station
controller
DBO/DBI
parity check
A hardware error was sensed by the work
station input/output control handler.
None
0
4
4
Operation
check
A hardware error was sensed by the work
station controller; operation of the work
station controller ends until this error is
corrected.
None
The following conditions cause this error:
01
•
The SERDES failed; System/34 cannot
communicate with the display stations.
02
•
•
Cycle steal time-out occurred.
05
0
5
1
Work station
controller
storage
parity check
Work station controller interrupts are not
occurring. Therefore, keystrokes are not
operational.
Even parity was sensed on the controller
storage output.
None
Figure 7-13 (Part 5 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
(
7-38
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
0
7
1
0
lOB
Byte 14
(in hex)
Message
Number
(See Note)
Bit Name
Bit Description (See Note)
2
Work station
controller
long time-out
check
Either a work station controller interrupt failed,
or the work station controller microcode is in
a loop_
17
Screen format
error
An input field is not correctly defined; the
error is most likely in the output data stream.
Before operations can continue, the error must
be corrected.
None
The following conditions cause this error:
01
•
An input field length error was sensed during
a read input fields operation, or during
keyboard entry into this field.
- Field length was O.
- Field had no ending screer) attribute.
- Signed numeric field was 1 byte long.
- Field read was not the same length as the
field defined.
SYS-7601
02
•
Resequence error in the format table during
a read input fields operation.
- Resequence number is O.
- Resequence number is greater than the
number of fields defined on the display
screen.
SYS-7602
03
•
Check digit field was not valid during
keystroke processing; the field was more
than 32 characters long.
SYS-7603
1
1
9
No response
time-out
Work station is no longer communicating
with the work station controller. The work
station is forced into hardware-error mode.
SYS-7300
(SYS-6300)
1
2
8
Transmit
activity
check
Work station controller attempted to
communicate with a work station, but one
of the following occurred:
SYS-7301
(SYS-6301)
•
•
Communication was not established.
Communication was established but with
the wrong work station, or with more than
one work station. The work station is
forced into hardware-error mode.
Figure 7-13 (Part 6 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
Work Stations
7-39
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
1
3
1
lOB
Byte 14
(in hex)
Message
Number
(See Note)
Bit Name
Bit Description (See Note)
10
Activate
command
failure
The work station did not respond to an
activate command, or the work station
controller missed the response from the
work station. The work station is forced
into hardware-error mode.
SYS-7309
(SYS-6309)
4
11
Receive parity
check
Data received by the work station controller
from the work station was not valid. The
work station is forced into hardware-error
mode.
SYS-7303
(SYS-6303)
1
5
13
Receive length
check
Work station controller received the wrong
number of bytes from the work station. The
work station is forced into hardware-error
mode.
SYS-7306
(SYS-6306)
1
7
15
Even/odd
response
time-out
The work station did not switch its poll
response level in 450 milliseconds. The work
station is forced into hardware-error mode.
SYS-7390
(SYS-6390)
2
0
12
Device busy
time-out
Work station did not execute a requested
operation in the time allowed. The work
station is forced into hardware-error mode.
SYS-7391
(SYS-6391 )
2
1
16
Line parity
check
Work station was not able to receive data
from the work station controller. The work
station is forced into hardware-error mode.
SYS-7304
(SYS-6304)
2
4-6
14
Exception
status
Bits 4-6 are encoded as follows:
000 = No exception status
001 = Null or attribute error for display
station, or activate lost/discarded
without a parity check for printer
010= Invalid activate
011 = Reserved
100 = Invalid command or device address
101 = Input queue or storage overrun
110= Invalid register value for display
station,.or reserved for printer
111 = Power on transition
None
SYS-7323
(SYS-6323)
SYS-7324
(SYS-6324)
SYS-7325
(SYS-6325)
SYS-7320
(SYS-6320)
SYS-7322
(SYS-6322)
SYS-7321
(SYS-6321 )
SYS-7308
(SYS-6308)
Figure 7-13 (Part 7 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
(
7-40
Message
Number
(See Note)
lOB
Status
Byte
Bit
Test
Priority
3
0-7
18
4
0-7
18
Byte 14
(in hex)
Bit Name
Bit Description (See Note)
Status code 1
This byte contains hex 00 or one of the
following:
Status code 2
None
•
An error code (see bytes 0 and 1 in this
chart).
•
An invalid scan code if status byte 4 is
equal to hex 2X.
•
The high·order two digits of the operatorerror code if the AID code in lOB byte 13
is equal to hex FB (Help key in operatorerror mode).
This byte contains hex 00 or one of the
following:
None
•
Hex 28 if an invalid scan code is reported
and the master modified data tag bit (bit
4 of this byte) is on.
•
Hex 20 if an inval id scan code is reported
and the master modified data tag bit is off.
•
The low-order two digits of the oper.atorerror code if the A ID byte in lOB byte 13
is equal to hex FB (Help key from operatorerror mode).
•
Hex 08 if the master modified data bit'
is on.
Note: In the Bit Description column, the words work station refer to both display stations and printers. In the
Message Number column, message numbers SYS-75XX are for the display stations and message numbers SYS-65XX
are for the printers. The message numbers for the printer appear in this column only when the bit being described
is common for both devices (display stations and printer).
Figure 7-13 (Part 8 of 8). Display Station Status Bytes
Work Stations
7-41
(
7-42
Chapter 8. Diskette
The diskette is used for two primary system functions:
• Storing data on the diskette to keep it for future use,
then loading it back into the system when needed for
ajob
The diskette drive turns the diskette at 360 ± 2.5 %
revolutions per minute. The diskette 1 drive can read or
write 31,250 bytes per second. The diskette 20 drive
can read or write either 31,250 bytes per second in
frequency modulation mode or 62,500 bytes per second
in modified frequency modulation mode.
• Moving data, using the diskette for basic data
exchange
DISKElTE SURFACE
The System/34 can have either a diskette 1 drive or a
diskette 20 drive installed inside the 5340 system unit.
The diskette 1 drive has one data head on one side of
the diskette, for reading or writing. The diskette 1 drive
can read from or write on only one side of a diskette in
only frequency modulation recording mode. The diskette
20 drive has one data head on each side of the
diskette, for reading or writing. The diskette 20 drive
can read from or write on both sides of a diskette in
either frequency modulation mode or modified frequency
modulation mode .
./
/'
. . . . ...:::::-.=-- - . . . . . .........
Rotation
"
"-
//
/
The diskette surface is divided into cylinders. Each
diskette surface contains 77 cylinders; cylinder 00 is the
outside cylinder and cylinder 76 is the inside cylinder as·
shown in Figure 8-1.
~_ _
/
One Sector
Cylinder 00
/
I
Cylinder 76
I
\
\
I
I
g
\
\
/
\
/
~
\
"-
0.;>
~~
.........
---- ---- - . - - ~ ...-./
""
07 26
25
/
/
//
Figure 8-1. 26-Sector Diskette
Diskette
8·'
Of the 77 cylinders, only 75 are normally used. Cylinder
00 is the index cylinder that contains the volume label
and data set header labels; cylinders 1-74, the primary
cylinders, store data records. Cylinders 75 and 76 are
available for data storage in the event that one or two
of the primary cylinders (1-74) becomes damaged.
If a damaged track is found during disk initialization,
hexadecimal FF is written in the track sector
identification fields. During a read operation, if an
identification field of hexadecimal FF is read, the control
storage program issues a seek to the next track and
executes another read operation.
SECTOR FORMAT
Each sector has a sector identification field, and has
either a data record field or a control record field, as
shown in Figure 8-2.
Therefore, because the diskette is formatted into
cylinders and sectors, each record on the diskette has
its own record address. This address is recorded at the
physical location of the record on the diskette. Diskettes
that contain record addresses are known as initialized
diskettes.
Cylinder 00 on a diskette 1, and cylinder 00 head 0 on a
diskette 2, always have 26 sectors each having 128
bytes written in frequency modulation mode. Cylinder
00, head 1 on a diskette 20 always has 26 sectors,
each having 256 bytes written in modified frequency
modulation mode. Each cylinder has one track on a
diskette 1, and two tracks on a diskette 20.
DISKElTE INITIALIZATION
Diskettes are initialized in the Basic Data Exchange
Format, as described in the IBM Diskette General
Information Manual, GA21-9182.
For cylinders 1,,74, each track is divided into either 8 or
26 sectors. In frequency modulation mode the 8 sectors
each have 512-byte records and the 26 sectors each
have 128-byte records. In modified frequency
modulation mode the 8 sectors each have 1024-byte
records and the 26 sectors each have 256- byte records.
Sync
Gap1
AM1
.... ". ".
~
",'"
".
-
10
..... .........
Sector Identification
Sync
Gap2
CRC
.... ................
AM?
1\ eRe I
Data Record ,
or
Control Record
Gap1
..........
"--
1
Cylinder
Address
2
Head
Address
3
Record
Address
4
Record
Length
Indicator
Figure 8·2 (Part 1 of 2). Sector Format
(
8·2
Field
Description
Field
Description
Gap 1
The gap between this record and the next record.
It is variable length.
AM2
SYNC
A 6-byte field for FM mode or 12-byte field for MFM
mode; all O's;' synchronizes the hardware circuits prior
to reading the information from the diskette.
A 1-byte field for FM mode or 4-byte field for
MFM mode. For FM mode the field contains
either a hex FB or hex F8. Hex FB indicates
the information following is a data field. Hex
F8 indicates the information following is a
control field.
AM1
For FM mode a 1-byte identifier field address
mark identifies the ID data and contains hex FE.
For MFM mode a 4-byte identifier field address
mark identifies the ID data and contains hex
A1A1A1 FE.
For MFM mode the field contains either a hex
A1A1A1FBorA1A1A1F8. HexA1A1A1FB
indicates the information following is a data
field. Hex A 1AlA 1 F8 indicates the information following is a control field.
ID
A 4-byte sector identification (address) in the
format CHRN, where:
C
= 1-byte binary cylinder address.
=
=
The length of this field is specified by the
record length indicator (N) contained in the
sector I D field.
Valid
addresses are:
Decimal
Hex
Data
or
Control
00-76
00-4C
The contents of the control field are described
in the IBM Diskette General Information
Manual, GA21-9182.
H = 1-byte binary head address. The valid
address is X'OO' or X'Ol'.
R = 1-byte binary record address. Valid
addresses are decimal 01-26 or 01-08,
depending on the number of sectors per
cylinder on this diskette.
N = 1-byte record length indicator. N is hex
00 for 128-byte records, hex 01 for
256-byte records, hex 02 for 512-byte
records, or hex 03 for 1024-byte records.
CRC
A 2-byte cyclic redundancy check field which
verifies that the ID field and data field were read
correctly. The system generates these bytes
during a write operation and automatically
performs a read-back check to verify their
accuracy.
Gap 2
Gap between the I D field and the data field. It
is generated by the system during write operations.
Figure 8-2 (Part 2 of 2). Sector Format
Diskette
8-3
DISKETTE OPERATIONS
Diskette Input/Output Block
The processing unit issues seek, read, and write
operations to the diskette drive, which are controlled by
the input/output block.
The diskette input/output block controls diskette
operations as shown in Figure 8-3.
If sequential sector addressing is used, bit 2 of the
command modifier field of the input/output block must
be a O. If CHRNX addressing is used, bit 2 in the
command modifier field of the input/output block must
be a 1 and the CHRNX field (shown in the next
paragraph) becomes bytes 30-34 of the input/output
block.
Diskette seek operations are overlapped with all other
system functions. Diskette input/output operations are
overlapped with all other system input/output functions
except the disk storage drive functions.
Starting a Diskette Operation
A diskette operation is started by executing a supervisor
call instruction with an R code of hexadecimal 41. Index
register 1 must point to an assembled 34-byte
input/ output block.
.00
* 01
02
*
03
* 04
*
05
Event
Control
Block
Completion
Code
Flag
Byte
Command
Code
Command
Modifier
Reserved
(must be
zero)
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Device Status
Sense
Byte 0
Device Status
Sense
Byte 1
Device Status
Sense
Byte 2
Device Status
Sense
Byte 3
Reserved
(must be
zero)
Reserved
(must be
zero)
14
15
Reserved
(must be
zero)
1
16
Address of DTF
*
17
*118
Next Sequential Sector to
process
*
19
Sector
Count
06
*
1 07
*
111
TCB Pointer
1A
11B
Sector Address
* 09
Length (not used)
Data Address
10
I
08
12
13
Error Retry
Count
Reserved
(must be
zero)
1C
10
Number of
Sectors to be
Processed
-1
Cylinder
Address
* User Supplied Bytes
1E
1F
20
21
Head
Address
Record
Address
Record
Length
Number of
Sectors to be
Processed
-1
Figure 8-3 (Part 1 of 4). Diskette Input/Output Block
(,
8-4
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
0
IBM
Program
Label
$IOBRECB
Length in
Bytes
1
Field Description
Event control block
Bit
Meaning When Set to 1
0
Reserved.
1
The data address in the lOB is
correct; do not translate it.
2-7 Reserved.
1
$IOBRCMP
1
This is the diskette completion code (in hex).
40 = Successful completion
41 = Permanent I/O error
42 = End of volume
43 = Not ready
44 = End of track
49 = Unsupported control record found
2
3
$IOBRFLG
$IOBRCMD
1
1
Flag Byte
Bit
Meaning When Set to 1
0
No error recovery to be attempted.
1
Do not return on a permanent error.
2
Do not issue any error messages.
3
Do not log errors.
4
Disable automatic seek after a data
operation.
5
Reserved, must be O.
6
Reserved, must be O.
7
Disable automatic seek before a
data operation.
Command Code
DO = Seek
01
=
Read data (deleted control records
are bypassed)
02
=
Read data/control address mark
(deleted control records are not
bypassed)
D3
=
Read identification field
D5
=
Write data
D6
=
Write data/control address mark
07
=
Write identification field
Figure 8-3 (Part 2 of 4). Diskette Input/Output Block
Diskette
8-5
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
4
$IOBRMDR
Length in
Bytes
1
Field Description
Command Modifier
Bit
Meaning When Set to 1
0
Data is in MFM recording mode.
1
Return on a not ready condition.
2
This lOB has a CHRNX field.
3
Control store data address (valid only
for a read data command).
4
Diskette 20.
5
Return control on end of track.
6,7
These bits define the physical sector
length for sequential sector addressing:
Bit
Sector Length
0,0
128 bytes
0,1
256 bytes
1,0
512 bytes
1,1
1024 bytes
5
$IOBRSVl
1
Reserved, must be zero.
6
$IOBRDAT
2
Data address.
8
$IOBRLNG
2
Length (not used).
A
$IOBRSBO
1
Status byte O. See Figure 8-4 for bit 0-4
meanings when status byte 1 bit zero is on.
B
$IOBRSBl
1
Status byte 1.
C
$IOBRSB2
1
Status byte 2.
D
$IOBRSB3
1
Status byte 3.
E
$IOBRSV2
1
Reserved, must be zero.
Figure 8-3 (Part 3 of 4). Diskette Input/Output Block
(
8-6
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
F
$IOBR5V3
1
Reserved, must be zero.
10
$IOBRTCB
2
These 2 bytes contain the address of the
task control block associated with this input/
output block. There is one task control block
for each task that can be performed by the
system. More than one task can be executing
at the same time on the system. The number
of tasks that can be run on a system depends
on the system configuration.
12
$IOBRERR
1
Error retry count.
13
$IOBRPAD
2
Reserved-must be zero.
15
$IOBRDTF
2
Define the file address.
17
$IOBRL5P
2
Next sequential sector to process. If 55
addressing is used (bit 2 of the command
modifier is 0), and a read or write operation
has ended without an error, this field contains the 55 of the last sector processed, +1.
If there is an error, this field contains the
SS of the sector in error.
19
$IOBRLFT
1
Residual sector count. It is either a hex FF
which indicates that all data sectors were
transferred or it is ·the number of sectors
that were not transferred, -1.
1A
$IOBR55
2
Starting sector address. If bit 2 of the command modifier is a 1, and a read or write
operation is complete, this field contains
the final cylinder and head of the last
operation.
1C
$IOBRNB
1
Number of sectors of data transferred, -1. If
bit 2 of the command modifier is a 1, upon
completing a read or write operation this
field contains the last sector number
transferred, +1.
Length in
Bytes
Field Description
The following fields are used only if bit 2 of
the command modifier is a 1.
1D
$IOBRCYL
1
Cylinder (C).
1E
$IOBRHD
1
Head (H).
1F
$IOBRRCD
1
Record number (R).
20
$IOBR5IZ
1
Sector size (N). Bits 6 and 7 define the physical
record length. These values are the same as bits
6 and 7 of the command modifier.
21
$IOBRNUM
1
Number of sectors (x) of data transferred,-1.
Figure 8-3 (Part 4 of 4). Diskette Input/Output Block
Diskette
8-7
CHRNX Field
Diskette Addressing
The 5-byte CHRNX field specifies:
Sequential Sector Address
• For a seek operation, C is either a 00 through 76 for
the desired seek track address, or hexadecimal FF
which specifies a recalibrate operation. H, R, N, and
X are not used for a seek operation.
• For a read data operation, a read control record
operation, a write data operation, or a write control
record operation:
C (cylinder number) is a 1-byte address; valid
decimal addresses are 0 through 76.
H (head number) is (1) for a diskette 1, a 1-byte
address of 0 or (2) for a diskette 2D, either a a for
data head zero or a 1 for data head one.
R (record number) is a 1-byte address that
specifies the first record to be processed in a
one-record or many-record data operation.
Decimal record numbers 1 through 26 are valid for
128-byte frequency modulation or 256-byte
modified frequency modulation format diskettes.
Record numbers 1 through 8 are valid for
512-byte frequency modulation or 1024-byte
modified frequency modulation format diskettes.
Not valid record numbers set the record not
compare status bit (status byte 0, bit 5).
N (record length indicator) is a 1-byte binary
number that indicates the physical record length.
N must be 0 for 128-byte records, 1 for 256-byte
records, 2 for 512-byte records, and 3 for
1024-byte records. This byte does not change as
the operation is executed.
X (number of records) is a 1-byte binary number
that specifies the number of records to be
processed minus 1.
Before processing any data field, the system searches
the track for the desired sector identification field
(CHRN). This verifies that the seek operation found the
correct cylinder. If the fields do not compare, the
system indicates the error in the status bytes at the
input/ output block.
If actual sector (CHRNX) addressing is not used to
identify a diskette data area, sequential sector
addressing is used. Sequential sector addressing starts
at hexadecimal address 0001 (cylinder 1, data head 0,
sector 1), increases by 1 for each following sector, and
extends through the last sector on cylinder 74. Cylinder
o cannot be addressed by sequential sector addressing.
The control storage program changes sequential sector
addresses to actual sector addresses for all operations.
Actual Sector Address
If sequential sector addressing is not used, actual sector
addressing is used. The user supplies the 5-byte
CHRNX field in bytes 30 through 34 of the input/output
block. This method of addressing must be used to
address cylinder a (the volume label and volume table of
contents).
Diskette Seek Mechanism
Seek
The diskette drive seek mechanism moves the data head
to the cylinder specified by the sequential sector
address or CHRNX. A seek is performed on all data
operations except a write identification and read
identification if:
• The data head is not already at the correct cylinder
address.
• Bit 7 of the input/output block flag byte is zero.
A seek to the next cylinder is performed after a write
data operation, or a read data operation if:
• The last sector of a cylinder has been processed.
• Bit 4 of the input/output block flag byte is zero.
(
8-8
Recalibrate
Write Control Record
The diskette drive seek mechanism moves the data head
to cylinder 00. A recalibrate is the only way to clear a
not ready condition. The recalibrate operation is started
by a seek operation and either a sequential sector
address of hexadecimal FFFF or the cylinder byte of
CHRNX being hexadecimal FF as specified in the
input/ output block.
This operation sends deleted control records from the
data field in main storage, and the record is written in
the specified sector control record field. The first byte
in the data area in main storage must be a character D
(delete record). Records written this way will not be
read by a read data operation. The first control record
of data in the data area in main storage is written in
X+1 diskette sectors. (X is the contents of either byte
1C or byte 21 of the input/output block.)
Read Operations
Write Identification
Read Data
This operation reads data starting at the data record
specified by the sequential sector address or the
CHRNX address. The system reads X+1 data records
into main storage. (X is either byte 19 or byte 1 E of the
input/ output block.) Deleted control records are not
read into main storage.
Read Control Record
This operation is the same as read data, except that
deleted control records are read into main storage.
This operation formats the track that is now under the
data head and new sector identification fields and data
fields are written. The first data field in main storage is
written in all data fields of the track.
CHECK CONDITIONS AND STATUS
For a summary of diskette operation-ending conditions,
diskette indicators set, and restart procedures see Figure
8-5. Except where differently indicated, all status bytes
are reset before executing an operation.
Status Byte 0
Read Identification
This operation reads one 4- byte sector identification
field (CHRN) from the track now under the data head,
and sends it to main storage.
Write Operations
Note: For the other meaning of the following four bits
(0-3) if the no-operation bit is on (status byte 1, bit 0)
see Figure 8-4.
Bit
Description
o
Missing data address mark: Data was not found
after a sector identification field.
An automatic write verify (which cannot be disabled) is
performed during all write operations. The verify is done
by reading the data just written and comparing that data
against the data in the data area in main storage.
Identification cyclic redundancy check: Indicates a
cyclic redundancy check in a sector identification
field.
2
Data cyclic redundancy check: Indicates a cyclic
redundancy check in the data field.
3
Cylinder not compare: The cylinder address part of
the sector identification field and the desired
cylinder byte did not match during a sector
identification search.
4
Head not compare: The data head address part of
the sector identification field and the desired data
head byte did not match during a sector
identification search.
Write Data
This operation sends data records from the data field in
main storage, and the record is written in the specified
diskette sector data record field. This operation
continues until data from main storage has been written
to X+1 diskette data sectors. (X is the contents of either
byte 1C or byte 21 of the input/output block.)
Diskette
8-9
5
Record not compare: The record address part of
any sector identification field and the desired
record byte did not match during a sector
identification search.
6
Length not compare: The record length part of the
sector identification field and the desired length
did not match during a sector identification search.
7
Control record not valid: The leftmost byte of a
control record contains other than a F or D, control
address mark.
2
Verify compare error: The data written does not
match the main storage data field.
3
Control address mark record found: A control
address mark was found while performing a Read
Data or a Read Data and Control Record
operation.
4
Not used
5
Write error: Either a write overrun (status byte 2,
bit 6), a write parity check (status byte 2, bit 7), a
missing erase current (status byte 2, bit 2), data
unsafe (status byte 3, bit 0) was indicated during a
write operation.
6
End of track: The last record on the track has
been processed, but some records remain to be
processed.
7
File busy: Data is being read from or written on
the diskette. Interrupt Level 1 is being used.
Seek reverse: The last seek was in the reverse
direction.
Status Byte 1
Bit
Description
o
No operation: A diskette operation cannot be
executed because of existing status before
executing a diskette operation. This bit is reset by
the next diskette operation or by a system reset.
Note: If this bit is on, see Figure 8-4 for other
meaning of status byte 0 bits 0-3.
Status Byte 0
Description
Bit
0 1 2 3
a a a a
Device address or port address not valid: The control storage program has detected that the
diskette device address or port address received from the lOB is not valid.
a a a
1
Command not valid: The control storage program has detected that a diskette command.
received from the lOB is not valid.
a a
1
a
Not ready-not seek operation: The command issued to the diskette is rejected because the
diskette is not ready and the command is not a seek.
a a
1 1
Not ready-seek is not a recalibrate: The command issued to the diskette is rejected because
the diskette was ,not ready and the command was not a recalibrate.
a
1
a a
Errors not reset: One or more errors have not been reset.
a
1
a
1
Reject head 1 operation: The command issued to the diskette is rejected because head 1 is
selected, but a diskette 1 is in the machine.
a
1 1
a
Reject MFM operation: The MFM command issued to the diskette is rejected because a
diskette 1 drive is in the machine.
a
1 1 1
Write gate or erase gate on: A command should not be issued to the diskette because the
write gate or erase gate is not off.
Figure 8-4. No Operation Status
8-10
Status Byte 2
Status Byte 3
Bit
Description
Bit
Description
o
Diskette over speed: The diskette is turning quicker
than the maximum specified rate of 376
revolutions per minute, or 159 milliseconds per
revolution.
o
Data unsafe: Erase current is on while not in a
write operation.
Note: This status bit is reset by the verify part of
a write operation. Write error status (status byte
1, bit 5) is set at the same time; the program can
sense this bit.
Diskette not ready: indicates that:
• The diskette
• The diskette
closed, or
• The diskette
• The diskette
2
is not inserted, or
cover has been opened and
is not up to the correct speed, or
is inserted backward.
Erase current missing: Erase current failed to turn
on during a write operation.
Note: This status bit is reset by the verify part of
a write operation. Write error status (status byte
1, bit 5) is set at the same time; the program can
sense this bit.
3
Record not found: The CHRN sector identification
field could not be found in the selected track
during a sector identification search.
4
Read overrun: The minimum data rate from the
diskette to main storage was not maintained.
5
Data mode: Off only during a modified frequency
modulation read or write operation.
6
Write overrun: The minimum data rate from main
storage to the diskette was not maintained.
Block processor clock off: Diagnostic use only.
2
One head drive: A diskette 1 drive is installed.
3
Erase current off: Diagnostic use only.
4
Head 0 active: Diagnostic use only.
5
One-surface diskette: Use only data head O.
6
I/O working off: No device is busy.
7
Diskette working off: The diskette is not busy.
Note: This status bit is reset by the verify part of
a write operation. The write error status (status
byte 1, bit 5) is set at the same time; the program
can sense this bit.
7
Write parity check: The data bus out parity and
system generated serial write data parity did not
match during a write operation.
Note: This status bit is reset by the verify part of
a write operation. The write error status (status
byte 1, bit 5) is set at the same time; the program
can sense this bit.
Diskette
8-11
Status Byte 0
Condition Set By:
Suggested
Action 1
Bit
Description
0
Missing data address mark
X
X X X X
3
Identification cycl ic redundancy check
X X X X X X
3
2
Data cyclic redundancy check
X
X X X X
3
3
Cylinder not compare
X
X X X X
2
4
Head not compare
X
X X X X
3
5
Record not compare
X
X X X X
3
6
Length not compare
X
X X X X
3
7
Seek reverse
Status Byte 1
Bit
Description
0
No operation
Control record not valid
2
Verify compare error
3
Control address mark record found
4
Not used
5
Write error
6
End of track
7
File busy
Suggested
Action 1
X X X X X X X
X
X
3
X
4
X X X
3
X X X
2
1 Actions are described in Part 3 of this figure.
Figure 8-5 (Part 1 of 3). Diskette Check Conditions and Status
(
8-12
Status Byte 2
Condition Set By:
Suggested
Action l
Bit
Description
o
Diskette over speed
x XXXXXX
Diskette not ready
XXXXXXX
3
XXX
3
Record not found
XXXXXX
3
4
Read overrun
XXX XXX
3
5
FM mode
6
Write overrun
7
Write parity check
XXXXXXX
3
2
Missing erase current
3
Status Byte 3
Bit
Description
o
Data unsafe
Block processor clock off
2
Two head drive
3
Erase current off
4
Head 0 active
5
One surface disk
6
liD working off
7
Diskette working off
1 Actions
are described in Part 3 of this figure.
Figure 8-5 (Part 2 of 3)_ Diskette Check Conditions and Status
Diskette
8-13
Suggested Recovery Action
Number
Description
1
If this is the second try, then recalibrate and verify that the correct
diskette is in the diskette drive. If this is the third try, then exit to
a permanent error routine requiring operator intervention.
2
Issue a seek to the logical cylinder desired, then issue the data operation
again. Try three or more times. If not successful, post a permanent error.
3
a. Try original operation or sequence of operations a maximum of
three times if a write operation. Try 10 times if a read or seek
operation.
b. If try is successful, then return to processing.
c. If try is not successful, call a permanent error log out routine, then
return to processing.
4
Call a not-valid-control-record routine and return to processing.
Figure 8·5 (Part 3 of 3). Diskette Check Conditions and Status
ERROR RECOVERY
The recovery·procedures shown in Figure 8-5 can be
used to restart the system operation. The type of action
necessary is determined by performing a sense diskette
operation, then testing to determine which diskette
status bits are on.
INITIAL PROGRAM LOAD
The source of control storage initial program load and
main storage initial program load is selected by the
CSIPL and MSIPL switches on the CE panel. Pressing
the Load key on the operator panel starts control
storage initial program load.
If the CSIPL switch is set to the Diskette position, the
control storage program is loaded from the diskette. If
the CSIPL switch is set to the Disk position, the control
storage program is loaded from the disk.
8-14
A diskette control storage initial program load sends a
4096-byte diagnostic program located on track 00,
record 01, to control storage. This program is used by
the system, not by the programmer. After this
diagnostic program has executed, the control storage
system control· program is loaded. This program tests
the MSIPL switch setting.
If the MSIPL switch is set to the Diskette position, the
main storage initial program is loaded from the diskette.
If the MSIPL switch is set to the Disk position, the main
storage program is loaded from disk. The main storage
initial program load from the diskette is usually used for
installing a new supervisor or changing the system
configuration.
Chapter 9. Data Communications
Data communications (BSC or SDLC) is a special feature
of System/34; it lets the system function as a
point-to-point or multipoint terminal. Operation is
half-duplex, synchronous, and serial by bit, serial by
character over either switched voice-grade two-wire
lines, or nonswitched two- or four-wire lines.
SPECIAL COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
The following special communications features are
available on System/34.
EIA/CCITT Interface
Operation of the communications feature is controlled by
System/34 stored program instructions and, for BSC, by
responses to line-control characters.
DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
Point-to-Point Networks
Data communications functions on either a switched or
nonswitched point-to-point network. On a nonswitched
network, data transmissions are always between the
same two stations. On a switched network, data
transmissions between any two stations on the network
are made by dialing.
The EIA/ CCITT (Electronic Industries
Association/International Telephone and Telegraph
Consultative Committee) interface feature supplies an
interface adapter and cable for attaching the
communications adapter to an external modem. The
interface cannot be installed with the IBM 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem, the IBM 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem, or the Data-Phone' digital service adapter, all
of which are described· in this chapter. The interface
might need the internal clock feature (described in the
following paragraph) if the external modem does not
supply its own clocking.
Internal Clock
All stations on a multipoint network are permanently
connected (nonswitched) and all data transmissions are
between two stations: the control station and an
addressed tributary station. System/34 is used on a
multipoint network as a tributary station; it cannot be
used as a control station.
The internal clock supplies transmission rates of 600
bps and 1,200 bps, and supplies a clockinQ system in
the communications adapter to permit operation with
modems that do not supply clocking to the adapter. The
internal clock can be installed with the EIA/ CCITT
interface and must be installed with the IBM 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem; it cannot be installed with the IBM
2400 BPS Integrated Modem or the Data-Phone digital
service adapter.
TRANSMISSION DATA RATES
Data-Phone Digital Service Adapter
A clock controls the rate at which data is transmitted
and received. Either a special feature (see Internal Clock,
later in this chapter), the network, or the modem
supplies the clock. However, connected stations must
use the same clocking source.
The Data- Phone digital service adapter supplies an
interface for attaching the communications adapter to
AT&T's digital data network. The transmission rates for
this adapter are 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps.
Multipoint Networks
The communications feature can operate at various data
rates between 600 and 9,600 bps (bits per second). The
data rate used is determined by the modem, and
connected stations must operate at the same data rate
using compatible modems.
'Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
Data Communications
9-1
Data is transmitted serially-by-bit and
serially-by-character to the digital data network. A
clock is supplied by the digital data network for clocking
the data to and from the adapter.
Note: When the Data-Phone adapter is installed, up to
1 second of interference is transmitted to the network
when the system's power is turned on or off.
STANDARD COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER
FEATURES
The following two features, rate select and automatic
answering, are supplied with every communications
adapter operating on a switched network.
This modem comes in two types:
• The nons witched type attaches to two- or four-wire
lines through an IBM-supplied cable directly to the
line.
• The switched with automatic answering type attaches
to a switched network through an IBM-supplied
cable to a common carrier data access arrangement
(CBS type coupler or similar coupler). The IBM 1200
BPS Integrated Modem needs the internal clock. It
cannot be installed with the EIA/CCITT interface, the
IBM 2400 BPS Integrated Modem, or the
Data- Phone digital service adapter.
IBM 2400 BPS Integrated Modem
Rate Select
Rate select permits programs to transmit at half the
normal speed if the system has a modem that can
operate at half rate.
Automatic Answering
Automatic answering (switched network only) enables
the communications adapter to respond to a telephone
request for data communications automatically without
operator action (manual answer) if the modem also has
the automatic answering feature.
MODEMS
The modem receives the data serially by bit and serially
by character from the communications line during
receive operations and sends the bits to the
communications adapter. During transmit operations the
communications adapter receives characters in parallel
from storage, then makes them available serially by bit,
serially by character to the modem. The modem, in turn,
places each bit on the communications line as soon as it
receives the bit from the communications adapter.
IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem
This modem permits communications at a data
transmission rate of 1200 bits per second over a
nonswitched or switched network. The device
communicating with System/34 must also have an IBM
1200 BPS Integrated Modem, or a compatible modem.
9-2
This modem permits communications at a data
transmission rate of 2400 bits per second over a
nonswitched or switched network. The device
communicating with System/34 must also have an IBM
2400 BPS Integrated Modem or an IBM 3872 Modem.
The IBM 2400 BPS Integrated Modem cannot be
installed with the EIA/CCITT interface, the IBM 1200
BPS Integrated Modem, or the Data-Phone digital
service ada pter.
This modem comes in the following types:
• The nonswitched point-to-point and nonswitched
multipoint types attach to two- or four-wire lines
through an IBM-supplied cable directly to the line.
• The switched, switched network backup, and the
switched with automatic answering types attach to a
switched network through an IBM-supplied cable to
a common carrier data access arrangement (CBS type
coupler or similar coupler).
Modem Features for the IBM 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem
Two features that can be installed with the IBM 2400
BPS Integrated Modem (nonswitched) are the switched
network backup feature and the switched network
backup with the automatic answering feature. These
features are described in the following paragraphs.
Switched Network Backup (SNBU)
This feature permits backup attachment of System/34
to the switched network if the primary modem is the
IBM 2400 BPS Integrated Modem on a nonswitched
line. Communication can be with either another IBM
2400 BPS Integrated Modem or an IBM 3872 Modem if
these modems have the switched or the switched
network backup feature. Switched network backup
cannot be installed with the switched network backup
with automatic answering feature, which is described in
the following paragraph. Attachment to the switched
network is through an IBM-supplied cable to the
common carrier data access arrangement (COT type
coupler or similar coupler).
Switched Network Backup with Automatic Answering
This feature is the same as the switched network
backup feature, described in the preceding paragraphs,
except that it automatically answers incoming calls when
attached to a common carrier data access arrangement
(CBS type coupler or similar coupler). It cannot be
installed with the switched network backup feature.
SSC ADAPTER
This section of Chapter 9 pertains to the BSC adapter
only; for a description of the SDLC adapter, see SOLC
Adapter later in this chapter.
Transmission Codes
Data can be transmitted in either of two codes, EBCDIC
(extended binary-coded decimal interchange code) or
ASCII (American National Standard Code for Information
Interchange). In each job that uses the BSC adapter, the
customer must specify once which code is being used in
the job. Only stations using the same code can
communicate with each other.
EBCDIC and ASCII have different codes to represent
characters. EBCDIC is the standard, 8-bit plus parity,
internal binary code of System/34. The bits are
numbered 0 through 7 starting at the high-order bit.
The parity bit, used for internal checking, is not
transmitted over the communications network.
All characters are transmitted over the line low-order bit
first. For ASCII, the high-order bit must be a zero bit
from main storage on transmit. If the adapter does not
receive a high-order zero from main storage, it
generates and sends out a wrong-parity (P) bit. In
addition, the invalid-ASCII-character status bit is set on,
causing a unit check condition.
First Hex
Second Hex
High
Low
Order of Transmission
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
EBCDIC
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
ASCII
P 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
Note: The complete EBCDIC character set and the ASCII
character set are shown in Appendix F.
Figure 9-1. E[;CDIC and ASCII Bit Positions
SSC Adapter Features
The following features are standard with the BSC
adapter for System/34.
Transmission Code Selection. The BSC adapter can
transmit and receive both EBCDIC and ASCII data.
(Only stations using the same transmission code can
communicate with each other.) The transmission code
used can be changed for each job.
Intermediate Block Checking. Intermediate block checking
permits intermediate text block (lTB) characters to be
received for checking the accuracy of communication
without interrupting the constant flow of information
from the transmitting station to the receiving station.
Full Transparent Text Mode. Full transparent text mode
(EBCDIC only) permits any of the 256 EBCDIC bit
combinations to be transmitted as data. Therefore, the
EBCDIC line-control characters can, if needed, be
transmitted as data.
ASCII is a 7-bit plus parity code. In ASCII, the bits are
numbered 1 through 7 starting at the low-order bit
(Figure 9-1).
Data Communications
9-3
BSC Input/Output Block
Program operation of BSe is controlled by an
input/output block (lOB) issued by the sve I/O request
instruction. The lOB, as shown in Figure 9-2, contains
all information needed to carry out a requested
operation. The sve I/O request queues the operation
to the adapter. (For BSe, only one operation may be
queued at a time.) When the operation ends, the lOB
contains the status of the operation. The lOB must be
posted complete before the next sve I/O request for
sse is issued.
Posting lOBs Complete
lOBs are posted complete at the end of the following
BSe operations:
• Receive only (Q code
= hex 81)
• Receive initial delayed (Q code
• Receive initial (Q code
= hex 82)
= hex 83)
• Transmit/ receive overlay (Q code
• Transmit/ receive initial (Q code
• Transmit/ receive (Q code
= hex
= hex
= hex
84)
85)
86)
• 2-second time-out. (The sse adapter need not be
enabled to complete the 2-second time-out
operation.)
• .Enable or disable.
On a receive operation, an lOB is posted complete when
a changeof-direction character is decoded, when the
receive buffer is filled, or when a receive time-out
occurs. On a 2-second time-out operation, an lOB is
posted complete at the end of the 2-second time-out,
or when an I/O request instruction is issued.
9-4
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
IBM
Program
Label
o
10BECM
10BHCMP
Length
in Bytes
Description
Event control mask
Hex
Meaning
80
40
Do not skip indicator.
Data buffer address is real.
Completion code
Hex
Meaning
80
Active: Set on by control storage when processing the lOB and set
off by control storage when processing is complete. If this bit is on,
processing of the lOB is not permitted.
Complete: Set on by control storage when the lOB is complete;
set off by main storage. If this bit is on, processing of the lOB is
not permitted.
Forced 2-second time-out.
Error detected: Set on if any bit in status byte 0 is on.
40
02
01
2
IOBPARM
Parameter byte
3
lOBO
Command (0) code
Bits 0 1 2 3 = Attachment address
Bits 4 5 6 7 = Command type
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
o
1 0 1
o
1 1 0
o
0
1
0
1
0
1 1 1
Control.
Receive only.
Receive initial delayed.
Receive initial.
Transmit/receive overlay: Same as the transmit/
receive command, but the received data overlays the
transmit buffer.
Transmit/receive initial: The receive part of the
buffer must follow, and be contiguous to, the transmit
part of the buffer.
Transmit/receive: The receive part of the buffer must
follow, and be contiguous to, the transmit part of the
buffer.
This command is the same as the transmit/receive
initial command, but this command does not start
until the microcode recognizes the EDT character.
Reserved.
Note: The BSC control storage program does not check the validity of
the command code. The program decodes the command from only the
low-order 3 bits and proceeds with the operation. Where the low-order
3 bits are defined to be reserved, the operation defaults to a receive
initial operation.
Figure 9-2 (Part 1 of 3). BSC lOB
Data Communications
9-5
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
4
IBM
Program
Label
IOBR
Length
in Bytes
1
Description
Command modifier
When the command (Q) code is hex 0:
CO = Enable BSC
80 = Disable BSC
04 = Start 2-second timer
01 = Microcode looks for poll or
address without preceding EOT
When command (Q) code is not hex 0, the command modifier bits are
reserved.
5
IOBADR
1
Station address (multipoint tributary)
6
IOBSTAR
2
Data buffer address: Points to the start of the data buffer.
8
IOBRLN
2
Data buffer length (receive): Defines the number of bytes in the receive
portion of the data buffer.
A
IOBSNS1
1
Statu s byte 1
Hex
Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
Receive time-out
Block check
Transmit adapter check
Receive adapter check
Invalid ASCII character
Abortive disconnect
Not data set ready
Reserved
B
IOBSNS2
1
Status byte 2 (reserved)
C
IOBCAR
2
Buffer address: Indicates the last position of the buffer (plus 1 position)
that was used at the completion of a receive, receive initial, transmit/
receive, transmit/receive initial, or a transmit initial delayed command.
E
IOBRES
2
Reserved
10
IOBTCB
2
Task control block address
12
IOBQHDR
1
Queue identification
Figure 9-2 (Part 2 of 3). BSe lOB
(
\
9-6
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
13
IBM
Program
Label
IOBLDEF
Length
in Bytes
Description
Line definition byte
1
Hex
Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
Half rate is selected.
Internal clock is needed.
IBM modem is installed.
Answer tone must be supplied by data terminal equipment.
Standby line is selected.
Multipoint line is selected.
Switched data terminal ready line is selected.
Nonswitched line is selected.
14
IOBTLN
2
Data buffer length (transmit): Defines the number of bytes in the
transmit portion of the data buffer.
16
IOBDUM2
2
Reserved
Figure 9-2 (Part 3 of 3). BSe lOB
esc
Adapter Controls
A station controls its BSC adapter with control, pad, and
synchronization characters. These characters are
described in the following paragraphs, and they include:
Control Characters
The BSC control characters are described in the
following paragraphs and are shown in Figure 9-3.
•
• Modifiers, synchronization characters, and data link
escape functions (lTB, SYN, OLE)
SOH (start of header) or STX (start of text) precede
a block of text characters. Both reset control mode
and set the adapter to data mode. The first SOH or
STX after line turnaround resets the BCC buffer, and
BCC accumulation starts with the following character.
• Starting codes, to enter specific modes and to start
accumulation of BCCs (block check characters; see
Data Checking and BSC Status Bytes, later in this
chapter)
•
ETB (end of text block) or ETX (end of text) terminate
a block of characters started with SOH or STX. Both
ETB and ETX reset data mode in the adapter and are
the last character included in the BCC accumulation.
At the primary station, the adapter transmits the BCC
and the pad character. At the secondary station, the
adapter compares its BCC accumulation with the
BCC(s) received following the ETB or ETX.
• Ending codes, to terminate blocks and activate
checking functions
•
EOT (end of transmission) indicates the end of a
transmission, which may contain more than one
message, and resets all stations on the line to control
mode. EOT is also transmitted as a negative
response to a polling sequence. EOT cannot be
immediately preceded by any character other than
SYN. To be recognized as a control character, EOT
must be followed by four consecutive binary l' s.
Data Communications
9-7
• ENQ (enquiry) resets data mode in the adapter.
• NAK (negative acknowledgment) indicates that the
preceding transmission block was in error and the
receiving station is ready for another transmission of
the same block. NAK is also the not ready response
to multipoint station selection sequences and
point-to-point initialization sequences. NAK must be
followed by four consecutive binary l's to be
recognized as a control character.
• SYN (synchronous idle) is generated and transmitted
automatically by the adapter to establish and maintain
synchronization. A SYN from main storage at the
transmitting station is transmitted, but does not enter
main storage at the receiving station or BCC
accumulation at either station.
• SYN SYN is the synchronization pattern in
nontransparent mode. Two consecutive SYN
characters are always transmitted immediately after
an ITB or a BCC sequence.
• OLE (data link escape) informs the adapter to test the
following character for a control sequence. In
nontransparent text mode, DLE is data.
• ITB (intermediate text block) is included in the BCC
and causes the BCC(s) to be sent or compared. Both
adapters continue in data mode with the new BCC
accumulation starting with the first non-SYN
character.
• ACK 0 (even acknowledgment) and ACK 1 (odd
acknowledgment) are positive acknowledgments by
the receiving station that the preceding
even-numbered (ACK 0) or odd-numbered (ACK 1)
transmission block was received. In data mode, ACK
indicates that the last block check character received
matched the block check character generated by the
adapter. In control mode, ACK indicates that the
adapter is ready to receive. ACK always needs a
response from the station that receives it. ACK
causes the receiving adapter to end the receive
operation and post the lOB complete.
• WACK (wait before transmit - positive
acknowledgment) signals that the last data block was
received correctly but the receiving station cannot
continue receiving. During line initialization, a
received WACK indicates that the remote station
cannot receive any data immediately but can receive
data in a short time. WACK causes the receiving
adapter to end the receive operation and post the
lOB complete.
9·8
• DISC (mandatory disconnect) is transmitted (in
switched point-to-point networks only) to signal the
remote station that the transmitting station is going
to disconnect from the line. DISC causes the
receiving adapter to end the receive operation and
post the lOB complete.
• RVI (reverse interrupt) is transmitted by a secondary
station to request that the primary (control) station
end its transmission and permit the secondary station
to transmit. RVI is transmitted in place of ACK.
Sequential RVls can be transmitted only in response
to ENQ. RVI causes the receiving adapter to end the
receive operation and post the lOB complete.
In addition, on a multipoint network, RVI is transmitted
by the tributary station as an acknowledgment to a
select sequence, and as an indication that the tributary
station wants to transmit.
• TTD (temporary text delay) is transmitted by a
primary station to inform the secondary station that
(1) there will be a delay of more than two seconds in
transmitting the next data block, or (2) the primary
station wants to cancel the transmission. The
secondary station responds to TID by transmitting
NAK. TID causes the receiving adapter to end the
receive operation and post the lOB complete.
• XSTX (transparent start of text) resets control mode
and sets the adapter to data mode and transparent
mode. Unless preceded by SOH-, XSTX resets the
BCe register and BCC accumulation starts with the
following character. In transparent mode, the first
DLE in each two-character DLE sequence does not
enter BCC or main storage; the second character
does, if it is not SYN. Also, the transmitting adapter
inserts a DLE for each DLE received from main
storage.
• XITB (transparent intermediate block) causes the
same adapter action as ITB and, in addition, resets
transparent mode.
• XETX or XETB (transparent end of text or transparent
end of text block) causes the same adapter action as
ETX or ETB and, in addition, resets transparent
mode.
• XSYN (transparent synchronous idle) is the
synchronization pattern for transparent mode. It does
not enter BCC or main storage.
• XENQ (transparent block cancel) resets data mode
and transparent mode in the adapter.
(
• XTTO (transparent TTO) performs the function of TID
in transparent mode.
The SSC adapter also generates and sends a pad
character as the second character of the NAK and EDT
control character sequences.
• XOLE (transparent OLE) is interpreted in transparent
mode as a valid data byte (hexadecimal 10).
Pad Characters for SSC
The BSC adapter generates and sends one pad
character for each change-of-direction character
transmitted. If the change-of-direction sequence calls
for a block check character, the pad character follows
the block check character; if not, the pad character
follows the change-of-direction character in the
message being transmitted. This pad character is
hexadecimal FF.
When transmission starts, the SSC adapter
automatically generates and inserts a pad character (in
this case, a hexadecimal 55) in front of the first
synchronization sequence. No leading or trailing pad
character (except a pad character immediately following
either EOT or NAK) is stored during receive operations.
Name
Mnemonic
EBCDIC
ASCII
Start of header
Start of text
End :of text block}
End of text}
End of transmission}
Enquiry}
Negative acknowledgment
Synchronous idle
Data link escape
Intermediate block
Even acknowledgment}
Odd acknowledgment}
Wait before transmit-pas. ack. }
Mandatory disconnect}
Reverse interruptI
Temporary text delayl
Transparent start of text
Transparent intermediate block
Transparent end of text l
Transparent end of trans. block l
Transparent synchronous idle
Transparent block cancel l
Transparent TTDI
Transparent D LE
SOH
STX
ETB
ETX
EOT
ENG
NAK
SYN
DLE
ITB
ACKO
ACK 1
WACK
DISC
RVI
TTD
XSTX
XITB
XETX
XETB
XSYN
XENG
XTTD
XDLE
SOH
STX
ETB
ETX
EDT
ENG
NAK
SYN
DLE
IUS
DLE (70)
DLE/
DLE,
DLE EDT
DLE@
STX ENG
DLE STX
DLEIUS
DLE ETX
DLE ETB
DLE SYN
DLE ENG
DLE STX OLE ENQ
DLE DLE
SOH
STX
ETB
ETX
EOT
ENG
NAK
SYN
OLE
US
OLE 0
OLE 1
DLE;
DLE EOT
DLE<
STX ENG
1 Change-of-direction character
Figure 9-3. Control Characters for SSC
Data Communications
9-9
BSC Character Synchronization (SYN SYN)
Enable/Disable BSe
A BSC adapter without the internal clock receives timing
pulses from the modem which, between itself and the
transmitting adapter, establishes and maintains bit
synchronization. The adapter that is starting to transmit,
automatically sends two SYNs for establishing character
synchronization at the receiving adapter. The receiving
adapter establishes character synchronization by
decoding the two consecutive SYNs. To maintain
character synchronization, the transmitting adapter
inserts a synchronization pattern, SYN SYN, for each
transmit time-out. The synchronization pattern does not
enter BCC or main storage. In transparent mode, the
transparent synchronous idle (OLE SYN) is used.
Enable BSC adapter sets on the ' data terminal ready'
line to the modem; disable BSC adapter sets off the
, data terminal ready' line and resets the BSC adapter.
The 'power on resef, 'system resef, or 'IPL' line also
sets off the' data terminal ready' line and resets the
BSC adapter.
An adapter with the internal clock establishes and
maintains character synchronization on its own. For
compatibility with this feature, the BSC adapter
automatically sends two additional hexadecimal 55s
preceding the character synchr,onization pattern.
Initialization Sequences
Framing the BSe Message
The program at the transmitting station must frame the
data to be sent with the correct line-control characters.
These characters are stored at the receiving station, so
the program at the receiving station must permit space
for them in storage. When transmitting, the BSC
adapter automatically generates and transmits SYN, pad,
and CRC characters (LRC/VRC for ASCII) as needed for
establishing and maintaining synchronization with the
remote station and for error checking. When receiving,
the BSC adapter removes all SYN and CRC characters
(LRC/VRC for ASCII) and some pad characters from the
data being sent to storage. The pad character following
an NAK or EOT is not removed by the adapter.
Response characters (ACK 0, ACK 1, WACK, and NAK)
are inserted by the program at the transmitting BSC
adapter and not by the transmitting BSC adapter itself,
and they are not deleted by the receiving BSC adapter.
The program at the receiving BSC adapter must store
these characters in a known location so that this
program can test them to determine what action to take
next.
Bse OPERATIONS
All BSC operations on the communications line are
controlled through a combination of instructions in the
system processing unit and the automatic controls
started by the line-control characters.
9-10
Since the' data terminal ready' line controls switching of
the modem to the data link, enable BSC adapter is a
prerequisite to making a switched network connection.
Disable BSC adapter is used to disconnect from a
switched network.
Initialization sequences, transmitted by the transmit and
receive instructions, are described in General
Information-Binary Synchronous Communications,
GA27-30D4. The data link (point-to-point nonswitched,
point-to-point switched, or multipoint) determines the
type of receive initial operation; these operations are
described in the following paragraphs.
Receive Initial Operation (Point-to-Point Nonswitched)
On a nonswitched network, receive initial causes the
BSC adapter to search for character synchronization.
When character synchronization is made, receive
time-out becomes active and the received data (starting
with the first non-SYN character) is stored in the main
storage area specified by the data buffer address. The
operation ends and an lOB is posted complete when a
change-of-direction character is received, the receive
buffer length is zero, or a receive time-out occurs.
Receive Initial Operation (Point-to-Point Switched)
On a switched network, a receive initial operation
conditions the BSC adapter. When the 'data set ready'
line goes active, receive time-out becomes effective and
the BSC adapter attempts to establish synchronization.
When character synchronization is made, the received
data (starting with the first non-SYN character) is stored
in the main storage area specified by the data buffer
address. The receive buffer length is decreased each
time a character is received. The operation ends and an
lOB is posted complete when a change-of-direction
character is received, the receive buffer length is zero, or
a receive time-out occurs. In the case of a receive
time-out, the recovery procedure is to issue the receive
only.
(
Receive Initial Operation (Multipoint)
Receive initial is used to receive polling and selection
sequences on a multipoint network. The receive buffer
length should be loaded with one less than the
maximum number of characters in the polling / selection
sequence. A 2-character station address is used. For
this operation, the address character must be loaded in
the station address field of the lOB. The EBCDIC 2-bit
or the ASCII 6-bit of the first station address character
received is ignored; however, both characters of the
address must be the same.
For example, assuming EBCDIC, if the station address
field is loaded with either B or S, the adapter recognizes
either BB or SS as the station address.
• When the EDT character is received, the parameters
for the receive initial delayed command are taken
from control storage, and the command is executed
as a receive initial command. However, the receive
initial operation starts in control mode where an EDT
character does not have to be received.
The reason for the receive initial delayed operation is the
same as for the receive initial operation; it is the quick
response time needed between when the EDT character
is received to when the next polling/ selection sequence
starts. For more information on the receive initial
delayed operation, see Receive Initial Operation
(Multipoint).
Transmit and Receive Operation
The basic mode of BSC is monitor mode for this
operation. In this mode, the BSC adapter searches for
character synchronization. When character
synchronization is completed, it monitors the line. All
line-control characters are decoded and the respective
functions are executed, but data is not stored. When a
valid EDT sequence is received, control mode is set.
In control mode, the BSC adapter monitors for its
station address. If it is not found, the BSC adapter
continues monitoring the line. A decoded SOH or STX
drops control mode and puts the BSC adapter back into
monitor mode. If the station address is decoded as the
first non-SYN characters after establishing character
synchronization in control mode, the BSC adapter
immediately enters addressed mode and puts the
sequence, starting with the second station address
character, into the main storage area specified by 'the
data buffer address. The operation ends and the lOB is
posted complete when a change-of-direction character
is received, the receive buffer length is zero, or a receive
time-out occurs.
Receive Initial Delayed Operation (Multipoint)
The receive initial delayed operation is the same as a
receive initial operation except for the following:
• When the receive initial delayed command is issued
and decoded, and the parameters for the command
are put into control storage, the command is not
executed until an end of transmission (EDT) character
is received.
If a response results from the transmit operation, the
combined transmit and receive operation must be used.
The transmit and receive operation is used for any type
of transmission; that is, for control sequences or text
data. It sets the BSC adapter to transmit mode, then
takes characters from main storage and transmits them
on the line. BCC accumulation, data mode, and
transparent mode are set if the correct line-control
characters are taken from storage. The transmit buffer
length is decreased each time a character is transmitted
and transmission continues until the transmit buffer
length is zero. When the transmit buffer length is zero,
the adapter is turned around to receive mode under the
same operation.
In receive mode, the BSC adapter searches for character
synchronization, then stores the characters received into
main storage. As in transmit, the control characters
received determine the function of the receive operation.
The operation ends and the lOB is posted complete
when a change-of-direction sequence is received, the
receive buffer length is zero, or a receive time-out
occurs. At this time the completion code and status
bytes in the lOB can be analyzed.
The reason for this combined transmit and receive
instruction is the quick response time needed between
the two operations. The effect of the data buffer
address, the transmit buffer length, and the receive
buffer length on the control sequences or text data is
shown in Figure 9-4.
Data Communications
9-11
,
JJ
C*
Data Buffer
Address
Receive
Buffer
0
0
II
II
I
I"""·----Transmit Data Buffer -----~t
,
-'
* COD = Change-of-direction character
The transmit and receive buffers must be allocated so that the receive
buffer area follows the transmit buffer area, and is next to the transmit
buffer area. The maximum size of the combined transmit and receive
buffers is 4K bytes.
Figure 9-4. Main Storage Data Buffer at Start of Transmit
and Receive Operation
The transmit and receive operation is used by both the
primary and secondary station; that is, to send data and
receive the response, ,and to send the response and
receive data.
At the start of the transmit and receive operation, the
adapter sends hexadecimal 55 (two additional
hexadecimal 55s if the Internal Clock feature is
installed). and two SYN characters. During transmit, the
BSe adapter inserts the synchronization pattern, SYN
SYN, for each transmit time-out. SYN is not part of the
Bee and does not enter main storage. BeC compare
takes place when an ITB, ETB, or ETX is received.
If the adapter enters data mode by receiving an STX or
SOH, then only ETB, ETX, and ENO are valid
change-of-direction sequences. Outside of data mode,
all turnaround sequences are valid change-of-direction
sequences and will terminate the operation. The lOB is
posted complete before the receive buffer length is
equal to zero if a change-of-direction sequence is
received.
Transmit and Receive Initial Operation (Multipoint)
The transmit and receive initial operation is the same as
a transmit and receive operation except for the
following:
The reason for the transmit and receive initial operation
is the same as for the tran~mit and receive operation; it
is the quick response time needed between the two
operations. For more information on the transmit and
receive initial operation, see Transmit and Receive
Operation.
ITS Operation
The IUS (intermediate unit separator) character is
interpreted as the ITB control character to activate the
ITB function. The primary station sends the Bee after
the ITB and the secondary station receives and
compares it; both stations then transmit more data with
no line turnaround.
For nontransparent data, the primary station can
transmit all ITB blocks in a single transmit and receive
instruction.
When the secondary station receives an ITB character,
the adapter remains in receive mode and receives the
next ITB block. This continues until a
change-of-direction character is recognized. When the
ending sequence (ETB, ETX, or ENO) is received, it is
stored and the lOB is posted complete. At this time, the
program checks the completion code and status bytes to
determine the correct response.
• After the transmit buffer reaches 0, it is necessary to
transmit an end of transmission (EDT) character.
• Bit 7 of the command modifier must be set on to
enter receive initial mode. When bit 7 is on, the
microcode looks for a polling sequence or an address
without a preceding EDT character. In other words,
the EOT character does not have to precede the
polling/selection sequence from the primary station.
9-12
(
Transparent Operation
DATA CHECKING AND BSC STATUS BYTES
In transmitting and receiving data, transparent mode is
set by the OLE STX sequence. In transparent mode, the
transmitting adapter automatically inserts a second OLE
preceding each OLE from storage (except OLE STX),
which is deleted by the receiving BSC adapter. The
additional OLE does not enter BCC accumulation.
As the remote station transmits messages, it generates
block check characters from the data bits transmitted.
As these bits are received at the local communications
adapter, the adapter generates a similar block check
character from the data bits it receives. Each time the
remote station transmits an ITB, ETB, or ETX character,
it also transmits its block check characters. The local
BSC adapter compares these block check characters
that it receives from the line with the block check
characters that it generated. If the block check
characters generated by the local communications
adapter do not match the block check characters
received from the line, the block check status bit is set
(bit 1 of Figure 9-5). While servicing a completed lOB,
the program must sample the status bits and determine
if a block check has occurred.
Either ETB, ETX, or ENQ (all change-of-direction
characters) ends transparent mode at the primary station
if it is at a location one less than the start of the receive
buffer length. Therefore, the primary station inserts a
OLE so that the single OLE followed by ETB, ETX, or
ENQ informs the secondary station to leave transparent
mode. This OLE is deleted by the secondary station and
is not included in the BCC at either station.
Disconnect Operation
The program performs a disconnect operation on a
switched network by giving a disable BSC adapter
which drops the 'data terminal ready' line to the
modem. The transmitting station sends a OLE EDT
sequence with a transmit operation to inform the
receiving station that it is going on-hook. A received
OLE EDT sequence at the secondary station causes a
disconnect operation.
If the lOB completion is the result of an ETB or ETX
character, the result of the block check compare
determines which response character should be sent.
The positive acknowledgment characters alternate; ACK
o is transmitted in response to even-numbered blocks
and ACK 1 is transmitted in response to odd-numbered
blocks. The program must transmit the correct positive
acknowledgment. The first block of text transmitted is
always an odd-numbered block. If the wrong
acknowledgment character is returned, the primary
station assumes that a block of data was lost and an
error recovery procedure is started.
Receive Operation
The receive operation is used when it is necessary to
perform a receive operation after the end of the
preceding instruction, such as when a receive time-out
has occurred. The operation is the same as the receive
part of the transmit and receive operation.
This instruction must be used after a receive time-out
during a receive initial operation on a switched network
or after a receive time-out during a transmit and
receive.
When block checking is started by ITB, the result of the
block check compare is not transmitted immediately.
Instead, if the block check compare is equal, the BSC
adapter continues to receive and store characters. If the
block check compare is not equal, the data check status
bit is set on to indicate that a block check compare
error occurred. When the next ETB or ETX character is
received, it is stored and the lOB is posted complete.
The status bits are tested to determine if all data was
received correctly. An ENQ character also terminates
the receive operation.
2-Second Time-out
This control code function supplies a 2-second delay
before transmitting a TIO or WACK. The start
2-second time-out must be given only with the control
instruction. When the time-out is completed, the lOB is
posted complete. The BSC adapter does not need to be
enabled to perform the 2-second time-out operation.
The 2-second time-out is forced to end if a transmit
command is issued while the 2-second time-out is
executing.
Data Communications
9-13
Bit
Desription When Bit Is Set
o
Time-out status: A receive time-out (3.25 seconds) occurred during a receive operation.
Block check during a receive operation .
•
A CRC compare check occurred (EBCDIC) .
•
An LRC/VRC compare check occurred (ASCII).
Note: Characters having VRC checks are distinguished by a high-order bit in main storage. These
characters are never recognized as control characters by the BSC adapter.
2
Transmit adapter check: The BSC adapter did not move a character from main storage to the adapter
before the next character had to be moved to accommodate the line. An overrun does not terminate
the operation.
3
Receive adapter check: The BSC adapter did not move a character from the adapter to main storage
before the next character had to be moved to accommodate the line. An overrun does not terminate
the operation.
4
Invalid ASCII: BSC adapter found leftmost bit in an ASCII byte on during transmit operation.
5
Abortive disconnect: Indicates that the BSC adapter on a switched network was enabled, then the
modem became ready, then not ready. This indicates the connection has been released and causes
data term inal ready to turn off.
The program must allow enough time for a forced disconnect to occur. The program can use the
2-second tjme-out to ensure this.
6
Not data set ready: Indicates that the modem is not ready to operate and that the BSC adapter is
not enabled.
7
Not used.
Figure 9-5. BSC Adapter Status Byte
SUGGESTED ERROR RECOVERY PROCEDURES
If the error bit (bit 7) is on in the lOB completion code
at the end of a transmit or a receive operation, the
program should test the lOB status byte. Test the
status bits and perform the procedures for recovering
from the error in the order given in Figure 9-6. The
program must check for lost data and analyze the last
two characters received to find a response error.
If the data end address (lOB bytes 2 and 3) is more
than the data buffer address and the receive data buffer
length, a lost-data error is indicated.
(
9-14
Status Byte 0
Priority
Bit
Error Condition
Error Recovery Procedure (recommended program action)
1
6
Not data set ready
All cases-Action 1
2
4
Invalid ASCII character
All cases-Action 1
3
5
Abortive disconnect
All cases-Action 1
4
2 and 3
Adapter checks
(transmit and receive)
Control mode-Action 5
Secondary-Action 4
Primary-Action 3
5
o
Receive time-out
6
1
CRC/LRC/V RC
6
Program
detected error 1
Lost data
7
Program
detected error 1
Abnormal response
1 The
Receive initial (switched)-Action 8
Control mode-Action 5
Secondary-Action 4
Primary-Action 3
Control mode-Action 5
Secondary-Action 2
Primary-Action 3
Secondary: Absence of initial STX or terminal ETB/ETXAction 4
Primary: Improper ACK immediately preceded by
time-out-Action 6
Primary: Any response other than proper ACK or EOT Action 7
program should provide lost-data detection.
Action Table
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Permanent error occurred-operator must restart.
NAK was transmitted and received-retransmit data.
ENO was transmitted and received-retransmit last response N times.
Issue receive portion of previous operation N times.
Retry last operation M times.
Transmit and receive last text. This is an intermediate action within a recovery procedure; it is taken by the
primary each time it transmits text, times out on receive, transmits ENO, and receives the improper ACK. A system
hangup will not occur, because of the limitation on Action 3.
7. Transmit and receive ENO once. If response is NAK, do Action 6 N times. If invalid response reoccurs, do action 1.
8. Issue receive operation up to 6 times, then take Action 1.
The value of M should be equal to or greater than N.
The value of N should be a minimum of 7.
When M or N is reached, the error is a permanent error. On permanent errors, the program should cancel the job and
tell the operator the nature of the error condition by means of an error message. Operator intervention is then
required and the procedure is either to completely restart the job or to continue with the next job.
Note: A processor check stop causes an immediate cancel.
Figure 9-6. BSC Adapter Error Conditions and Recovery Procedures
Data Communications
9-15
BSC ERROR RECORDING
Parts of three sectors are reserved on the disk for
recording BSe errors in either the BSe error history
table or the BSe error counter table (also contains
counts of I/O activity). The error history table (Figure
9-7) contains a 14-byte entry for each of the last 25
temporary or permanent BSe errors.
The error counter table (Figure 9-8) is a 92-byte entry
containing the latest job totals and the cumulative totals
for 14 different items. All counts in the error counter
table are put into the table by SSP routines at
end-of-job time.
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
Length
in Bytes
0
1
Command code
1
1
Command modifier
2
1
Sense information byte 0
3
1
Error retry count
4
1
Binary synchronous communication completion code
5
2
Terminal address
7
3
Date (yymmdd) on which the error occurred
A
4
Time of day (measured in timer units)
Figure 9-7.
esc
Description
Error History Table
(
9-16
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
Length
in Bytes
0
2
Number of job text blocks transmitted
2
4
Number of cumulative text blocks transmitted
6
2
Number of job text blocks received
8
4
Number of cumulative text blocks received
C
3
Da.te (yymmdd) o~ which the liD counters in this table
were reset through E RAP
F
1
Reserved
10
2
Number of job negative acknowledgements received
12
4
Number of cumulative negative acknowledgements received
16
2
Number of job data checks
18
4
Number of cumulative data checks
1C
2
Number of job forward aborts received
1E
4
Number of cumulative forward aborts received
22
2
Number of job aborts received
24
4
Number of cumulative aborts received
28
2
Number of job adapter checks during transmission
2A
4
Number of cumulative adapter checks during transmission
2E
2
Number of job adapter checks while receiving
30
4
Number of cumulative adapter checks while receiving
34
2
Number of job invalid responses received
36
4
Number of cumulative invalid responses received
3A
2
Number of job inquiries received as affirmative acknowledgements
3C
4
Number of cumulative inquiries received as affirmative
acknowledgements
Description
Figure 9-8 (Part 1 of 2). BSC Error Counter Table
)
Data Communications
9-17
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
Length
in Bytes
40
2
Number of job lost data errors
42
4
Number of cumulative lost data errors
46
2
Number of job disconnect time-outs
48
4
Number of cumulative disconnect time-outs
4C
2
Number of job receive time-outs
4E
4
Number of cumulative receive time-outs
52
2
Number of job transmission time-outs
54
4
Number of cumulative transmission time-outs
58
3
Date (yymmdd) on which the error counters in this
table were reset through E RAP
58
1
Reserved
Description
Figure 9-8 (Part 2 of 2). BSC Error Counter Table
(
9-18
SDLC ADAPTER
The starting flag, in addition to starting the frame, starts
the transmission error checking. The ending flag ends
the frame and the checking of transmission errors.
When more than one frame is transmitted, the ending
flag of one frame may also be the starting flag of the
next frame.
Data that is transmitted or received by the SDLC
(synchronous data link control) adapter is read from or
written into main storage without any code translation.
No code (such as EBCDIC or ASCII) is used; SDLC is
bit oriented.
For a frame to be valid, the number of bits in a frame
between a starting and ending flag must be equal to or
more than 32 bits. These 32 bits include the address
field (8 bits), the control field (8 bits), and the frame
check field (16 bits). The information field is not always
permitted (see Figure 9-11), or it may be missing.
In addition, no control characters (such as ACK, NAK,
and WACK used for BSC) are used to control the data
link. The data link is controlled by the control field,
which is part of the SDLC frame.
SDLC Frame
The SDLC frame transmits every command, every
response, and all information over a data link using
SDLC procedures. Each frame has a fixed format
containing a starting flag (F), a station address field (A),
a control field (C), an information field (I), which is
optional, a frame check field (FC), and an ending flag
(F). Therefore, those frames that contain an information
field have a format of F, A, C, I, FC, F.
Figure 9-9 and the following paragraphs describe each
field in the SDLC frame.
Flag (F, -, -, -, -, F)
There are two flags, starting and ending, for every SDLC
frame. Both flags have a binary configuration of
Continuous Flags: Continuous flags are automatically
transmitted after a transmit-only operation has been
completed or after a valid addressed frame is received
with the poll bit on.
Station Address (F, A, -, -, -, F)
The address field is an 8-bit field that follows the
starting flag in the frame format. This field always
identifies System/34; the primary station is never
identified in the address field.
System /34, in addition to recognizing its own address,
can recognize the broadcast address (all 1's). The
address field must be recognized before a frame can be
received. The station address is specified in the line
definition byte of the lOB.
01111110.
~------------------------------------------------------------Frame------------------------------------------------------~
Ending
Starting
C
A
F
I
Address
(secondary
station)
Flag
I
I
I
I
Control
Variable
Length
Information
Field
(may be
absent)
I
f...--8 bits---..l
I
I
I"
1
16 bits
F
FC
.1
I
I
I
Frame Check
I
I
I
I
I
I.....- - - - 1 6 bits - - - - . - ...~II
II
I
I
Flag
I
I
I
Figure 9-9. SOLe Transmission Frame
Data Communications
9-19
Control Field (F, A, C, -, -, F)
Counting Sequenced Frames: When a station sends a
sequenced frame (a frame with an information transfer
format), the frame is counted in bits 4-6 of the control
field. Similarly, when an error-free sequenced frame is
received, the frame is counted in bits 0- 2 of the control
field. (Note that frames with a supervisory format
contain the count of the frames received. This count is
kept to ensure that frames are in sequence.)
The control field is an 8-bit field that follows the station
address field in the frame format. Both System/34 and
the primary station use the control field to transfer
information. System/34 also uses the control field for
supervisory and nonsequenced responses; the primary
station uses it for supervisory and nonsequenced
commands.
The Nr count is always the count of the next expected
frame; the next incoming Ns count is equal to the Nr
count. If the incoming Ns count compares with the Nr
count, the frame is in sequence and the Nr count
advances. If the counts do not compare, the frame is
out of sequence and the Nr count does not advance.
The control field (see Figure 9-10) contains:
• Information for encoding the commands (from the
primary station) and the responses (from System/34)
needed to control the data link. (See SOLC
Commands and Responses later in this chapter for a
description of the commands and responses used by
System/34.)
Up to seven frames may be sent before the receiving
station must report its Nr count to the transmitting
station. All transmitted frames must be kept by the
transmitting station because a sequencing or line error
may make it necessary to send them again.
• A format identifier (bit 7 or bits 6 and 7) indicating if
the frame is of the information transfer, supervisory,
or nonsequenced format.
Information Field (F, A, C, I, -, F)
• A P/F (poll/final) bit. A poll bit is sent by the
primary station to permit the transmission of data
from System/34. System/34 sends a final bit in
response to the poll bit when it has completed
transmitting data. The P/F bit is always bit 3 of the
control field.
This field, which follows the control field in the frame
format, is not always included in the frame. Normally, a
frame with an information transfer format contains an
information field.
The information field can have any format or content;
that is, it can include any bit sequence. However, the
length of the field must be an integer number of 8- bit
bytes not to exceed the buffering limits of the stations.
• Either the sequence number of the frames that have
been sent (Ns) or the sequence number of the next
expected frame (Nr), or both.
'0
2
3
'4
Information Transfer Format
Nr'
P/F I
Supervisory Format
I
Nr
P/F
Nonsequenced Format
I
I
I
4
Poll/Final Bit
, Nr is the sequence number of the next expected frame.
Ns is the sequence number of the last frame that was sent.
J Codes for supervisory commands/responses.
4Codes for nonsequenced commands/responses.
2
Figure 9-10. SOLC Control Field Format
9-20
P/F
)
5
I
I
I
Ns
I
4
7
0
I
I
I
I
6
l
I
I
I
0
Frame Check Field (F, A, C, I, FC, F)
Information Transfer Format
The frame check field, which precedes the ending flag
of the frame, contains 16 bits for the purpose of
checking transmission accuracy. It supplies a cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) to all bits in the frame except
for the flags.
This format is identified with a 0 in bit 7 of the control
field. Frames with this format are used to transfer
information over a data link.
SOLC Commands and Responses
The commands and responses are specified in the bit
configuration of the control field. When System/34
receives one of these bit configurations from the primary
station, it is a command; when System/34 transmits to
the primary station, it is a response.
Only those frames containing this format are sequenced;
therefore, the control field must contain both the Nr and
the Ns count fields (see Figure 9-10). These two count
fields ensure that sequenced frames are not lost or
duplicated. When a sequenced frame is transmitted, the
transmitting station increases its Ns count by 1. The
station receiving a valid, sequenced frame increases its
Nr count by 1. For more information on the Nr and Ns
counts, see Counting Sequenced Frames earlier in this
chapter.
The SDLC commands and responses are given in Figure
9-11 ; they are described with each of the three control
field formats in the following paragraphs.
Format
(See
Note.)
Control Field Bit
Configu ration
4 5 6 7
0 1 2i 3
I
Acronym
Command Response
I
X
X
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
RR
RNR
X
X
X
X
X
I-Field
Not
Permitted Command/Response Description
J
~
I
Nr
I
P/F
Ns
:
0
Sequenced information frame
I
!
S
Nr
Nr
P/F
P/F
X
X
Ready to receive
Not ready to receive
i
I
NS
X
0 1 0
P
0 0 1 1
DISC
0 1 1
F
0 0 1 1
NSA
1 0 0
P
0 0 1 1
SNRM
X
1 1 1 P/F
1 0 0 F
0 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
TEST
CMDR
X
X
X
1 0 1 P/F
0 0 0 F
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
XID
DM
X
X
X
i
X
X
X
X
System/34 cannot receive or
transmit information frames.
System/34 acknowledges
DISC or SNRM.
System/34 can transmit
on command.
Tests the transmission of data.
A nonvalid command was received
by System/34; must receive a
DISC or SNRM.
Exchange station identification.
. System/34 is offline.
Note: I = Information, S = Supervisory, and NS = Nonsequenced
Figure 9-11. SOLC Commands and Responses
Data Communications
9-21
Supervisory Format
Bits 6 and 7 of the control field identify this format;
they contain a 0 and a 1, respectively. The format is
used to acknowledge information frames or to report a
busy condition.
Bits 4 and 5 of the control field are used to encode the
commands and the responses. The supervisory
commands and responses are:
• RR (receive ready): Used as a command or a
response. The transmitting station acknowledges the
sequenced frames through the Nr count minus 1.
This command / response also indicates that the
transmitting station is ready to receive.
• RNR (receive not ready): Used as a command or a
response. The transmitting station sends RNR to
indicate a temporarily busy condition in which no
frames that need buffer space can be received.
Sequenced frames through Nr minus 1 are
acknowledged.
Nonsequenced Format
This format is identified with 1's in bits 6 and 7 of the
control field. It is used to perform data link control
functions. Communications using the nonsequenced
format are not sequence-checked; they do not use the
Nr and Ns count field.
Excluding bit 3 (P / F) and bits 6 and 7 (format identifier),
the other five bits are used for encoding the
nonsequenced commands and responses. There are
some nonsequenced commands that need specific
nonsequenced responses from System/34. These
commands are SNRM (set normal response mode),
DISC (disconnect), TEST, and XID (exchange station
identification). A response from System/34 to one of
these commands will occur before any other supervisory
or information transfer format response.
If more than one nonsequenced command is received by
System/34 before a response, the additional commands
(more than one) are ignored. The response is to the first
command received.
9-22
The commands and responses in the nonsequenced
format for System/34 are:
• DISC (disconnect): This command places the
receiving System/34 in a disconnected state.
System/34 should respond with an NSA
(nonsequenced acknowledgment); it should also
disable the adapter when a DISC command is
received. No information field is permitted with the
disconnect command.
• NSA (nonsequenced acknowledgment): This is an
affirmative response to an SNRM or DISC command;
it acknowledges that the command was received. No
information field is permitted with the NSA response.
• SNRM (set normal response mode): This command
places System/34 in a normal response mode
(NRM). System/34 remains in NRM until it receives
a DISC command. The expected response to an
SNRM command is NSA. A System/34 in NRM
cannot transmit until it receives a frame with the poll
bit on.
• TEST: This is a command from the primary station or
a response from System/34. The primary station
starts one round-trip transmission of test data to
which System/34 responds; that is, the data that is
sent to System/34 with a TEST command is normally
returned with a TEST response from System/34
(unless the data was too long for the buffer, in which
case the data is not returned). This
command/response can contain an information field.
The information field of the TEST response must be
the same as the information field of the TEST
command.
• CMDR (command reject): This is a response to an
invalid command received by System/34. System/34
repeats the CMDR response until an SNRM or DISC
command is received.
A command is invalid if:
The command is not used at the receiving station.
The information field is too long for the buffer space
that was permitted (except for the TEST command).
The Nr count is out of range.
An information field was sent with a command that
does not permit an information field.
A CMDR response includes an information field that
gives the reason for the rejected command. The format
of this field includes:
In NOM, System/34 normally responds with OM
(disconnected mode) unless it receives an SNRM, DISC,
TEST, or XID command.
First byte-A duplicate of the control field of the
command that caused the CMDR response.
SOLC Transmission States
Second byte-The receiving station's Nr and Ns count
fields as they were before sensing the reason for the
CMDR.
There are four transmission states for an SDLC data
link-active, disconnect, idle, and transient. The data link
can be in only one state at anyone time.
Third byte-(OOOOwxyz)
Active
State
0000 = Pad characters.
w = The Nr sequence count in byte 1 is out of
range.
x = The information field was too long. (This bit
is mutually exclusive with bit z.)
y = Received an information field that was not
permitted. (Bit z must be on with this bit.)
z = An invalid command was received.
• XID (exchange station identification): This
command/response is used by the primary station as
a command to request station identification from the
addressed System/34. The primary station can also
give its own identification to the addressed
System/34. System/34 uses this
command/response only in response to a received
XID command.
• OM (disconnected mode): This response is
transmitted to the primary station to indicate that
System/34 is in a disconnected state (normal
disconnect mode), and System/34 requests an online
status. No information field is permitted with this
response.
SOLC Response Modes
There are two response modes for a System/34 using
SDLC procedures-normal response mode (NRM) and
normal disconnect mode (NDM). In NRM, System/34
can transmit if it has received a frame with the poll bit
on; more than 1 frame can be transmitted. The last
frame transmitted can have the final bit on, or a
supervisory frame (RR or RNR), with the final bit, can
follow the last information frame. Once a frame is
transmitted with the final bit on, System/34 cannot
transmit again until it receives another frame with the
poll bit on.
When the data link is in the active state, a station is
transmitting or receiving data. Flags are used to activate
or maintain the active state. Once System/34 is in the
active state, it must remain active until it sends a frame
with the final bit on or until it must abort a frame.
Disconnect
State
In the disconnect state when the data link is not
operational; no transmissions are possible. The primary
station does not monitor the data link for incoming
transmissions.
Idle
State
In the idle state, the data link is operational but there
are no data transmissions. When a station does not
have the priority to transmit that station goes to the idle
state.
Also, when 15 or more consecutive 1 bits are sensed,
the data link goes to the idle state.
Transient
State
When the data link is in the transient state, a station is
getting ready to transmit; this is known as turnaround
delay. The delay starts when a station sets the request
to send signal on, and ends when the modem supplies
the clear to send signal.
Data Communications
9-23
SOLC Input/Output Block
Each SOLe adapter operation is specified by an
input/ output block (lOB) located in main storage. The
lOB, issued by the supervisor call input/output request
instruction, contains all the information needed to
perform a requested operation.
On a transmit operation, an lOB is posted complete if a
frame has been sent with a transmit only or a transmit
final instruction.
An lOB is posted complete for either a transmit or a
receive operation if:
• An abortive disconnect occurs on a switched line.
If more than one operation is to be performed, the lOBs
must be queued by issuing a supervisory call
input/ output request instruction for each operation. At
the end of each operation, the lOB is posted complete
and the next operation on the lOB queue is started. See
Figure 9 .. 12 for a description of the SOLC lOB.
Posting lOBs Complete
A completion code is generated by the SOLC adapter
when it becomes necessary to inform the system
program of empty or full transmit/receive buffers.
. Completion codes are also generated when an operation
ends or as a result of an error condition during a
transmit or receive operation.
On a receive operation, an lOB is posted complete if:
• A sin~le valid addressed frame is sensed.
• An addressed invalid frame is sensed.
• An addressed valid frame is sensed but with wrong
frame· checking.
" The inactivity timer has timed out.
• An adapter check has occurred.
9·24
• A buffer overrun occurs.
• The transmit data buffer length is 0 on a transmit
operation, or the receive data buffer length is 0 on a
receive operation and the trailing flag or abort
condition is recognized. Once the receive data buffer
length is 0, there is no more data transferred to
storage but the adapter continues to collect frame
check characters on the incoming data while
monitoring for a trailing flag or an abort condition.
(The receive and transmit data buffer lengths are
decreased by the SOLC adapter as data is received or
transmitted.)
• An adapter check has occurred.
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
a
IBM
Program
Label
SIOBECM
Length
in Bytes
Description
Event control mask
Hex Meaning
80
40
SIOBHCMP
Do not skip indicator.
Data buffer address is real.
Completion code
Hex Meaning
80
40
10
01
Active: Set on by control storage when processing the lOB, and
set off by control storage when processing is complete. If this bit is
on, processing of the lOB is not permitted.
Complete: Set on by control storage when the lOB is complete;
set off by main storage. If this bit is on, processing of the lOB
is not permitted.
Hold: Set on by control storage when processing the lOB. Set
on by main storage to inhibit processing of the lOB i the supervisor
call test/set command is used to set this bit from main storage.
Error detected: Set on if any bit in status byte a is on.
2
SIOBPARM
Parameter byte
3
SIOBO
Command (0) code
Bits
Bits
a 1 2 3 = Attachment address
4 5 6 7 = Command type
a a a a
a a a 1
a a 1 a
a a 1 1
a 1 a a
a 1 a 1
a
a
1 1 a
1 1 1
Control
Receive
Transmit/receive: When the transmit operation ends;
processing of the lOBs will continue from :the beginning of the queue; a receive lOB must be at the
beginning of the queue.
Receive initial
Transmit final
Transmit only
Reservea
Receive delayed
Note: The SO LC control storage program does not check the validity
of the command code . .The program decodes the command from only
the low-order 3 bits and proceeds with the operation. Where the
low-order 3 bits are defined to be reserved, the operation defaults to a
receive operation.
Figure 9-12 (Part 1 of 3). SOLe lOB
Data Communications
9-25
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
4
IBM
Program
Label
SIOBR
Length
in Bytes
1
Description
Command modifier
When the command (0) code is hex 0:
CO = Control enable
80 = Control disable
When the command "(0) code is not hex 0, the command modifier bits
are reserved.
5
SIOBSTA@
1
Station address: Address field in the SD LC frame that identifies
System/34.
6
SIOBBUF@
2
Data buffer address: Points to the beginning of the data buffer.
8
SIOBBUFL
2
Data buffer length: Defines the number of bytes in the data buffer.
A
SIOBSTO
Hex
Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
Time-out
Frame check
Adapter check
Buffer overrun (receive)
Invalid frame
Abortive disconnect
Not data set ready
Idle time-out (primary station)
B
SIOBST1
1
Status byte 1 (reserved)
C
SIOBDEA
2
Data end address: Indicates the last position of the buffer (plus 1
position) that was used at the completion of a transmit or receive
command.
E
SIOBSTAT
2
Reserved
10
SIOBTCB
2
Task control block address
12
SIOBOUE
1
Oueue identification
Figure 9-12 (Part 2 of 3). SOLe lOB
9-26
Statu s byte 0
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
13
IBM
Program
Label
SIOBLDEF
Length
in Bytes
1
Description
Line definition byte
Hex Meaning
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
14
SIOBRES
4
Half rate is selected.
Internal clock is needed.
IBM modem is installed.
Answer tone must be supplied by data terminal equipment.
Standby line is selected.
Multipoint line is selected.
Switched data terminal ready line is selected.
Nonswitched line is selected.
Reserved
Figure 9-12 (Part 3 of 3). SOLe lOB
Main Storage Data Areas
Receive Buffer
The transmit buffer and the receive buffer are main
storage data areas used by SDLe when data is
transmitted or received over the data link.
The receive buffer, shown in Figure 9-14, contains the
control field and information field received in one frame.
During the receive operation, the SDLC adapter fills the
receive buffer one byte at a time with data received on
the data link.
Transmit Buffer
The transmit buffer, shown in Figure 9-13, contains the
control field and information field for one frame to be
transmitted by the SOLe adapter. During the transmit
operation, the adapter reads and transmits one byte at a
time from the transmit buffer.
The data buffer address (DBA) and the transmit data
buffer length must be specified in the SOLe lOB, and
the data to be transmitted must be stored in the buffer
before the transmit operation is issued_
DBA
Transmit Data Buffer Length
Control
Information
The data buffer address (DBA) and the receive data
buffer length must be specified in the SOLe lOB before
the receive operation is issued.
DBA
Receive Data Buffer Length
Control
Information
Figure 9-14. Receive Buffer at Start of Receive Operation
Figure 9-13. Transmit Buffer at Start of Transmit
Operation
Data Communications
9-27
SDLC OPERATIONS
Receive Operation
All operations on the data link are controlled by
input/ output blocks issued by supervisor call
input/output request instructions.
The receive operation causes the SOLe adapter to start
the inactivity counter and to load the receive buffer with
data received on the data link.
Enable/Disable SDLC
When a receive operation has been completed, the lOB
is posted complete. At this time the status bits in the
completion code byte can be checked.
The enable SOLe operation enables the SOLe adapter
and sets on the' data terminal ready' line to the modem
if a nonswitched network configuration or a switched
OTR (data terminal ready) configuration is specified in
the line definition byte of the lOB.
Transmit Only Operation
The disable SOLe operation' disables the SOLe adapter
and sets off the 'data terminal ready' line to the modem.
The 'power on reset', 'system reset', or 'IPL' line also
disables the SOLe adapter and sets off the 'data
terminal ready' line.
Receive Initial Operation
The receive initial operation causes an SOLe initialization
sequence to be performed and the first frame received
to be loaded into the receive buffer. The data line
selected (switched OTR or nonswitched) determines the
type of initialization sequence.
Receive Initial Operation (Switched DTR Network)
On a switched OTR network, the receive initial operation
causes the SOLe adapter to wait for the 'data set ready'
line to be set on. When the 'data set ready' line is set
on, the SOLe adapter (1) starts the inactivity counter, (2)
generates an answer tone if one is needed, and (3)
loads the receive buffer with the data received on the
data link.
The transmit only operation causes the SOLe adapter to
transmit the data in the transmit buffer. When the
transmit operation has been completed, the adapter
holds the line in the active state by sending continuous
flag bytes until another transmit operation starts. The
transmit only instruction lets the adapter transmit
continuous frames without any receive operations
between the frames.
When the transmit operation has been completed, the
lOB is posted complete. At this time the status bits in
the completion code byte can be checked.
Transmit Operation (Poll/Final Bit On)
The transmit operation causes the SOLe adapter to
transmit the data in the transmit buffer and prepare for
line turnaround. The transmit operation is then followed
by a receive operation.
When the transmit operation has been completed, the
lOB is posted complete. At this time the completion
code can be checked. An lOB for a receive command
must be on the queue.
Transmit Final Operation
When the receive operation is completed, the lOB is
posted complete. At this time the bits in the completion
code byte can be checked.
Receive Initial Operation (Nons witched Network)
The transmit final operation causes the SOLe adapter to
(1) transmit the data in the transmit buffer and (2)
generate the completion code. This operation can be
used when no response is needed to a final transmitted
message. When the lOB is posted complete, the
completion code can be checked.
On a nonswitched network, the receive initial operation
causes the SOLe adapter to load the receive buffer with
the data received on the data link. The adapter does not
start the inactivity counter.
When the receive operation is completed, the lOB is
posted complete. At this time the bits in the completion
code byte can be checked.
9-28
(
Receive Delayed Operation
The receive delayed operation queues receive operations
which are not to be executed immediately to the SOLC
adapter. A transmit operation is needed before a receive
delayed is executed. After a transmit operation is
issued, executed, and posted complete, the adapter will
execute the queued receive delayed. This operation
ensures there is a receive available as soon as the
transmit is complete.
When the receive operation is completed, the lOB is
posted complete. At this time the bits. in the completion
code byte can be checked.
SOLe STATUS BYTES
The results of a transmit or a receive operation can be
determined by checking the status bytes of the SOLC
lOB. Figure 9-15 and the following paragraphs describe
each bit of these status bytes.
Byte 0
Bit
Meaning
Bit Set On When:
o
Time-out
The activity timer is completed.
Frame check
A valid addressed frame is detected with an invalid frame check.
2
Adapter check
A character was not moved to or from main storage before the next
character had to be moved to accomodate the line.
3
Receive buffer
overrun
The receive buffer was not long enough to accomodate the incoming
frame.
4
Invalid frame
Any of the following occurs:
• A flag is detected off a byte boundary.
• An ending flag is detected within 32 bits of the starting flag.
• An abort sequence is detected.
• An idle condition is detected between a starting flag and an enqing flag.
5
Abortive disconnect
The data set ready line comes on and then goes off on a switched line.
6
Oata set not ready
An operation end interrupt is generated on a leased line if 'data set
ready' is not on or does not come on 3 seconds after a supervisor call
is issued.
Byte 1-Not used
Bytes 2 and 3-0ata end address
Figure 9-15. SOLe Status Bytes
Data Communications
9-29
Inactivity Timer
Abortive Disconnect: An abortive disconnect occurs
when the ' data set ready' line goes not active on a
switched line; bit 5 of status byte 0 is set on.
The inactivity timer is used by the SDLC adapter to
prevent long periods of inactivity that might result from
an error condition.
Error conditions causing inactivity let the timer run out
(time-out), and a completion code to be generated with
the time-out status bit set (bit 0 of status byte 0).
The timer is started at the start of a receive operation.
If a complete frame (valid or not valid) is not received in
32 seconds (time of the inactivity timer), the time-out
condition is posted.
Adapter Checks
Adapter checks can occur on a receive operation or a
transmit operation. On a receive operation, an adapter
check occurs if another character is received before the
preceding character is sensed. On a transmit operation,
a check occurs if it is time to transmit a character but
no character was loaded into the transmit buffer.
An adapter check on a receive operation is identified by
bit 3 of status byte 0; bit 2 of status byte 0 identifies an
adapter check on a transmit operation.
Data Set (Not) Ready: An operation end interrupt is
generated on a leased line if ' data set ready' is not on
or does not come on in three seconds after a supervisor
call is issued.
ZERO BIT INSERTION/DELETION
Zero bit insertion / deletion ensures that bit streams that
are the same as the flag are not transmitted in the
address, control, information, and frame check fields of
the frame; this is done in transmit mode by inserting a
binary 0 bit into the data stream after five consecutive 1
bits (see Figure 9-16).
In receive mode, a 0 bit following five consecutive 1 bits
is deleted. If the bit (call it bit 6) following five
consecutive 1 bits is also a 1 bit, the bit stream is either
a flag or an error. The next bit must be checked to
determine if the data stream is a flag or an error. If the
next bit (call it bit 7) is a 0 bit, the bit stream is received
as a flag but a 1 bit indicates an error.
Invalid Frame: A frame is invalid if any of the following
occur after a starting flag is sensed on a receive
operation:
An ending flag is sensed in less than 32 bits after a
starting flag was sensed.
A flag is sensed off a byte boundary.
An abort sequence is sensed.
An idle condition occurs.
An invalid frame is identified· by bit 4 of status byte O.
Address
Control
~
~
11111111
\
11000000
Flag
Transm itted/Received ~
01111110
Bit Stream
Bit Stream with Zero
Insertion/Deletion
01111110
111110111
Inserted/Deleted Zeros
Note: No D's are inserted in the flag field.
Figure 9-16. Zero Bit Insertion/Deletion
9-30
)
\
\
110000000
J
11111011
11110010
I
\
\
\
\
Information
\
/
/
\
111110011111010010
)
)
NRZI TRANSMISSION CODING
Because SDLe is bit oriented, it is important to maintain
bit synchronization. This is the function of NRZI (zeros
complemented transition coding).
NRZI prevents the extended periods of transitionless
data when consecutive 0 bits are transmitted by
changing the state of the data (from + to -, or from - to
+) when transmitting a 0 bit. The data is not changed
when 1 bits are transmitted (see Figure 9-17). As a
result, continuous transitions occur for consecutive 0
bits and no transitions occur for consecutive 1 bits.
Bit Stream
Time Base
Bits
II I II IIIIIII IIII I
1 1 000 0 1 1 1 1 100 1 1 0
Zero inserted after five 1 's.
~
Figure 9-17. NRZI Transmission Coding
Zero bit insertion/deletion causes transitions by
inserting a binary 0 into the data stream after five
consecutive 1 bits. Therefore, a transition must occur
after the transmission of no more than five 1 bits
(except for a flag).
NRZI must be used with modems that are not
synchronous (needing an internal clock) and with
synchronous modems that are sensitive to transitionless
bit streams. If a synchronous modem is being used and
its sensitivity to transition less bit streams cannot be
determined, the user should contact his IBM marketing
representative.
The internal clock must be used with modems (data
sets) that do not supply clocking to the adapter. When
the internal clock and NRZI transmission coding are
both used, sixteen 0 bits are inserted into the data
stream in front of the starting flag. Insertion of these 0
bits supplies 16 transitions that ensure initial bit
synchronization.
Note: All DTEs (data terminal equipment) on the same
data link must use the same encoding/decoding method
(NRZI or non-NRZI). Failure to use the same method
results in no communications between the DTEs.
Data Communications
9-31
SDLC ERROR RECORDING
Parts of three sectors are reserved on the disk for
recording SOLC errors in either the SOLC error history
table or the SOLC error counter table. (The SOLC error
counter table also contains counts of I/O activity.) The
error history table (Figure 9-18) contains a 14-byte
entry for each of the last 25 temporary or permanent
SOLC errors.
The error counter table (Figure 9-19) is a 80-byte entry
containing the latest job totals and the cumulative totals
for twelve different items. The latest job counts for all
nine items are put into the'table by SSP routines at
end-of-job time; the cumulative counts for all nine
items are updated by the SSP routines.
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
Length
in Bytes
Description
0
1
Q-byte of the operation
1
1
Sense information byte 0
2
1
Sense information byte 1
3
1
SD LC control field
4
1
SD LC station address field
5
1
Queue header
6
3
Date (yymmdd) on which the error occurred
9
1
Reserved
A
4
Time of day (measured in timer units)
Figure 9-18. SOLe Error History Table
(
9-32
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
Length
in Bytes
0
2
Number of job information frames transmitted
2
4
Number of cumulative information frames transmitted
6
2
Number of job information frames retransmitted
8
4
Number of cumulative information frames retransmitted
C
2
Number of job information frames received
E
4
Number of cumulative information frames received
12
2
Number of job information frames purged
14
4
Number of cumulative information frames purged
18
2
Number of job total frames transmitted
1A
4
Number of cumulative total frames transmitted
1E
2
Number of job total frames received
20
4
Number of cumulative total frames received
24
3
Date (yymmdd) on which the I/O counters in this table were
reset through E RAP
27
1
Reserved
28
2
Number of job block check errors
2A
4
Number of cumu lative block check errors
2E
2
Number of job invalid frame errors
30
4
Number of cumulative invalid frame errors
34
2
Number of job abortive disconnect time-outs
36
4
Number of cumulative abortive disconnect time-outs
3A
2
Number of job receive time-outs
3C
4
Number of cumulative receive time-outs
40
2
Number of job adapter checks
42
4
Number of cumulative adapter checks
Description
Figure 9-19 (Part 1 of 2). SOLC Error Counter Table
Data Communication:;
9-33
Displacement
of Leftmost
Byte in Hex
Length
in Bytes
46
2
Number of job idle detect time-outs
48
4
Number of cumulative idle detect time-outs
4C
3
Date (yymmdd) on which the error counters in this table
were reset through E RAP
4F
1
Reserved
Figure 9-19 (Part 2 of 2). SOLC Error Counter Table
9-34
Description
Appendix A. Instruction Fonnats
Type
Op Code
04
06
07
08
OA
08
OC
00
OE
OF
I
14
16
17
18
1A
18
1C
10
1E
1F
24
26
27
28
2A
28
2C
20
2E
2F
I
i2Addr
lOp
I I
Q
I·
Direct
Operand 1
I
Operand 2
6 bytes
j
Direct Indexed
I I
Op
Q
I·
I Operand 1 I 02
5 bytes
1
·1
XR1
j
t2Addr
lOp
I I
Q
I·
Direct Indexed
Operand 1
I
·1
t2Addr
I I
5 bytes
Type
Op Code
D2
·1
XR2
44
46
47
48
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
54
56
57
58
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
64
66
67
68
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
Direct
lop
1 Q
I Operand 1 1
1-4bytes-!
74
75
76
78
79
7A
78
7C
70
1
I ndexed Direct
I I I I
Op
Q
I'
01
I
Operand 2
5 bytes
'
I
XR1
\-2 Addr
I Indexed
I
Op I Q
1
01
I
1
02 1
1 - - 4 bYtes--1
XR1
XR1
\-2 Addr
I
1
Indexed
I I I I I
Op
Q
01
02
1-4bYtes-!
XR1
j1 Addr 34
35
36
38
39
3A
38
3C
3D
t
2Addr
XR2
l [
1 Addr
Indexed
o-p--'TI-Q---r-I-01""""'1
r-I
1-3bYtes~
XR1
Instruction Formats
A-1
Type
Op Code
84
86
87
88
8A
88
8C
8D
8E
8F
r-
1Op I
I
0
---1
2 Addr
Indexed Direct
I D1 I Operand 2 I
rI
2 Addr
Indexed
1
I
9A
1 Op 1 0
~4 bYtes----l
8A
88
8C
8D
A·2
Direct
I Op I 0 I Address
~4bytes
DO
D2
EO
E2
FO
F1
F2
F4
F5
F6
I
•I
Indexed
I I I
0
lOp
D2
+XR1
J-3bytes-1
Indexed
0
lOp
D2
+XR2
!-3bytes-l
I I I
lOp
.
I0 IR I
1-3bytes-1
I D1 I D2 I
r
2
I
A7
84
85
86
88
89
Type
XR2 XR1
A4
A6
AC
AD
AE
AF
CO
C2
XR2
98
9C
A8
AA
A8
I
1~'---5 bytes---+i·1
94
96
97
98
9D
9E
9F
Op Code
Addr
1
Indexed
I Op I 0 I D1 I D2 I
l---4 bYtes----l
XR2 XR2
I
t~e::r
--'-0----1-D1--',
O-p
r--I
1-3bytes-I
XR2
j. ...
Appendix B. EBCDIC Code Meanings
Below are definitions of the column headings used in
the following table.
Hex Value. The internal EBCDIC code used by the
system, expressed as a hexadecimal notation.
Binary Value. The internal EBCDIC code expressed as a
binary notation.
Print Graphic. The graphic printed by this system for the
EBCDIC code shown. For example, graphics printed for
the EBCDIC code stored in the print data field
correspond to the binary values shown in the chart.
Hence, a main storage value of hex 6C is printed as %.
Display Screen Graphic. This column shows the graphic
that is displayed on the display screen for the
associated main storage EBCDIC code shown in the
binary value column. Amain storage value of hex 50 is
displayed as &.
EBCDIC Code Meanings
B-1
Hex
Value
Binary
Value
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
00001110
00001111
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00011000
00011001
00011010
00011011
00011100
00011101
00011110
00011111
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
00100100
00100101
00100110
00100111
00101000
00101001
00101010
00101011
00101100
00101101
00101110
00101111
B-2
Print
Graphic
Display
Screen
Graphic
'*
Hex
Value
Binary
Value
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
00110100
00110101
00110110
00110111
00111000
00111001
00111010
00111011
00111100
00111101
00111110
00111111
01000000
01000001
01000010
01000011
01000100
01000101
01000110
01000111
01001000
01001001
01001010
01001011
01001100
01001101
01001110
01001111
01010000
01010001
01010010
01010011
01010100
01010101
01010110
01010111
01011000
01011001
01011010
01011011
01011100
01011101
01011110
01011111
Print
Graphic
Display
Screen
Graphic
Blank
Blank
q,
q,
<
<
(
(
+
+
I
&
I
&
!
$
*
!
$
*
)
)
,
I
,
I
Hex
Value
Binary
Value
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
80
81
82
83
01100000
01100001
01100010
01100011
01100100
01100101
01100110
01100111
01101000
01101001
01101010
01101011
01101100
01101101
01101110
01101111
01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
01110100
01110101
01110110
01110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
01111100
01111101
01111110
01111111
10000000
10000001
10000010
10000011
10000100
10000101
10000110
10000111
10001000
10001001
10001010
10001011
10001100
10001101
10001110
10001111
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
80
8E
8F
Print
Graphic
Display
Screen
Graphic
-
-
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
,
%
-
%
>
>
?
?
,
-
,
:
#
#
@
@
=
=
"
"
a
a
,
,
b
b
c
c
d
d
e
e
f
f
9
h
i
9
h
i
Hex
Value
Binary
Value
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
90
9E
9F
AO
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BO
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5 .
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BO
BE
BF
10010000
10010001
10010010
10010011
10010100
10010101
10010110
10010111
10011000
10011001
10011010
10011011
10011100
10011101
10011110
10011111
10100000
10100001
10100010
10100011
10100100
10100101
10100110
10100111
10101000
10101001
10101010
10101011
10101100
10101101
10101110
10101111
10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111
Print
Graphic
Display
Screen
Graphic
j
k
I
m
n
j
k
I
m
n
0
0
p
p
q
q
r
r
•
'"
'"
s
s
t
u
t
u
v
v
w
x
y
w
x
y
z
z
EBCDIC Code Meanings
B-3
Hex
Value
Binary
Value
CO
C1
C2
C3
11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111
11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
11010110
11010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
11011110
11011111
11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
11100110
11100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
11101100
11101101
11101110
11101111
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
EO
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
8-4
Print
Graphic
Display
Screen
Graphic
{
{
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
G
H
I
}
J
}
J
K
L
M
N
K
L
M
N
0
P
0
P
Q
Q
R
R
\
\
S
S
T
T
U
U
V
W
V
W
X
X
Y
Y
Z
Z
Hex
Value
Binary
Value
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
11110000
11110001
11110010
11110011
11110100
11110101
11110110
11110111
11111000
11111001
11111010
11111011
11111100
11111101
11111110
11111111
Print
Graphic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Display
Screen
Graphic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Appendix C. Powers of Two Table
2"
"
2"11
0
2
4
8
2
3
1.0
0.5
0.25
0.125
16
32
64
128
4
5
6
7
0.0625
0.031 25
0.015625
0.0078125
256
512
1 024
2048
8
9
10
11
0.003906 25
0.001 953 125
0.000 976 562 5
0.000488281 25
4096
8192
16384
32768
12
13
14
15
0.000244140625
0.000 122 070 312 5
0.000 061 03515625
0.000030517 578 125
65536
131 072
262144
524288
16
17
18
19
0.000015 258 789062
0.000007629394531
0.000 003 814 697 265
0.000 001 907 348 632
1 048576
2097 152
4194304
8388608
20
21
22
23
0.000000 953 674 316 406 25
0.000000476837 158203 125
0.006000238418 579 101 562 5
QOOOOO011920928955078125
16777 216
33554432
67108864
134 217 728
24
25
26
27
0.000 000 059 604
0.000000 029 802
0.000000014901
0.000000 007 450
268435456
536870912
1073741824
2147483648
28
29
30
31
0.000000003725290298461 9140625
0.000000001 862645 149 230957 031 25
0.000 000 000 931 322574615478515625
0.000000 000 465 661 287307 739257812 5
4294967296
8589934592
17 179 869 184
34359738368
32
33
34
35
0.000 000
0.000000
0.000 000
0.000000
000
000
000
000
232 830 643 653 869 628 906 25
116 415 321 826 934 814 453 125
058 207 660 913 467 407 226 562 5
029103830456733703613281 25
68719476736
137 438 953 472
274 877 906 944
549755813888
36
37
38
39
0.000000
0.000 000
0.000 000
0.000 000
000
000
000
000
014551 915228366851
007 275 957 614 183 425
003 637 978807 091 712
001 818989403545856
644
322
161
580
5
25
625
812 5
775 390 625
387 695312 5
19384765625
596 923 828 125
806
903
951
475
640625
320 312 5
660 156 25
830 078 125
Powers of Two Table
C-1
C-2
Appendix D. Binary and Hexadecimal Number Notations
BINARY NUMBER NOTATION
HEXADECIMAL NUMBER SYSTEM
A binary number system uses a base of two. A
base-of-two number system can be compared with the
base-of-ten (decimal) number system.
Binary Number
Equivalent
Decimal
Number
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
100
101
110
111
1000
1001
is necessary.
The hexadecimal number system fills this need. Because of
the Simple relationship of hex to binary, numbers can be
converted from one system to another by inspection. The
base or radix of the hexadecimal system is 16. This means
there are 16 symbols: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, A, B, C, D,
E, and F. The letters A, B, C, D, E, and F represent the
10-base system values of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15, respectively.
Four binary positions are equivalent to one hex position.
The following table shows the comparable values of the three
number systems:
Example of a Decimal Number
Example of a Binary Number
\s: ~~\~~\~\}
I
jl \
i
~
\
It has been noted that binary numbers require about three
times as many positions as decimal numbers to express the
equivalent number. This is not much of a problem to the
computer; however, in talking and writing or in communicating with the computer, these binary numbers are bulky.
A long string of l's and O's cannot be effectively transmitted
from one individual to another. Some shorthand method
~~~E ~:~:~::
or :
+ 1000 = decimal
1001 = decimal
~~
o
8
9
The decimal number system allows counting to lOin
each position, from units to tens to hundred.s to
thousands, etc. The binary system allows counting to
two in each position. CE panel displays are in binary
form: a bit light on is indicated by a 1; a bit light off is
indicated by a zero.
Decimal
Binary
Hex
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Binary and Hexadecimal Number Notations
0-1
· At this point all 16 symbols have been used, and a carry to
the next higher position of the number is necessary. For
example.:
Decimal
16
17
18
19
20
21
etc
Binary
Hex
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
etc
10
11
12
13
14
15
etc
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
Remember that the computer deals only with binary. However, an operator can look at a series of lights on the computer console showing binary 1's and a's (for example:
0001 1110 0001 0011) and say that the lights represent
the hex value of 1 E13. This is easier to state than the string
of 1 's and a's.
D-2
Appendix E. Hexadecimal-Decimal Conversion Tables
The tables in this appendix provide direct conversion of
decimal and hexadecimal numbers in these ranges:
Hex
Decimal
000 to FFF
0000 to 4095
For numbers outside the range of the tables, add the
following values to the table figures:
Hex
Decimal
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
4096
8192
12288
16384
20480
24576
28672
32768
Three-position hex values composed of the numerals listed at
the side and top of the tables convert to the decimal values
listed inside the tables. Decimal values inside the tables
convert to hex values composed of the coordinate numerals
at the side and top of the tables.
Hexadecimal-Decimal Conversion Tables
E-1
nr-O
00 !
01 -02 -0.3 -04 -05 -0.6 -07 -08 -09 -DA-08OC-00-OE --
0000
0016
0032
0048
0064
0080
0096
0112
0.128
0144
0160
0176
0192
020.8
0224
OF-- 0240
10-- 0256
11 -- 0272
12 -- 0288
13 -- 0.30.4
14 -- 0320
15 -- 0336
16 -- 0352
17 -- 0368
18 -- 0384
19 -- 0400
lA-- 0416
18 -- 0.432
lC-- 0.448
10-- 0464
1 E-- 0480
1 F-- 0496
r
20 !
21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -2A-28 -2C-20-2E-2F __
30 -31 -32 -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 -38 -39 -3A-38 -3C -3D -3E -3F --
E-2
~O
0512
0528
0544
0560.
0576
0592
0608
0624
0640
0.656
0672
0688
0704
0720
0736
0752
0768
0784
0800
0816
0832
0848
0864
0880
0896
0912
0928
0944
0960
0976
0992
1008
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
C
0
E
F
0001
0017
0033
0049
0065
0081
0097
0113
0129
,0145
0161
0177
0193
020.9
0225
0241
0.257
0273
0289
0305
0321
0337
0353
0369
0385
0401
0417
0433
0449
0465
0481
0497
0002
0018
0034
0050
0066
0.082
0.098
0114
0130
0146
0162
0178
0194
0210
0226
0242
0.258
0274
0290
0306
0322
0338
0354
0370
0386
0402
0418
0434
0450
0466
0482
0.498
0003
0019
0035
0051
0067
0083
0099
0115
0131
0147
0163
0179
0195
0211
0227
0243 .
0259
0.275
0.291
0.307
0.323
0.339
0355
0371
0.387
0403
0419
0435
0451
0.467
0483
0499
0004
0020
0036
0052
0068
0084
0100
0116
0132
0148
0164
0180
0196
0212
0228
0.244
0.260
0276
0.292
0.308
0.324
0.340.
0.356
0.372
0.388
0.404
0.420
0.436
0.452
0468
0.484
0.500.
0005
0021
0.037
0053
0069
0085
010·1
0117
0133
0149
0165
0181
0197
0213
0229
0.245
0261
0.277
0293
0.309
0.325
0341
0357
0.373
0389
0.405
0.421
0.437
0453
0469
0.485
0.501
0006
0022
0038
0054
0070
0086
0102
0118
0134
0150
0166
0182
0198
0214
0230
0246
0262
0278
0294
0310
0326
0342
0358
0374
0390
0406
0422
0438
0454
0470
0486
0.50.2
0007
0023
0039
0055
0071
0087
0103
0119
0135
0151
0167
0183
0199
0215
0231
0247
0.263
0279
0295
0311
0327
0343
0359
0375
0.391
040.7
0423
0439
0.455
0.471
0.487
0.503
0008
0024
0040
0056
0072
0088
0104
0120
0136
0152
0168
0184
0200
0216
0232
0248
0264
.0280
0296
0312
0328
0344
0360
0376
0392
0.40.8
0424
0.440
0456
0472
0488
050.4
0009
0025
0.041
0057
0073
0089
0105
0121
0137
0153
0169
0185
0201
0217
0233
0249
0265
0281
0297
0313
0329
0345
0361
0377
0393
0409
0.425
0441
0457
0473
0489
050.5
0010
0026
0042
0058
0074
0090
0106
0122
0138
0154
0.170
0186
0202
0218
0234
0250.
0266
0282
0298
0314
0330
0346
0362
0378
0.394
0410
0.426
0442
0458
0474
0490
0.506
0011
0027
0043
0059
0075
0091
0107
0123
0139
0155
0171
0187
0203
0219
0235
0251
0267
0283
0299
0315
0331
0347
0363
0.379
0.395
0411
0.427
0.443
0459
0475
0491
0.507
0012
0028
0044
0.060
0076
0092
0108
0.124
0140
0156
0172
0188
0204
0220
0236
0.252
0268
0284
030.0
0316
0332
0348
0.364
0.380
0396
0412
0428
0444
0460.
0.476
0492
050.8
0013
0029
0045
0061
0077
0093
0109
0125
0141
0157
0173
0189
0205
0221
0237
0253
0269
0285
030.1
0317
0333
0349
0365
0.381
0397
0413
0429
0445
0461
0477
0493
0.50.9
0014
0030
0046
0062
0078
0094
0110
0126
0142
0158
0174
0190
0206
0222
0238
0254
0.270.
0286
0.30.2
0318
0334
0350.
0366
0382
0.398
0414
0430
0.446
0.462
0.478
0494
0510
0015
0031
0047
0063
0079
00.95
0111
0127
0143
0159
0175
0191
020.7
0223
0239.
0.255
0271
0287
030.3
0319
0.335
0351
0.367
0383
0399
0415
0431
0447
0463
0479
0495
0.511
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
C
0
E
F
0513
0529
0545
0561
0577
0593
0609
0625
0641
0657
0673
0689
0705
0721
0737
0753
0769
0785
0801
0817
0833
0849
0865
0881
0897
0913
0929
0945
0961
0977
0993
100.9
0514
0530
0546
0562
0578
0594
0610
0626
0642
0658
0674
0690
0706
0722
0738
0754
0770
0786
0802
0818
0834
0850
0866
0882
0898
0914
0930
0946
0962
0978
0994
1010
0515
0531
0547
0.563
0579
0.595
0611
0627
0643
0659
0675
0691
0707
0723
0739
0755
0771
0787
0803
0819
0835
0851
0867
0.883
0899
0915
0931
0947
0963
0979
0995
1011
0.516
0.532
0.548
0.564
0580
0.596
0612
0628
0.644
0660
0676
0692
0708
0.724
0.740.
0756
0.772
0788
0804
0820
0836
0852
0868
0884
090.0
0916
0932
0948
0964
0980.
0.996
1012
0517
0.533
0549
0565
0.581
0597
0613
0.629
0645
0.661
0677
0693
0709
0725
0741
0757
0773
0789
0805
0821
0837
0.853
0869
0885
0901
0917
0933
0949
0965
0981
0.997
1013
0518
0534
0550
0566
0582
0598
0614
0630
0646
0662
0678
0694
0710
0726
0742
0758
0774
0790.
0806
0822
0838
0854
0.870
0886
0902
0918
0934
0950
0.966
0982
0.998
1014
0.519
0.535
0551
0567
0.583
0599
0615
0631
0647
0663
0679
0.695
0711
0727
0743
0759
0775
0791
080.7
0.823
0.839
0855
0871
0887
0.903
0919
0935
0.951
0.967 .
0983
0.999
1015
0520
0.536
0552
0568
0584
0600
0616
0632
0648
0664
0680
0696
0712
0728
0744
0760
0776
0792
0.808
0824
0.840
0.856
0872
0888
0904
0920
0936
0952
0968
0.984
1000.
1016
0521
0537
0553
0569
0585
0601
0617
0.633
0649
0.665
0681
0697
0713
0729
0745
0761
0777
0793
080.9
0825
0841
0857
0873
0889
090.5
0921
0937
0953
0969
0985
1001
1017
0522
0538
0554
0.570
0586
0602
0618
0634
0650
0666
0682
0698
0714
0730
0746
0762
0778
0794
0810
0826
0842
0858
0874
0890
0906
0922
0938
0954
0970
0986
100.2
1018
0523
0539
0.555
0571
0587
0603
0619
0635
0651
0667
0683
0699
0715
0731
0747
0763
0779
0.795
0811
0827
0.843
0859
0875
0.891
0907
0923
0939
0955
0971
0987
1003
1019
0524
0540
0556
0572
0588
0604
0620
0636
0652
0668
0684
0700
0716
0.732
0748
0764
0780.
0796
0812
0828
0844
0860
0876
0892
090.8
0924
0940
0956
0972
0988
10.04
1020
0525
0.541
0.557
0573
0589
0605
0621
0637
0653
0.669
0.685
0701
0717
0733
0749
0765
0.781
0797
0813
0829
0845
0861
0877
0893
0909
0925
0941
0957
0973
0989
100.5
1021
0526
0542
0558
0574
0590
060.6
0622
0638
0654
0.670
0686
070.2
0.718
0734
0750
0766
0782
0798
0814
0830
0846
0862
0878
0894
0910
0926
0942
0958
0974
0990
10.0.6
1022
0527
0543
0.559
0575
0591
0607
0623
0639
0655
0671
0687
070.3
0719
0735
0751
0767
0783
0799
0815
0831
0847
0863
0879
0895
0911
0927
0.943
0959
0975
0.991
100.7
10.23
3
r .-0
40 ~
41 -42 43 4445 -46 -47 -48 -49 -'
4A -48 -4C 40 -4E -4F -50 -51 -52 -53 54 -55 -5657 58 59 5A 58 5C 50 5E -5F -
1024
1040
1056
1072
1088
1104
1120
1136
'1152
1168
1184
1200
1216
1232
1248
1264
1280
1296
1312
1328
1344
1360
1376
1392
1408
1424
1440
1456
1472
1488
1504
1520
Jj -0
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
C
0
E
F
1025
1041
1057
1073
1089
1105
1121
1137
1153
1169
1185
1201
1217
1233
1249
1265
1281
1297
1313
1329
1345
1361
1377
1393
1409
1425
1441
1457
1473
1489
1505
1521
1026
1042
1058
1074
1090
1106
1122
1138
1154
1170
1186
1202
1218
1234
1250
1266
1282
1298
1314
1330
1346
1362
1378
1394
1410
1426
1442
1458
1474
1490
1506
1522
1027
1043
1059
1075
1091
1107
1123
1139
1155
1171
1187
1203
1219
1235
1251
1267
1283
1299
1315
1331
1347
1363
1379
1395
1411
1427
1443
1459
1475
1491
1507
1523
1028
1044
1060
1076
1092
1108
1124
1140
1156
1172
1188
1204
1220
1236
1252
1268
1284
1300
1316
1332
1348
1364
1380
1396
1412
1428
1444
1460
1476
1492
1508
1524
1029
1045
1061
1077
1093
1109
1125
1141
1157
1173
1189
1205
1221
1237
1253
1269
1285
1301
1317
1333
1349
1365
1381
1397
1413
1429
1445
1461
1477
1493
1509
1525
1030
1046
1062
1078
1094
1110
1126
1142
1158
1174
1190
1206
1222
1238
1254
1270
1286
1302
1318
1334
1350
1366
1382
1398
1414
1430
1446
1462
1478
1494
1510
1526
1031
1047
1063
1079
1095
1111
1127
1143
1159
1175
1191
1207
1223
1239
1255
1271
1287
1303
1319
1335
1351
1367
1383
1399
1415
1431
1447
1463
1479
1495
1511
1527
1032
1048
1064
1080
1096
1112
1128
1144
1160
1176
1192
1208
1224
1240
1256
1272
1288
1304
1320
1336
1352
1368
1384
1400
1416
1432
1448
1464
1480
1496
1512
1528
1033
1049
1065
1081
1097
1113
1129
1145
1161
1177
1193
1209
1225
1241
1257
1273
1289
1305
1321
1337
1353
1369
1385
1401
1417
1433
1449
1465
1481
1497
1513
1529
1034
1050
1066
1082
1098
1114
1130
1146
1162
1178
1194
1210
1226
1242
1258
1274
1290
1306
1322
1338
1354
1370
1386
1402
1418
1434
145r
1466
1482
1498
1514
1530
1035
1051
1067
1083
1099
1115
1131
1147
1163
1179
1195
1211
1227
1243
1259
1275
1291
1307
1323
1339
1355
1371
1387
1403
1419
1435
1451
1467
1483
1499
1515
1531
1036
1052
1068
1084
1100
1116
1132
1148
1164
1180
1196
1212
1228
1244
1260
1276
1292
1308
1324
1340
1356
1372
1388
1404
1420
1436
1452
1468
1484
1500
1516
1532
1037
1053
1069
1085
1101
1117
1133
1149
1165
1181
1197
1213
1229
1245
1261
1277
1293
1309
1325
1341
1357
1373
1389
1405
1421
1437
1453
1469
1485
1501
1517
1533
1038
1054
1070
1086
1102
1118
1134
1150
1166
1182
1198
1214
1230
1246
1262
1278
1294
1310
1326
1342
1358
1374
1390
1406
1422
1438
1454
1470
1486
1502
1518
1534
1039
1055
1071
1087
1103
1119
1135
1151
1167
1183
1199
1215
1231
1247
1263
1279
1295
1311
1327
1343
1359
1375
1391
1407
1423
1439
1455
1471
1487
1503
1519
1535
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
C
0
E
F
1540
1556
1572
1588
1604
1620
1636
1652
1668
1684
1700
1716
1732
1748
1764
1780
1796
1812
1828
1844
1860
1876
1892
1908
1924
1940
1956
1972
1988
2004
2020
2036
1541
1557
1573
1589
1605
1621
1637
1653
1669
1685
1701
1717
1733
1749
1765
1781
1797
1813
1829
1845
1861
1877
1893
1909
1925
1941
1957
1973
1989
2005
2021
2037
1542
1558
1574
1590
1606
1622
1638
1654
1670
1686
1702
1718
1734
1750
1766
1782
1798
1814
1830
1846
1862
1878
1894
1910
1926
1942
1958
1974
1990
2006
2022
2038
1543
1559
1575
1591
1607
1623
1639
1655
1671
1687
1703
1719
1735
1751
1767
1783
1799
1815
1831
1847
1863
1879
1895
1911
1927
1943
1959
1975
1991
2007
2023
2039
1544
1560
1576
1592
1608
1624
1640
1656
1672
1688
1704
1720
1736
1752
1768
1784
1800
1816
1832
1848
1864
1880
1896
1912
1928
1944
1960
1976
1992
2008
2024
2040
1545
1561
1577
1593
1609
1625
1641
1657
1673
1689
1705
1721
1737
1753
1769
1785
1801
1817
1833
1849
1865
1881
1897
1913
1929
1945
1961
1977
1993
2009
2025
2041
1546
1562
1578
1594
1610
1626
1642
1658
1674
1690
1706
1722
1738
1754
1770
1786
1802
1818
1834
1850
1866
1882
1898
1914
1930
1946
1962
1978
1994
2010
2026
2042
1547
1563
1579
1595
1611
1627
1643
1659
1675
1691
1707
1723
1739
1755
1771
1787
1803
1819
1835
1851
1867
1883
1899
1915
1931
1947
1963
1979
1995
2011
2027
2043
1548
1564
1580
1596
1612
1628
1644
1660
1676
1692
1708
1724
1740
1756
1772
1788
1804
1820
1836
1852
1868
1884
1900
1916
1932
1948
1964
1980
1996
2012
2028
2044
1549
1565
1581
1597
1613
1629
1645
1661
1677
1693
1709
1725
1741
1757
1773
1789
1805
1821
1837
1853
1869
1885
1901
1917
1933
1949
1965
1981
1997
2013
2029
2045
1550
1566
1582
1598
1614
1630
1646
1662
1678
1694
1710
1726
1742
1758
1774
1790
1806
1822
1838
1854
1870
1886
1902
1918
1934
1950
1966
1982
1998
2014
2030
2046
1551
1567
1583
1599
1615
1631
1647
1663
1679
1695
1711
1727
1743
1759
1775
1791
1807
1823
1839
1855
1871
1887
1903
1919
1935
1951
1967
1983
1999
2015
2031
2047
-~ 1536 1537 1538 1539
----------------------------
1552
1568
1584
1600
1616
1632
1648
1664
1680
1696
1712
1728
1744
1760
1776
1792
1808
1824
1840
1856
1872
1888
1904
1920
1936
1952
1968
1984
2000
2016
2032
15!;l3
1569
1585
1601
1617
1633
1649
1665
1681
1697
1713
1729
1745
1761
1777
1793
1809
1825
1841
1857
1873
1889
1905
1921
1937
1953
1969
1985
2001
2017
2033
1554
1570
1586
1602
1618
1634
1650
1666
1682
1698
1714
1730
1746
1762
1778
1794
1810
1826
1842
1858
1874
1890
1906
1922
1938
1954
1970
1986
2002
2018
2034
1555
1571
1587
1603
1619
1635
1651
1667
1683
1699
1715
1731
1747
1763
1779
1795
1811
1827
1843
1859
1875
1891
1907
1923
1939
1955
1971
1987
2003
2019
2035
Hexadecimal-Decimal Conversion Tables
E-3
[ i-O
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
!
--
------
--
----------
--
--------------
r
AO!
A1 -A2 -A3 -A4 -A5 -A6 -A7 -A8 -A9 -AA -AB -AC -AD -AE -AF -BO -B1 -B2 -B3 -B4 -B5 -B6 -B7 -B8 -B9 -BA -BB -BC -BD -BE -BF --
E-4
2048
2064
2080
2096
2112
2128
2144
2160
21'76
2192
2208
2224
2240
2256
2272
2288
2304
2320
2336
2352
2368
2384
2400
2416
2432
2448
2464
2480
2496
2512
2528
2544
~O
2560
2576
2592
2608
2624
2640
2656
2672
2688
2704
2720
2736
2752
2768
2784
2800
2816
2832
2848
2864
2880
2896
2912
2928
2944
2960
2976
2992
3008
3024
3040
3056
1
2
3
4
5
6
2049
2065
2081
2097
2113
2129
2145
2161
2177
2193
2209
2225
2241
2257
2273
2289
2305
2321
2337
2353
2369
2385
2401
2417
2433
2449
2465
2481
2497
2513
2529
2545
2050
2066
2082
2098
2114
2130
2146
2162
2178
2194
2210
2226
2242
2258
2274
2290
2306
2322
2338
2354
2370
2386
2402
2418
2434
2450
2466
2482
2498
2514
2530
2546
2051
2067
2083
2099
2115
2131
2147
2163
2179
2195
2211
2227
2243
2259
2275
2291
2307
2323
2339
2355
2371
2387
2403
2419
2435
2451
2467
2483
2499
2515
2531
2547
2052
2068
2084
2100
2116
2132
2148
2164
2180
2196
2212
2228
2244
2260
2276
2292
2308
2324
2340
2356
2372
2388
2404
2420
2436
2452
2468
2484
2500
2516
2532
2548
2053
2069
2085
2101
2117
2133
2149
2165
2181
2197
2213
2229
2245
2261
2277
2293
2309
2325
2341
2357
2373
2389
2405
2421
2437
2453
2469
2485
2501
2517
2533
2549
2054
2070
2086
2102
2118
2134
2150
2166
2182
2198
2214
2230
2246
2262
2278
2294
2310
2326
2342
2358
2374
2390
2406
2422
2438
2454
2470
2486
2502
2518
2534
2550
2055
2071
2087
2103
2119
2135
2151
2167
2183
2199
2215 '
2231
2247
2263
2279
2295
2311
2327
2343
2359
2375
2391
2407
2423
2439
2455
2471
2487
2503
2519
2535
2551
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
2561
2577
2593
2609
2625
2641
2657
2673
2689
2705
2721
2737
2753
2769
2785
2801
2817
2833
2849
2865
2881
2897
2913
2929
2945
2961
2977
2993
3009
3025
3041
3057
2562
2578
2594
2610
2626
2642
2658
2674
2690
2706
2722
2738
2754
2770
2786
2802
2818
2834
2850
2866
2882
2898
2914
2930
2946
2962
2978
2994
3010
3026
3042
3058
2563
2579
2595
2611
2627
2643
2659
2675
2691
2707
2723
2739
2755
2771
2787
2803
2819
2835
2851
2867
2883
2899
2915
2931
2947
2963
2979
2995
3011
3027
3043
3059
2564
2580
2596
2612
2628
2644
2660
2676
2692
2708
2724
2740
2756
2772
2788
2804
2820
2836
2852
2868
2884
2900
2916
2932
2948
2964
2980
2996
3012
3028
3044
3060
2565
2581
2597
2613
2629
2645
2661
2677
2693
2709
2725
2741
2757
2773
2789
2805
2821
2837
2853
2869
2885
2901
2917
2933
2949
2965
2981
2997
3013
3029
3045
3061
2566
2582
2598
2614
2630
2646
2662
2678
2694
2710
2726
2742
2758
2774
2790
2806
2822
2838
2854
2870
2886
2902
2918
2934
2950
2966
2982
2998
3014
.3030
3046
3062
2567
2583
2599
2615
2631
2647
2663
2679
2695
2711
2727
2743
2759
2775
2791
2807
2823
2839
2855
2871
2887
2903
2919
2935
2951
2967
2983
2999
3015
3031
3047
3063
2568
2584
2600
2616
2632
2648
2664
2680
2696
2712
2728
2744
2760
2776
2792
2808
2824
2840
2856
2872
2888
2904
2920
2936
2952
2968
2984
3000
3016
3032
3048
3064
2569
2585
2601
2617
2633
2649
2665
2681
2697
2713
2729
2745
2761
2777
2793
2809
2825
2841
2857
2873
2889
2905
2921
2937
2953
2969
2985
3001
3017
3033
3049
3065
2570
2586
2602
2618
2634
2650
2666
2682
2698
2714
2730
2746
2762
2778
2794
2810
2826
2842
2858
2874
2890
2906
2922
2938
2954
2970
2986
3002
3018
3034
3050
3066
2571
2587
2603
2619
2635
2651
2667
2683
2699
2715
2731
2747
2763
2779
2795
2811
2827
2843
2859
2875
2891
2907
2923
2939
2955
2971
2987
3003
3019
3035
3051
3067
2572
2588
2604
2620
2636
2652
2668
2684
2700
2716
2732
2748
2764
2780
2796
2812
2828
2844
2860
2876
2892
2908
2924
2940
2956
2972
2988
3004
3020
3036
3052
3068
2573
2589
2605
2621
2637
2653
2669
2685
2701
2717
2733
2749
2765
2781
2797
2813
2829
2845
2861
2877
2893
2909
2925
2941
2957
2973
2989
3005
3021
3037
3053
3069
2574
2590
2606
2622
2638
2654
2670
2686
2702
2718
2734
2750
2766
2782
2798
2814
2830
2846
2862
2878
2894
2910
2926
2942
2958
2974
2990
3006
3022
3038
3054
3070
2575
2591
2607
2623
2639
2655
2671
2687
2703
2719
2735
2751
2767
2783
2799
2815
2831
2847
2863
2879
2895
2911
2927
2943
2959
2975
2991
3007
3023
3039
3055
3071
7
8
9
2056 2057
2072 2073
2088 2089
2104 2105
2120 2121
2136 2137
2152 2153
2168 2169
2184 2185
2200 2201
2216 2217
2232 2233
2248 2249
2264 2265
2280 ' 2281
2296 2297
2312 2313
2328 2329
2344 2345
2360 2361
2376 2377
2392 2393
2408 2409
2424 2425
2440 2441
2456 2457
2472 2473
2488 2489
2504 2505
2520 2521
2536 2537
2552 2553
A
B
C
D
E
F
2058
2074
2090
2106
2122
2138
2154
2170
2186
2202
2218
2234
2250
2266
2282
2298
2314
2330
2346
2362
2378
2394
2410
2426
2442
2458
2474
2490
2506
2522
2538
2554
2059
2075
2091
2107
2123
2139
2155
2171
2187
2203
2219
2235
2251
2267
2283
2299
2315
2331
2347
2363
2379
2395
2411
2427
2443
2459
2475
2491
2507
2523
2539
2555
2060
2076
2092
2108
2124
2140
2156
2172
2188
2204
2220
2236
2252
2268
2284
2300
2316
2332
2348
2364
2380
2396
2412
2428
2444
2460
2476
2492
2508
2524
2540
2556
2061
2077
2093
2109
2125
2141
2157
2173
2189
2205
2221
2237
2253
2269
2285
2301
2317
2333
2349
2365
2381
2397
2413
2429
2445
2461
2477
2493
2509
2525
2541
2557
2062
2078
2094
2110
2126
2142
2158
2174
2190
2206
2222
2238
2254
2270
2286
2302
2318
2334
2350
2366
2382
2398
2414
2430
2446
2462
2478
2494
2510
2526
2542
2558
2063
2079
2095
2111
2127
2143
2159
2175
2191
2207
2223
2239
2255
2271
2287.
2303
2319
2335
2351
2367
2383
2399
2415
2431
2447
2463
2479
2495
2511
2527
2543
2559
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
C
D
E
F
3072
3088
3104
3120
3136
3152
3168
3184
3200
3216
3232
3248
3264
3280
3296
3312
3328
3344
3360
3376
3392
3408
3424
3440
3456
3472
3488
3504
3520
3536
3552
3568
3073
3089
3105
3121
3137
3153
3169
3185
3201
3217
3233
3249
3265
3281
3297
3313
3329
3345
3361
3377
3393
3409
3425
3441
;3457
3473
3489
3505
3521
3537
3553
3569
3074
3090
3106
3122
3138
3154
3170
3186
3202
3218
3234
3250
3266
3282
3298
3314
3330
3346
3362
3378
3394
3410
3426
3442
3458
3474
3490
3506
3522
3538
3554
3570
3075
3091
3107
3123
3139
3155
3171
3187
3203
3219
3235
3251
3267
3283
3299
3315
3331
3347
3363
3379
3395
3411
3427
3443
3459
3475
3491
3507
3523
3539
3555
3571
3076
3092
3108
3124
3140
3156
3172
3188
3204
3220
3236
3252
3268
3284
3300
3316
3332
3348
3364
3380
3396
3412
3428
3444
3460
3476
3492
3508
3524
3540
3556
3572
3077
3093
3109
3125
3141
3157
3173
3189
3205
3221
3237
3253
3269
3285
3301
3317
3333
3349
3365
3391
3397
3413
3429
3445
3461
3477
3493
3509
3525
3541
3557
3573
3078
3094
3110
3126
3142
3158
3174
3190
3206
3222
3238
3254
3270
3286
3302
3318
3334
3350
3366
3382
3398
3414
3430
3446
3462
3478
3494
3510
3526
3542
3558
3574
3079
3095
3111
3127
3143
3159
3175
3191
3207
3223
3239
3255
3271
3287
3303
3319
3335
3351
3367
3383
3399
3415
3431
3447
3463
3479
3495
3511
3527
3543
3559
3575
3080
3096
3112
3128
3144
3160
3176
3192
3208
3224
3240
3256
3272
3288
3304
3320
3336
3352
3368
3384
3400
3416
3432
3448
3464
3480
3496
3512
3528
3544
3560
3576
3081
3097
3113
3129
3145
3161
3177
3193
3209
3225
3241
3257
3273
3289
3305
3321
3337
3353
3369
3385
3401
3417
3433
3449
3465
3481
3497
3513
3529
3545
3561
3577
3082
3098
3114
3130
3146
3162
3178
3194
3210
3226
3242
3258
3274
3290
3306
3322
3338
3354
3370
3386
3402
3418
3434
3450
3466
3482
3498
3514
3530
3546
3562
3578
3083
3099
3115
3131
3147
3163
3179
3195
3211
3227
3243
3259
3275
3291
3307
3323
3339
3355
3371
3387
3403
3419
3435
3451
3467
3483
3499
3515
3531
3547
3563
3579
3084
3100
3116
3132
3148
3164
3180
3196
3212
3228
3244
3260
3276
3292
3308
3324
3340
3356
3372
3388
3404
3420
3436
3452
3468
3484
3500
3516
3532
3548
3564
3580
3085
3101
3117
3133
3149
3165
3181
3197
3213
3229
3245
3261
3277
3293
3309
3325
3341
3357
3373
3389
3405
3421
3437
3453
3469
3485
3501
3517
3533
3549
3565
3581
3086
3102
3118
3134
3150
3166
3182
3198
3214
3230
3246
3262
3278
3294
3310
3326
3342
3358
3374
3390
3406
3422
3438
3454
3470
3486
3502
3518
3534
3550
3566
3582
3087
3103
3119
3135
3151
3167
3183
3199
3215
3231
3247
3263
3279
3295
3311
3327
3343
3359
3375
3391
3407
3423
3439
3455
3471
3487
3503
3519
3535
3551
3567
3583
-0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
C
D
E
F
3585
3601
3617
3633
3649
3665
3681
3697
3713
3729
3745
3761
3777
3793
3809
3825
3841
3857
3873
3889
3905
3921
3937
3953
3969
3985
4001
4017
4033
4049
4065
4081
3586
3602
3618
3634
3650
3666
3682
3698
3714
3730
3746
3762
3778
3794
3810
3826
3842
3858
3874
3890
3906
3922
3938
3954
3970
3986
4002
4018
4034
4050
4066
4082
3587
3603
3619
3635
3651
3667
3683
3699
3715
3731
3747
3763
3779
3795
3811
3827
3843
3859
3875
3891
3907
3923
3939
3955
3971
3987
4003
4019
4035
4051
4067
4083
3588
3604
3620
3636
3652
3668
3684
3700
3716
3732
3748
3764
3780
3796
3812
3828
3844
3860
3876
3892
3908
3924
3940
3956
3972
3988
4004
4020
4036
4052
4068
4084
3589
3605
3621
3637
3653
3669
3685
3701
3717
3733
3749
3765
3781
3797
3813
3829
3845
3861
3877
3893
3909
3925
3941
3957
3973
3989
4005
4021
4037
4053
4069
4085
3590
3606
3622
3638
3654
3670
3686
3702
3718
3734
3750
3766
3782
3798
3814
3830
3846
3862
3878
3894
3910
3926
3942
3958
3974
3990
4006
4022
4038
4054
4070
4086
3591
3607
3623
3639
3655
3671
3687
3703
3719
3735
3751
3767
3783
3799
3815
3831
3847
3863
3879
3895
3911
3927
3943
3959
3975
3991
4007
4023
4039
4055
4071
4087
3592
3608
3624
3640
3656
3672
3688
3704
3720
3736
3752
3768
3784
3800
3816
3832
3848
3864
3880
3896
3912
3928
3944
3960
3976
3992
4008
4024
4040
4056
4072
4088
3593
3609
3625
3641
3657
3673
3689
3705
3721
3737
3753
3769
3785
3801
3817
3833
3849
3865
3881
3897
3913
3929
3945
3961
3977
3993
4009
4025
4041
4057
4073
4089
3594
3610
3626
3642
3658
3674
3690
3706
3722
3738
3754
3770
3786
3802
3818
3834
3850
3866
3882
3898
3914
3930
3946
3962
3978
3994
4010
4026
4042
4058
4074
4090
3595
3611
3627
3643
3659
3675
3691
3707
3723
3739
3755
3771
3787
3803
3819
3835
3851
3867
3883
3899
3915
3931
3947
3963
3979
3995
4011
4027
4043
4059
4075
4091
3596
3612
3628
3644
3660
3676
3692
3708
3724
3740
3756
3772
3788
3804
3820
3836
3852
3868
3884
3900
3916
3932
3948
3964
3980
3996
4012
4028
4044
4060
4076
4092
3597
3613
3629
3645
3661
3677
3693
3709
3725
3741
3757
3773
3789
3805
3821
3837
3853
3869
3885
3901
3917
3933
3949
3965
3981
3997
4013
4029
4045
4061
4077
4093
3598
3614
3630
3646
3662
3678
3694
3710
3726
3742
3758
3774
3790
3806
3822
3838
3854
3870
3886
3902
3918
3934
3950
3966
3982
3998
4014
4030
4046
4062
4078
4094
3599
3615
3631
3647
3663
3679
3695
3711
3727
3743
3759
3775
3791
3807
3823
3839
3855
3871
3887
3903
3819
3935
3951
3967
3983
3999
4015
4031
4047
4063
4079
4095
r 1-0
CO
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
!
C8
C9
CA
C8
-----
-------
CC -CD -_
CE _
CF -DO -D1 -D2 D3 D4 -D5 -D6 -D7 -D8 -D9 -DA-D8 -DC
DD
DE
DF
----
r
EO !
E1 -E2 -E3 -E4 -E5 -E6 E7 -E8 E9 -EA -E8 -EC -ED -EE -EF -FO -F1 -F2 -F3 -F4 -F5 -F6 -F7 F8 -F9 -FA -F8 -FC -FD -FE -FF --
3584
3600
3616
3632
3648
3664
3680
3Q96
3712
3728
3744
3760
3776
3792
3808
3824
3840
3856
3872
3888
3904
3920
3936
3952
3968
3984
4000
4016
4032
4048
4064
4080
Hexadecimal-Decimal Conversion Tables
E-5
E-6
Appendix F. Polling and Addressing Characters for Tributary Stations
Polling and addressing characters must be used together
in certain pairs; that is, once a polling character is
selected, the complementary addressing character is
determined; once an addressing character is selected,
the complementary polling character is determined.
The pairs of valid polling and addressing characters for
both EBCOIC and ASCII are as follows:
EBCDIC
Polling
Character
Hexadecimal
Representation
Addressing
Character
Hexadecimal
Representation
BB
CC
00
EE
C2C2
C3C3
C4C4
C5C5
SS
TT
E2E2
E3E3
E4E4
E5E5
FF
GG
C6C6
C7C7
C8C8
C9C9
WW
yy
ZZ
E6E6
E7E7
E8E8
E9E9
0101
0202
0303
0404
11
22
33
44
Fl F1
F2F2
F3F3
F4F4
HH
\I
JJ
KK
LL
MM
NN
00
PP
QQ
RR
0505
0606
0707
0808
0909
UU
VV
XX
55
66
77
88
99
F5F5
F6F6
F7F7
F8F8
F9F9
ASCII
Polling
Character
Hexadecimal
Representation
Addressing
Character
Hexadecimal
Representation
AA
BB
CC
DO
EE
4141
4242
4343
4444
4545
aa
bb
cc
dd
ee
6161
6262
6363
6464
6565
FF
GG
4646
4747
4848
4949
4A4A
ff
gg
hh
ii
jj
6666
6767
6868
6969
6A6A
4B4B
4C4C
4040
4E4E
4F4F
kk
II
mm
nn
6B6B
6C6C
6060
6E6E
6F6F
HH
\I
JJ
KK
LL
MM
NN
00
pp
OQ
RR
SS
TT
UU
VV
WW
XX
yy
ZZ
5050
5151
5252
5353
5454
5555
5656
5757
5858
5959
5A5A
00
pp
qq
rr
ss
tt
uu
vv
ww
xx
yy
zz
7070
7171
7272
7373
7474
7575
7676
7777
7878
7979
7A7A
To specify polling or addressing characters in the ADDR-nn
parameter of the SETR utility control statement or the
OVERRIDE command statement format, give the hex
representation of one of the addressing characters. It will
be duplicated by the system to provide two characters. At
the same time, the corresponding polling characters will
be determined.
For example, ADD R-E7 is given to specify the EBCD IC
addressing characters XX and the corresponding polling
characters GG. ADD R-70 is given to specify the ASCII
addressing characters pp and the corresponding polling
characters PP.
Polling and Addressing Characters for System/32 Tributary Stations
F-1
The ASCII and EBCDIC character sets are shown in the
following charts. The BSCA control characters recognized
by the system are listed in Chapter 9.
ASCII Codes
Main Storage Bit Positions 0, 1, 2, 3
Main Storage
Bit Positions
4,5,6,7
F-2
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111
Hex
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0000
0
NUL
DLE
SP
0
@
P
\
0001
1
SOH
DCl
!
1
A
0
a
q
0010
2
STX
DC2
"
2
B
R
b
r
0011
3
ETX
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
0100
4
EOT
DC4
$
4
D
T
d
t
0101
5
ENO
NAK
%
5
E
U
e
u
0110
6
ACK
SYN
&
6
F
V
f
v
0111
7
BEL
ETB
7
G
W
9
w
1000
8
BS
CAN
(
8
H
X
h
x
1001
9
HT
EM
)
9
I
Y
i
Y
1010
A
LF
SUB
*
J
Z
j
z
1011
B
VT
ESC
+
K
[
k
{
1100
C
FF
FS
<
L
\
:
1101
D
CR
GS
=
M
1
m
1110
E
SO
RS
>
N
I
n
1111
F
SI
US
?
0
-
-
/
0
P
I
I
}
,.....,
DEL
1000 1001
8
9
1010 1011
A
B
1100 1101 1110 1111
C
D
E
F
Main Storage Bit Positions 0, 1, 2, 3
Main Storage
Bit Positions
4,5,6,7
0000 0001
Hex
0
1
0010 0011
2
3
0000
0
NUL DLE
DS
0001
1
SOH
DC1
SOS
0010
2
STX DC2
0011
3
ETX DC3 WUS
0100
4
SEL RES
0101
5
HT
0110
6
RNL
0111
7
DEL
1000
8
GE
CAN
SBS
1001
9
RLF
EM
IT
NL
FS
0100 0101
4
5
SP
&
0110 0111
8
7
6
1000 1001
/
SYN
9
1010 1011
A
B
1100 1101
1110 1111
C
D
E
F
{
}
\
0
a
j
,....,
A
j
b
k
5
B
K
S
2
c
I
t
C
L
T
3
1
BYP
PP
d
m
u
D
M
U
4
LF
TRN
e
n
v
E
N
V
5
f
0
w
F
0
W
6
g
p
x
G
P
X
7
h
q
y
H
0
Y
8
i
r
z
I
R
Z
9
NBS
ETB
%
POC
%ESC EOT
BS
1010
A
RPT UBS
1011
B
VT
CU1
FMT CU3
1100
C
FF
IFS
DC4
SM
REF
\
¢
<
!
I
I
$
,
Tt-
*
%
@
LVM
.....
J'
rl
,
1101
D
CR
IGS
ENO NKA
(
)
-
1110
E
SO
IRS
ACK
+
;
>
=
1111
F
S1
IUS
BEL SUB
I
I
?
"
y
EO
Duplicate Assignment
ONU2318
Polling and Addressing Characters for Tributary Stations
F-3
(
F-4
Glossary
absolute value: The numeric value of a real number
irrespective of sign.
address translation registers: Sixty-four 1-byte
registers (32 for program-level tasks and 32 for I/O
use) that are used to convert the addresses specified by
the program into the main storage addresses in which
the program actually resides.
execute: To cause a program, utility, instruction, or
other machine function to be performed. During
execution, information is processed according to
machine language instructions to produce the desired
output.
initial program load: A sequence of events that loads
the system programs and prepares the system for
execution of jobs.
alternative: Offering or expressing a choice.
integer: A whole number.
assembler: A computer program that prepares an
object program from a source program written in a
symbolic source language in which there is a one to one
correspondence between the instruction formats and
data formats coded and those used by the computer.
batch: A group of jobs to be run on a computer at one
time with the same program.
invalid character: A character that a machine or
program does not recognize.
keylock: A key-operated switch on the display station,
which can be used to prevent unauthorized users from
operating the system.
keystroke: The act of pressing one key.
bidirectional printing: The ability of a printer with a
print head to print successively left to right and right to
left.
buffer: (1) Storage or programming that compensates
for a difference in rate of flow or data, or time of
occurrence of events, when transmitting data from one
part of a computer system to another. (2) An area of
storage that is temporarily reserved for use in
performing an input/output operation, into which data is
read or from which data is written.
logical instructions: Instructions that operate according
to the logic of the system; for example, the compare
logical immediate instruction.
main storage processor: Hardware that executes
system instructions in main storage.
mask: A pattern that controls the keeping, deleting, or
testing of portions of another pattern of characters.
megabyte: One million bytes.
control processor: A group of programs that execute
control storage instructions that determine channel data
transfers and main storage allocation.
menu: A displayed list of items (usually jobs) from
which the operator makes a selection.
element: The smallest addressable unit of an array or
table.
mutually exclusive: Two or more items, only one of
which can be active or true at one time.
error recovery procedure: A set of instructions that
helps to isolate and, where possible, to recover from
equipment errors. The instructions are often used with
programs that record the statistics of machine
malfunctions.
null character: A character, hex 00, which blanks the
rest of the print line.
object program: A set of instructions in machine
language. The object program is produced by a compiler
from a source program.
Glossary
G-1
operand: A quantity of data that is operated on, or the
address in a computer instruction of data to be operated
on.
parameter: (1) A variable that is assigned a particular
value for a specific purpose or process. (2) A value
specified in a command statement or a control
statement.
polling: (1) (SDLC) A technique by which each of the
stations sharing a communications line IS periodically
interrogated to determine whether it requires servicing.
(2) (SSC) In a multipoint environment, an invitation to
send, transmitted from the primary station to a specific
tributary station.
post: To enter a unit of information into a record, or to
note the completion of an event.
register: A storage device or circuit that stores those
limited elements of data required for the immediate
execution of I/O, storage, processing, and control
functions, or a group of latches or polarity hold circuits
used to store one or two bytes of information.
restore: To bring back or put back into a former or
original state.
sector: An area on a disk track or diskette track
reserved to record a unit of data.
significant digit: For the insert and test characters
instruction, any of the digits 1 through 9.
transient area: An area of main storage or control
storage used for temporary storage of transient routines.
transient routine: A routine that is permanently stored
on disk and is loaded into the transient area when
needed for execution.
twinaxial: A cable made of two twisted wires inside a
shield.
G-2
Index
abortive discor:mect, SOLC 9-30
action control element build and queue
SVC 3-78
active state, SDLC 9-23
adapter checks, SDLC 9-30
adapter, data communications
BSC 9-3
SDLC 9-19
add logical characters instruction 3-8
add to register instruction 3-12
add zoned decimal instruction 3-4
Address/ Data switches 2-4
address recall register 1-8
address translation registers 1-9
addressing 1-4
base displacement 1-6
direct 1-5
disk 6-7
diskette 8-4, 8-8
AID byte 7-5
alternative sector assignment, disk 6-17
alternative sector processing, disk 6-17
alternative tracks, disk 6-1
arithmetic machine instructions 3-2
assign supervisor call 3-46
assign system queue space SVC 3-49
asynchronous task ready check SVC 3-71
asynchronous task wait SVC 3-59
audible alarm 7-3
automatic answering 9-2
base displacement addressing 1-6
binary format 1-3
branch on condition instruction 3-35
BSC (binary synchronous communications)
adapter 9-3
character synchronization 9-10
control characters 9-7, 9-8, 9-9
disconnect operation 9-13
enable/ disable operation 9-10
error recording 9-16
error recovery 9-14
framing the message 9-10
initialization sequences 9-10
input/ output block 9-4
ITB operation 9-12
pad characters 9-9
receive initial delayed operation 9-11
receive initial operation 9-10
receive operation 9-13
status bytes 9-13
transmit and receive operation 9-11
transparent operation 9-13
2-second timeout 9-13
burst mode 1-8
capacity
disk 1-1
main storage 1-1
carriage return command 5-17
CE panel 2-3
CE subpanel 2-3
CE track, disk 6-1
character format 1-3
character set, display station 7-2
character synchronization, BSC 9-10
check conditions and status, diskette 8-9
clear table format command 7-27
clear unit command 7-27
clicker 7-3
command instructions 1-6
command key mode 7-13
command keys 7-8, 7-9
commands
printer 5-13
5251
read input fields 7-20
read screen 7-20
reset operator alert indicators 7-21
save screen 7-19
save tables 7 -19
set operator alert indicators 7-20
commands and responses, SDLC 9-21
compare logical characters
instruction 3-30
compare logical immediate
instruction 3-32
console check light 2-2
control characters, BSC 9-7
control commands, 5251 7-19
control field, SDLC frame 9-20
control record field, diskette 8-2
control storage transient scheduler
SVC 3-79
CSIPL switch, disk 6-17
CSIPL, diskette 8-14
. cycle steal mode 1-8
cylinder
disk 6-1
diskette 8-2
damaged track 8-2
data communications 1-3, 9-1
BSC adapter 9-3
BSC operations 9-10
BSC status bytes 9-13
Data-Phone digital service adapter
EIA/CCITT interface 9-1
error recording
BSC 9-16
SOLC 9-32
9-1
Index
X-1
data communications (continued)
internal clock 9-1
lOCH supervisor call 3-77
modems 9-2
networks 9-1
NRZI 9-31
SDLC adapter 9-19
SDLC operations 9-28
SDLC status bytes 9-29
speciai features 9-1
standard features 9-2
transmission rates 9-1
data formats 1-3
data handling machine instructions 3-14
Data-Phone digital service adapter 9-1
data record field, diskette 8-2
data tracks, disk 6-1, 8-1
direct addressing 1-5
disconnect operation, BSC 9-13
disconnect state, SqLC 9-23
disk
addressing 6-7
capacity 1-1
cylinder 6-1
error recovery 6-17
input/ output block 6-3
operations 6-3
sector format 6-2
speed 8-1
status bytes 6-13
surface 6-1
diskette
addressing 8-4, 8-8
cylinder 8-2
damaged track 8-2
error recovery 8-2
initialization 8-2
input/ output block 8-4
lOS supervisor call 3-75
operations 8-4
sector format 8-2
speed 8-1
status bytes 8-10
surface 8-1
1 drive 8-1
2D drive 8-1
Display / Data switches 2-4
display lights 2-5
display station, 5251
commands 7-19
error recovery 7-33
format table 7-27
input fields 7-32
input/output block 7-15
key functions 7-4
modes 7-12
operational characteristics 7-3
orders 7-21
output commands 7-24
output data stream 7-21
physical characteristics 7-1
programming characteristics 7-14
status bytes 7-33
dump main storage/terminate task SVC 3-68
X-2
edit instruction 3-18
EIA/CCITT interface 9-1
enable/ disable operation
BSC 9-10
SDLC 9-28
error counter table, data communications
BSC 9-17, 9-18
SDLC 9-33, 9-34
error history table, data communications
BSC 9-16
SDLC 9-32
error recording, data communications
BSC 9-16
. SDLC 9-32
error recovery
BSC 9-14
disk 6-17
diskette 8-14
display station 7-33
printer 5-18
event post SVC 3-43
event wait SVC 3-42
field address word 7-27
field control word 7-28
check digit 7-30
resequencing 7-28
field format word 7-28
fixed disk lOS SVC 3-75
flag, SDLC frame 9-19
format command 5-17
format table 7-27
formats, instruction 1-6
forms feed command 5-17
four-digit error codes 7-3
frame check field, SDLC frame 9-21
frame, SDLC 9-19
framing the message, BSC 9-10
free assigned areas SVC 3-47
free current request block SVC 3-45
free key mode 7-12
free page SVC 3-58
frequency modulation mode 8-1
general post SVC 3-41
general wait SVC 3-40
get page SVC 3-57
head
disk data 6-1
disk servo 6-1
hexadecimal notation
1-4
I/O transient request SVC 3-77
IBM 1200 bps integrated modem 9-2
IBM 2400 bps integrated modem 9-2
idle state, SOLC 9-23
Immediate Power Off switch 2-2
inactivity timer, SOLC 9-30
index cylinder, diskette 8-2
index register 1 1-8
index register 2 1-8
information field, SOLC frame 9-20
information transfer format, SOLC 9-21
initialization sequences, BSC 9-10
initialization, diskette 8-2
input fields, 5251 7-32, 7-33
input/ output block
BSC 9-4
disk 6-3
diskette 8-4
display station 7-15
printer 5-9
SOLC 9-24
input/output operations 1-9
insert and test characters
instruction 3-20
insert mode 7-14
instruction
action control element build and queue
SVC 3-78
add logical characters 3-8
add to register 3-12
add zoned decimal 3-4
assign SVC 3-46
assign system queue space SVC 3-49
asynchronous task ready check SVC 3-71
asynchronous task wait SVC 3-59
branch on condition 3-35
compare logical characters 3-30
compare logical immediate 3-32
control storage transient scheduler
SVC 3-79
data communications lOCH SVC 3-77
diskette lOS SVC 3-75
dump main storage terminate task
SVC 3-68
edit 3-18
event post SVC 3-43
event wait SVC 3-42
fixed disk SVC 3-75
free assigned area SVC 3-47
free current request block SVC 3-45
free page SVC 3-58
general post SVC 3-41
general wait SVC 3-40
get page SVC 3-57
I/O transient request SVC 3-77
o insert and test characters 3-20
jump on condition 3-37
load address translation registers
SVC 3-51
load index register 3-28
load program mode register 3-39
load register 3-26
log trace information SVC 3-62
instruction (continued)
main storage relocation loader SVC 3-81
main storage transient exit SVC 3-56
main storage transient scheduler
SVC 3-55
move characters 3-16
move hexadecimal character 3-14
move logical immediate 3-22
post action control element SVC 3-61
post action controller status word
SVC 3-50
prepare print buffer SVC 3-72
queue/ dequeue SVC 3-53
resource enqueue/ dequeue SVC 3-66
scan system queue SVC 3-63
sector enqueue/dequeue SVC 3-73
sense Address/Oata switches SVC 3-48
set bits off masked 3-24
set bits on masked 3-23
set program mode register SVC 3-52
set transient area not busy SVC 3-60
store register 3-25
subtract logical characters 3-10
subtract zoned decimal 3-6
supervisor call 3-39
system control block access SVC 3-54
task control block priority queue
SVC 3-70
task post SVC 3-64
task wait SVC 3-65
task work area accesses SVC 3-80
test and set SVC 3-69
test bits off masked 3-34
test bits on masked 3-33
transfer 3-29
transfer control/system transient
SVC 3-44
work station lOCH SVC 3-76
work station printer lOCH SVC 3-76
zero and add zoned 3-2
instruction address register 1-8
instruction formats 1-6
instruction registers 1-8
instruction timings 4-1
instructions
arithmetic 3-2
command 1-6
data handling 3-14
logical 3-30
machine 3-1
one-address 1-6
two-add ress 1-7
intermediate block checking, BSC 9-3
internal clock, data communications 9-1
interrupt mode 1-8
introduction 1-1
invalid frame, SOLC 9-30
lOBs 1-9
ITB operation, BSC 9-12
jump on condition instruction
3-37
Index
X-3
keyboard 7-1
keyboard key functions 7-4
keyboard locked mode 7-14
keys
display station
AID request 7-8
cursor motion 7-10
editing 7-11
signal 7-7
special field 7-12
5211 5-1
lamp test switch 2-5
light
Console Check 2-2
display 2-5
Load 2-1
MSP Running 2-4
Power 2-1
Power Check 2-2
Processor Check 2-2
Stop 2-4
System In Use 2-1
Thermal Check 2-2
lights
5211 operator panel 5-2
5256 operator panel 5-3
line printer 1-1
load address translation registers
SVC 3-51
load index register instruction 3-28
Load light 2-1
load program mode register
instruction 3-39
load register instruction 3-26
Load switch 2-1
log trace information SVC 3-62
logical machine instructions 3-30
machine instructions 3-1
arithmetic 3-2
data handling 3-14
logical 3-30
main storage capacity 1-1
main storage data areas, SDLC 9-27
main storage relocation loader SVC 3-81
main storage transient exit SVC 3-56
main storage transient scheduler SVC 3-55
mode
burst 1-8
cycle steal 1-8
display station 7-12
interrupt 1-8
process 1-8
Mode Selector switch 2-4
models, system 1-2
modems 9-2
X-4
modified frequency modulation mode 8-1
modulus 10/modulus 11 checking 7-31
move characters instruction 3-16
move hexadecimal character instruction 3-14
move logical immediate instruction 3-22
MSIPL switch, disk 6-17
MSIPL, diskette 8-14
MSP Running light 2-4
multipoint networks 9-1
networks, data communications 9-1
new line command 5-17
non sequenced format 9-22
NRZI, data communications 9-31
one-address instructions 1-6
op register 1-8
operating procedures, disk 6-17
operation time, disk 6-8
operational characteristics
printers 5-4
5251 display station 7-14
operations
data communications
BSC 9-10
SDLC 9-28
disk 6-3
diskette 8-4
operator aids, 5251 display station
operator error mode 7-14
operator panel, 5211
keys 5-1
lights 5-2
orders
repeat to address 7-21
set buffer address 7-22
start of field 7-22
start of header 7-21
output commands, 5251
clear format table 7-27
clear unit 7-27
restore screen 7-25
restore tables 7-24
roll 7-26
write data 7-25
write error 7-26
output data stream
display station 7-21
printers 5-13
7-3
pad characters, BSC 9-9
parity 1-4
physical characteristics
5211 printer 5-1, 5-2
5251 display station 7-1
5256 printer 5-3, 5-4
point-to-point networks 9-1
post action control element SVC 3-61
post action controller status word
SVC 3-50
Power Check light 2-2
Power light 2-1
power on-no mode set 7-12
Power switch 2-1
prepare print buffer SVC 3-72
presentation position command 5-17
printer
line 1-1
serial 1-1
5211
commands 5-13
error recovery 5-18, 5-22
input/ output block 5-9
keys 5-1
lights 5-2
operational characteristics 5-4
output data stream 5-13
physical characteristics 5-1
programming characteristics 5-4
status bytes 5-18, 5-19
terminal unit block 5-5
5256
commands 5-13
error recovery 5-18, 5-27
input/ output block 5-9
lights 5-3
operational characteristics 5-4
output data stream 5-13
physical characteristics 5-1
programming characteristics 5-4
status bytes 5-18, 5-24
switches 5-3
terminal unit block 5-5
process mode 1-8
Processor Check light 2-2
program load, disk 6-17
program mode register 1-9
program status register conditioning 4-2
programming considerations 4-1
Q register
1-8
queue/ dequeue SVC
3-53
rate select, data communications 9-2
read command, 5251 7-19
read control record, diskette 8-9
read data diagnostic, disk 6-9
read data, disk 6-3, 6-8
read data, diskette 8-9
read identification, disk 6-8
read identification, diskette 8-9
read input fields command 7-20
read operations
disk 6-8
diskette 8-9
read screen command 7-20
read verify, disk 6-9
recalibrate, diskette 8-9
receive buffer, SOLC 9-27
receive delayed operation, SOLC 9-29
receive initial operations
BSC 9-10,9-11
SOLC 9-28
receive operations
BSC 9-13
SOLC 9-28
register
address recall 1-8
instruction address 1-8
op 1-8
program mode 1-9
Q 1-8
registers
address translation 1-9
index 1-8
instruction 1-8
repeat to address order 7-21
reset operator alert indicators
command 7-21
resource enqueue/dequeue SVC 3-66
response mode, SOLC 9-23
restore screen command 7-25
restore tables command 7-24
roll command 7-26
save screen command 7-19
save tables command 7-19
scan read data, disk 6-3
scan read high or equal, disk 6-11
scan read low or equal, disk 6-11
scan system queue SVC 3-63
SOLC (synchronous data link control)
adapter 9-19
commands and responses 9-21
enable/ disable operation 9-28
error recording 9-32
frame 9-19, 9-20
input/ output block 9-24
main storage data areas 9-27
NRZI transmission coding 9-31
operations 9-28
Index
X-5
SOLC (synchronous data link control) (continued)
receive operations 9-28
response modes 9-23
status bytes 9-29
transmission states 9-23
transmit operations 9-28
zero bit insertion/deletion 9-30
sector enqueue/dequeue SVC 3-73
sector format, disk 6-2
sector format, diskette 8-3
seek, diskette 8-8
sense Address/ Data switches SVC 3-48
sequential sector addressing, disk 6-7
serial printer 1-1
servo tracks, disk 6-1
set bits off masked instruction 3-24
set bits on masked instruction 3-23
set buffer address order 7-22
set operator alert indicators
command 7-20
set program mode register SVC 3-52
set transient area not busy SVC 3-60
size, disk storage 6-1
special features, data communications 9-1
speed
disk 6-1
diskette 8-1
standard features, data
communications 9-1
start of field order 7-22
start of header order 7-21
Start switch 2-4
station address, SOLC frame 9-19
status bytes
BSC 9-13
disk 6-13
diskette 8-10,8-12
display station 7-33
printer 5-18
SOLC 9-29
Stop light 2-4
Stop switch 2-4
storage size, disk 6-1
store register instruction 3-25
subtract logical characters
instruction 3-10
subtract zoned decimal instruction 3-6
supervisor call 3-39
action control element build and queue 3-78
assign 3-46
.
assign system queue space 3-49
asynchronous task ready check 3-71
asynchronous task wait 3-59
control storage transient scheduler 3-79
data communications lOCH 3-77
diskette lOS 3-75
dump main storage terminate task 3-68
event post 3-43
event wait 3-42
fixed disk lOS 3-75
free assigned area 3-47
free current request block 3-45
free page 3-58
X-6
supervisor call (continued)
general post 3-41
general wait 3-40
get page 3-57
I/O transient request 3-77
load address translation registers 3-51
log trace information 3-62
main storage relocation loader 3-81
main storage transient exit 3-56
main storage transient scheduler 3-55
post action control element 3-61
post action controller status word 3-50
prepare print buffer 3-72
queue/dequeue 3-53
resource enqueue/dequeue 3-66
scan system queue 3-63
sector enqueue/ dequeue 3-73
sense Address/ Data switches 3-48
set program mode register 3-53
set transient area not busy 3-60
system control block access 3-54
task control block priority queue 3-70
task post 3-64
task wait 3-65
task work area accesses 3-80
test and set 3-69
transfer control/system transient 3-44
work station lOCH 3-76
work station printer lOCH 3-76
supervisory format, SOLC 9-22
surface
disk 6-1
diskette 8-1
SVC (see supervisor call)
switch
Address/ Data 2-4
diskette
CSIPL 8-18
MSIPL 8-14
Display / Data 2-4
Immediate Power Off 2-2
Lamp Test 2-5
Load 2-1
Mode Selector 2-4
Power 2-1
Start 2-4
Stop 2-4
toggle 2-4
switched network backup 9-3
switches, 5256 5-3
system control block access SVC 3-54
System In Use light 2-1
system models 1-2
system request mode 7-13
task control block priority queue SVC 3-70
task post SVC 3-64
task wait SVC 3-65
task work area accesses SVC 3-80
terminal unit block, printers 5-5
test and set SVC 3-69
test bits off masked instruction 3-34
test bits on masked instruction 3-33
Thermal Check light 2-2
timings, instruction 4-1
toggle switches 2-4
transfer control/system transient SVC 3-44
transfer instruction 3-29
transient state 9-23
transmission codes, BSC 9-3
transmission data rates, data communications 9-1
transmission states, SOLC 9-13
transmit and receive operations, BSC 9-11, 9-12
transmit buffer, SOLC 9-27
transmit final operation, SOLC 9-28
transmit only operation, SOLC 9-28
transparent operation, BSC 9-13
transparent text mode, BSC 9-3
two-address instructions 1-7
work station (see display station, 5251; printer, 5256)
work station lOCH SVC 3-76
work station printer lOCH SVC 3-76
write control record, diskette 8-9
write data
disk 6-3, 6-11
diskette 8-9
write data command 7-25
write error command 7-26
write identification, diskette' 8-9
write operations
disk 6-11
diskette 8-9
XR1
XR2
1-8
1-8
zero and add zoned instruction 3-2
zero bit insertion/deletion, SOLC 9-30
1 drive, diskette 8-1
1200 bps integrated modem 9-2
2-second timeout, BSC 9-13
20 drive, diskette 8-1
2400 bps integrated modem 9-2
5211 printer (see printer, 5211)
5251 display station (see display station, 5251)
5256 printer (see printer, 5256)
Index
X-7
Index of Machine Instructions by Machine Code Sequence
04 xx
06 xx
07 xx
08 xx
OA xx
08 xx
OC xx
00 xx
OE xx
OF xx
zero and add zoned
3-2
add zoned decimal
3-4
subtract zoned decimal
3-6
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
3601
3602
3604
3608
3610
3620
38 xx
39 xx
3A xx
38 xx
3C xx
3D xx
14 xx
16 xx
17 xx
18 xx
1 A xx
18 xx
1C xx
10 xx
1E xx
1 F xx
zero and add zoned 3-2
add zoned decimal
3-4
subtract zoned decimal
3-6
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
24 xx
26 xx
27 xx
28 xx
2A xx
28 xx
2C xx
20 xx
2E xx
2F xx
zero and add zoned 3-2
add zoned decimal
3-4
subtract zoned deci mal
3-6
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
34 01
34 02
34 04
34 08
34 10
34 20
3501
3502
3504
3508
35 10
35 20
store index register 1 3-25
store index register 2 3-25
store program status register 3·25
store address recall register 3-25
store instruction address register 3-25
store instruction address register 3-25
load index register 1 3-26
load index register 2 3-26
load program status register 3-26
load address recall register 3-26
load instruction address register 3-26
load instruction address register 3-26
44 xx
46 xx
47 xx
48 xx
4A xx
48 xx
4C xx
40 xx
4E xx
4F xx
54 xx
56 xx
57 xx
58 xx
5A xx
58 xx
5C
50
5E
5F
xx
xx
xx
xx
64 xx
66 xx
67 xx
68 xx
6A xx
68 xx
6C xx
60 xx
6E xx
6F xx
X-8
add to index register 1 3-12
add to index register 2 3-12
add to program status register 3-12
add to address recall register 3-12
add to instruction address register 3-12
add to instruction address register 3-12
test bits on masked
3-33
test bits off masked 3-34
set bits on masked
3-23
set bits off masked 3-24
move logical immediate 3-22
compare logical immediate 3-32
zero and add zoned 3-2
add zoned decimal
3-4
subtract zoned decimal
3-6
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
zero and add zoned 3-2
add zoned decimal
3-4
subtract zoned decimal
3-6
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
zero and add zoned 3-2
add zoned decimal
3-4
subtract zoned decimal
3-6
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
7401
7402
7404
7408
7410
7420
7501
7502
7504
7508
7510
7520
7601
7602
7604
7608
7610
7620
78 xx
79 xx
7A xx
78 xx
7C xx
7D xx
store index register 1 3-25
3-25
store index register 2
store program status register 3-25
store address recall register 3-25
store instruction address register 3-25
store instruction address register 3-25
load index register 1 3-26
load index register 2 3-26
load program status register 3-26
load address recall register 3-26
load instruction address register 3-26
load instruction address register 3-26
add to index register 1 3-12
add to index register 2 3-12
add to program status register 3-12
3-12
add to'address recall register
add to instruction address register 3-12
add to instruction address register 3-12
3-33
test bits on masked
3-34
test bits off masked
3-23
set bits on masked
3-24
set bits off masked
move logical immediate 3-22
compare logical immediate 3-32
8401
8402
8404
8408
8410
8420
8501
8502
8504
8508
8510
8520
8601
8602
8604
8608
8610
8620
88 xx
89 xx
8A xx
88 xx
8C xx
8D xx
store index register 1 3-25
store index register 2
3-25
store program status register 3-25
store address recall register 3-25
store instruction address register 3-25
store instruction address register 3-25
load index register 1 3-26
load index register 2 3-26
3-26
load program status register
load address recall register 3-26
load instruction address register 3-26
load instruction address register 3-26
add to index register 1 3-12
add to index register 2
3-12
add to program status register 3-12
add to address recall register 3-12
add to instruction address register 3-12
add to instruction address register 3-12
test bits on masked
3-33
test bits off masked
3-34
set bits on masked
3-23
set bits off masked
3-24
move logical immediate 3-22
compare logical immediate 3-32
84 xx
86 xx
87 xx
88 xx
8A xx
88 xx
8C xx
8D xx
8E xx
8F xx
3-2
zero and add zoned
add zoned decimal
3-4
3-6
subtract zoned decimal
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
CO xx
C200
C201
C202
C203
branch on condition
load index register 2
load index register 1
load index register 2
load index register 1
3-35
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
DO xx
D200
D201
D202
D203
branch on condition
load index register 2
load index register 1
load index register 2
load index register 1
3-25
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
94 xx
96 xx
97 xx
98 xx
9A xx
98 xx
9C xx
9D xx
9E xx
9F xx
3-2
zero and add zoned
3-4
add zoned decimal
3-6
subtract zoned decimal
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
EO xx
E200
E201
E202
E203
branch on condition
load index register 2
load index register 1
load index register 2
load index register 1
3-35
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
A4 xx
A6 xx
A7 xx
A8 xx
AA xx
A8 xx
AC xx
AD xx
AE xx
AF xx
zero and add zoned
3-2
add zoned decimal
3-4
subtract zoned decimal
3-6
move hexadecimal character 3-14
edit 3-18
insert and test characters 3-20
move characters 3-16
compare logical characters 3-30
add logical characters 3-8
subtract logical characters 3-10
F2
F4
F2
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
xx
xx
xx
00
xx
xx
xx
00
xx
xx
xx
xx
jump on condition
3-37
supervisor call
3-39
00 xx xx general wait 3-40
01 xx xx general post 3-41
02 event wait 3-42
03 xx xx event post 3-43
04 xx transfer control/system transient
05 free current request block 3-45
06 xx xx xx assign
3-46
07 xx xx xx free assigned areas 3-47
09 sense Address/Data switches 3-48
OA xx assign system queue space 3-49
3-44
Index
X-9
F4 00 08 xx post action controller status word
3-50
. F4 00 OC load address translation registers
3-51
F4 00 00 xx xx set program mode register
3-52
F4 00 OE xx xx xx
queue/dequeue
3-53
F4 00 OF xx xx
system control block access
3-54
F4 xx 10 xx xx
main storage transient scheduler
3-55
F4 00 11
main storage transient exit
3-56
F4 xx 12 xx xx xx
get page
3-57
F4 00 13 free page
3-58
F400 17 xx asynchronous task wait
3-59
F400 18 set transient area not busy
3-60
F400 19 xx xx
post action control element
3-61
F4 00 1 A log trace information
3-62
scan system queue
3-63
F4 00 18 xx xx
F400 10 xx task post
3-64
F4 xx 1 E xx task wait
3-65
F4 xx 21 xx
resource enqueue/dequeue
3-66
F4 00 22 xx xx dump main storage/terminate task
3-68
F4 xx 23 xx
test and set
3-69
F4 00 24 xx
task control block priority queue
3-70
F4 00 25 asynchronous task ready check
3-71
F4 00 26 prepare print buffer
3-72
F4 xx 29 sector enqueue/dequeue
3-73
F4 xx40 fixed disk lOS
3-75
F4 xx 41
diskette lOS
3-75
F4 xx 42 work station printer lOCH
3-76
F4 xx 43 work station lOCH
3-76
F4 xx 44 data communications lOCH
3-77
F4 xx 45
I/O transient request
3-77
F4 xx 4C xx action control element build and queue
3-78
F4 xx 50 xx xx xx
control storage transient scheduler
3-79
F4 xx 51 xx xx xx
task work area accesses
3-80
F4 xx 52 xx
main storage relocation loader
3-81
F5 xx transfer
3-29
F6 xx load program mode register
3-39
X-10
READER'S COMMENT FORM
J)"Tl-
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or request changes to publications. Technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming
support, requests for additional publications, etc, should be directed to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office nearest your location.
CD
C
n
::::I
CD
~
Error in publication (typographical, illustration, and so on). No reply.
Page Number
Error
Inaccurate or misleading information in this publication. Please tell us
about it by using this postage-paid form. We will correct or clarify the
publication, or tell you why a change is not being made, provided you
include your name and address.
Page Number
OJ
~ g ~
~ g.~
::::I
Dl
C
en
en
Cti
3
-W
~
!:!..
Comment
en
»
I\J
cO
I\J
~
W
Note: All comments and suggestions become the property of IBM.
Name ________________________________________
Address
o No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
6
SA21-9243-0
(')
S
»
o:::I
IQ
r
5°
CD
Fold
Fold
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, N. Y.
BUSINESS
REPLY
MAIL
NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY •••
I BM Corporation
General Systems Division
Develop ment Laboratory
Pu bl ications, Dept. 245
Rochester, Minnesota 55901
Fold
'"Tl
CD
2
?
en
w
,J:.
6
.....
Fold
------- --------------®
International Business Machines Corporation
General Systems Division
4111 Northside Parkway N.W.
P.O. Box 2150
Atlanta, Georgia 30301
(U.S.A. only)
General Business Group/International
44 South Broadway
White Plains, New York 10601
U.S.A.
(I nternational)
-- ---
--- -- ------
==-=~= ~
International Business Machines Corporation
General Systems Division
4111 Northside Parkway N.W.
P.O. Box 2150
Atlanta, Georgia 30301
(U.S.A. only)
General Business Group/International
44 South Broadway
White Plains, New York 10601
U.S.A.
(I nternational)
SA21-9243-0
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2011:10:07 19:16-08:00 Modify Date : 2011:10:08 04:10:49-07:00 Metadata Date : 2011:10:08 04:10:49-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.46 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:5b944e5f-aa71-4d7f-8eb5-75a6331d214e Instance ID : uuid:2c4b71cd-5920-4f40-9a35-4ca0e7a2258f Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 282EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools